Home

Yamaha M7CL V1 Owner's Manual

1. Centralogic w e INPUT section P 16 ST IN Stereo Input INPUT section P 16 section P 16 Centralogic section P 19 STEREO MONO MASTER section P 20 USER DEFINED KEYS section P 20 NAVIGATION KEYS section P 21 This illustration shows the top panel of the M7CL 48 The M7CL 32 does not have the INPUT section at the right channels 33 48 M7CL Owners Manual 15 Top panel INPUT section In this section you can control the main parameters of monaural input channels 1 32 1 48 1 SEL key These keys select the channel to be controlled When you press this key to make the LED light that channel will be selected for control in the SELECTED CHANNEL sec tion and in the touch screen In SENDS ON FADER mode the SEL keys of all chan nels will light 2 CUE key These keys select the channel to be cue monitored If cue is on
2. 1 4 CO 1 Channel strip for INPUT channels 1 32 In this owner s manual whenever there is a difference between the M7CL 32 model and the M7CL 48 model specifications that apply only to the M7CL 48 model are enclosed curly brackets e g INPUT jacks 1 32 1 48 M7CL Owners Manual The M7CL s channel structure The M 7CLs channel structure The M7CL provides the following input channels and output channels B input channels This section processes an input signal and sends it to vari ous buses STEREO MONO MIX MATRIX There are two types of input channel as follows INPUT channels 1 32 11 48 These channels are used to process monaural signals default the input signals from the monaural analog input jacks INPUT jacks 1 32 INPUT jacks 1 48 are assigned to these channels ST IN channels 1 4 These channels are used to process stereo signals By default the input signals from EFFECT RETURN 1 4 are assigned to these channels Signal assignments to the input channels can be changed as desired Output channels This s
3. 196 User Level settings 191 User NAIM scoccia 28 User settings 191 Using an internal effect via send return 168 Using the Centralogic Section 61 63 66 67 75 76 Using the faders SENDS ON FADER mode 64 Using the faders of the top panel 61 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL OCH 66 75 V VAR 14 VARI PRE EQ 2 tns 212 VARI PRE FADER 212 Version Power supply field 207 Virtual lt ctecsscacdtenstcaaxsinoodenetes 157 W Warning 22 4 262 Word 14 208 Word clock connections and settings ei eee 43 WORD CLOCK IN OUT 5 4 2 1 23 Index M7CL Owner s Manual Appendices im 277 278 M7CL Owners Manual M7CL 48 M7CL 32 Block Diagram 48V MASTER 48V gt 55 ON HA 448V TALKBACK AD INPUT INPUT pt TALKBACK GAIN INPUT INPUT 1 32 48 MIX STQ MATRIX CUE es ee 12 1516 LR C 12 78 LR CASCADE OUT MIX CASCADE OUT 1 16 l CASCADE IN et H To OUTPUT PATCH i SERE OUTPUT PATCH P
4. 125 Using scene memories 125 Storing a 125 Recalling a scene 128 Using user defined keys to recall 129 Editing scene memories 130 Sorting and renaming scene memories 130 Scene memory 192 Copying pasting a scene 132 Clearing a 133 Cutting SCOFI 134 Inserting a scene 134 Using the Focus function 135 Using the Recall Safe function 136 Using the Fade function 139 18 Monitor Cue 141 About the monitor cue functions 141 Using the Monitor function 142 Using the Cue function 145 About cue groups 2 145 Operating the Cue function 146 14 Talkback Oscillator 149 About the talkback and oscillator functions 149 Using talkback 149 Using th
5. 28 Dialog 28 Viewing the touch screen 28 Function access area 28 Main E 29 NAMES e 30 Using the tool buttons ee ocean terreno inei ee eR ud 31 About the tool 31 Using libraries mE TENTE 31 Initializing settings 35 Copying pasting settings 36 Comparing two 36 4 Connections and setup 99 COMIC CULO INS PM 39 Setting up to use the M7CL 43 Restoring the current scene to the default 43 Word clock connections and settings 43 M7CL Owners Manual Making HA Head Amp settings 44 Sending an input channel signal to the STEREO 47 9 Input channel operations 91 Signal flow for input channels 51 Specifying the channel name and icon 53 Making HA Head Amp settings 55 Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO buses 57 Sending the signal from an input channel TO a MIX DUS c
6. 270 1 M7CL Owners Manual Dimensions M7CL 48 _ 955 PSL360 option _ GO 9 nananana YA o OC COCOA CU V e o 340 MBM7CL option _ o 286 18 7 unn Eu 2090 99999969 H oo oo000000 o BEBE coco y LM M I lt 535 T 442 o 297 _ 130 L T SESEEEEE n H230 144 aj 124 1026 1274 M7CL 32 _ 955 PSL360 option BAAAAAaa jp nananana 6 ELITE 340 MBM7CL option 286 2 216 K e 00000004 0000000900 M qum o N OOoooooo OOOoOoooo 0000 2222202020 e CICIDEICICIOCI Oooo r UI 72755 oo Wi i T L o o
7. LLI Z Z lt L O Q O LLI 0 9 E 9 Q O GAIN 3 4L E 1 35 EE M oo ooo M7CI i i IN A Q FREQUENCY FREQUENCY NOR Q GAIN FREQUENCY GAIN FREQUENCY SELECTED CHANNEL section M7CL Owners Manual 179 About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen When you press one of the encoders in the SELECTED CHANNEL section the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will appear in the touch screen The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen shows most of the parameters of the channel currently selected by its SEL key This screen lets you check the settings being controlled by the encoders of the SELECTED CHAN NEL section The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen contains the following items gm mem e sii M c TO MIX TO MATRIX field When an input channel is selected you can switch the on off status of the signals sent from that channel to each MIX bus and MATRIX bus and view the send levels By switching between the TO MIX and TO MATRIX buttons you can switch the buses that are shown in the SELECTED CHAN NEL VIEW screen or OVERVIEW screen When a MIX STEREO or MONO channel is selected M Here you can switch the on off status of the signals sent from that channel to each MATRIX bus and view the send levels e When a MATRIX channel is sele
8. 1 2 SEL SEL channel CUE key CUE CUE ST IN ST IN 1 2 SEL SEL ST IN channel CUE key CUE CUE If INPUT channels or ST IN channels are assigned to the Central ogic section you can also use the CUE keys of the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group 2 DCA CUE group The cue signals of DCA groups make up this group To enable Cue for this group assign the DCA groups to the Centralogic section and press a CUE key in the Central ogic section to turn Cue on oo k SEL SEL Centralogic section CUE key CUE CUE when controlling DCA groups 3 OUTPUT CUE group The cue signals of output channels make up this group To switch Cue on off for this group press the CUE key of a STEREO MONO channel or assign MIX channels or MATRIX channels to the Centralogic section and press a CUE key of the Centralogic section MATRIX MIX9 16 MIx1 8 SEL SEL g Centralogic section CUE key CUE CUE when controlling MIX channels or MATRIX channels STEREO MONO STEREO MONO channel CUE key SEL CUE e If STEREO MONO channels are assigned to the Centralogic sec tion you can also use the CUE keys of the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group 4 Other CUE group These are the Cue signals operated using buttons dis played in the touch screen This group is enabled if you turn on the CUE but
9. 1 Icon Channel number Channel name This indicates the icon selected for that channel the channel number and the channel name M7CL Owner s Manual 2 INSERT field Here you can make insert related settings Press either the left or right field to choose PRE EQ before the attenuator or PRE FADER before the fader as the insert out in position 3 INSERT OUT popup button This indicates the output port that is selected as the insert out for this channel Press this button to open a popup window where you can select the output port 4 INSERT IN popup button This indicates the input port that is selected as the insert in for this channel Press this button to open a popup window where you can select the input port 5 INSERT ON OFF button This button switches the insert on off If this button is off the insert signal path is bypassed INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window 8ch 1 Channel number Icon This shows the channel number and the icon that is selected for that channel You can press this field to change the selected channel 2 Channel name This indicates the name assigned to that channel 3 INSERT OUT popup button This indicates the output port that is selected as the insert out for this channel Press this button to open a popup window where you can select the output port The currently specified insert out in position is shown below the button 4 INSERT ON OFF button This
10. 215 26 C Calibration function 217 Cascade connections 210 Cascade master 211 Cascade slave 210 Centralogic section 19 87 90 CH 124 122 gt 29 113 120 CH MOVE 123 Changing Input patch settings 98 Output patch settings 95 195 User level 196 Channel Link 120 Channel name and icon 53 71 Channel parameters Copying 122 nro PERIERE REP 124 WO WING ERES 123 Channel structure 13 Clearing a scene 133 COMMENT field 126 COMPANDER HARD COMPANDER H 227 COMPANDER SOFT COMPANDER S 227 Comparing two settings 36 5 5 226 39 Console lock 201 Control Change 181 187 245 Control change parameter assignments 247 Controlling DCA groups 115 Controlling m
11. 57 72 Libraries 31 Link OOM 120 214 Index LIST WINDOWS i uccide 27 Logging in NN ER E RR 193 M 1 26 ecc 9 MAC ADDRESS 214 Main area 29 MATRIX buses 212 MATRIX channels 1 8 13 70 MATRIX meters 17 MBM7CL meter bridge 17 155 272 Meters 29 153 Ip T QU 181 MIDI Data Format 255 MIDI Implementation Chart 273 MIDI IN OUT connectors 23 MIX bus types VARI FIXED 14 MIX 212 MIX channels 1 16 13 69 MIX meters 17 Mixing parameter operation applicability m 252 MONITOR qr 29 Monitor function 141 MONITOR section 19 MONO C channel 13 69 Moving the parameters of a 123 Multi mode 185 Multifunction encoder operations 26 Multiple selection specifying a range 25 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN 116 MUTE 118 MUTE SAFE 116 Mute Safe function 119 MUTE SAFE indicator 117 N NAVIGATION KEYS section
12. PRE HPF BOATS OT MATRIX1 3 7 i LEVEL je ON To MATRIX Ifi TOLCR O il a PRE FADER POST ON 1 em p mess anga gt ee mE IE EQ 12 OO 979 3 DE ESSER I To MATRIX 34 CSR LEVEL 6 o 8lig PRE FADER POST 7 PRE HPF PREEQ POSTEQ PRE FADER POST ON i b STEREO i PAN PRE FADER ee Ee TPT TPT Tb db dbo 1 4 INSERT OUT INSERT OUT PAN MODE 5710 MONO LR MONO H EE Set SelfPREEQ MONO T i me aan et E itas CENE s 4 lt POSTON CH 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 POST EQ 32 FIXED 00 0 i9 ____ og oO PN did CH 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 33 40 41 48 POST 48 T dg MUR POSTPANL NI 22222222 MP 222 4 ON 1 STEREO POST TON LEVEL 111 STEREO L R MONO C PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON Oe grise io ibi C 1 VARI N LEVEL 1 To RACKIN PATCH SLOT 1 16 Mo eye hee eee cs ge E 1 OUTPUT PACH stereo E FADER INSERT OUT OMX PRE EQ PRE FADER POSTON PN LEVEL INSERT OUT L R MONO C lt TOr8 p
13. INPUT 1 32 lt M7CL 32 gt Rs 150Q GAIN Min Master fader at nominal level and 84 79 one Ch fader at nominal level Rs 150Q GAIN Min dBu All INPUTs lt M7CL 48 gt OMNI OUT 1 16 6000 Master fader at nominal level and all Ch 1 48 in faders at 62 nominal level Rs 150Q GAIN Min All INPUTs M7CL 32 OMNI OUT 1 16 6000 Master fader at nominal level and all Ch 1 32 in faders at 64 nominal level OMNI OUT 1 16 6000 Residual Output Noise ST Master Off 286 PHONES Residual Output Noise PHONES Level Control Min 286 Hum amp Noise are measured with a 6 dB octave filter 12 7 kHz equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB octave attenuation Dynamic Range Fs 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz input Output Mi Typ Max Uni INPUT 1 48 lt M7CL 48 gt OMNIOUT1 16 6000 AD DA GAIN Min INPUT 1 32 lt 7 1 32 gt ST IN 1 4 L R OMNI OUT 1 16 6000 AD DA GAIN Min 9 Dynamic range are measured with a 6 dB octave filter 12 7 kHz equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB octave attenuation Sampling Frequency Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Word Clock Int 44 1 kHz Frequency Word Clock Int 48 kHz Word Clock Int 44 1 kHz Internal Clock Accuracy Word Clock int48 kB or ock In 7 Word Clock Int 44 1 kHz Word Clock Int 48 kHz Jitter 268 1 M7CL Owne
14. COBOPSIORIO 4 While performing on the mic or instrument use the Centralogic section s multifunction encoders 1 8 to adjust the HA gain of each channel Adjust the level as high as possible without allowing the OVER segment of the channel level meter in the Centralogic section to light when the mic or instru ment is being played at its loudest volume The input level is also shown by the level meter of the corresponding INPUT section or ST IN section NOTE e The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power wm gt e Inthe OVERVIEW screen you can also switch the head amp s phantom power orvoff and switch the phase between normal and reverse To do so press the selected knob in the HA PHASE field once again to access the popup window For details gt p 55 5 Use the navigation keys to switch the eight channels controlled by the Centralogic sec tion and adjust the gain for other input channels in the same way Setting up to use the M7CL Sending an input channel signal to the STEREO bus This section explains how to adjust the gain to set the level of the signal sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and adjust the pan balance so that the s
15. 21 Network address 214 NRPN Non Registered Parameter Number 187 NRPN parameter assignments 249 M7CL Owner s Manual Appendices im 275 Index 276 0 OMNI OUT jacks 1 16 22 Opon Card ee 42 OSCILLATOR 151 Other Functions 269 Output channels 13 69 OUTPUT QUE 145 Output patch settings 95 OVERVIEW screen 29 88 P Parameter change 181 195 PATCH NAME popup window PATCH c 98 OE 52 PHONES LEVEL 141 PHONES LEVEL 24 PHONES LEVEL LINK ains 141 PHONES OUT headphone output jack 24 Pin Assignment 270 PODUD WINDOWS sccndsissiendssnsesenscacens 28 POWER switch 23 PRE EO 212 PRE FADER 212 Preferences 198 Program Change 181 Protect symbol 126 n symbol READ ONLY symbol 126 RACK T m 29 Rear 22 Recall Safe 136 RECALL UNDO tete dete 128 Recalling a scene 128 REMOTE
16. Reverb and symphonic balance REV SYM 0 100 0 all reverb 100 all sym phonic THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Se PORE Low pass filter cutoff frequency 925 4000 Modulation speed Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 ROTE to determine FREQ AF BOIS Pa d da d d Effects Parameters REV SYMPHO One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in series wk Reverb and symphonic reverb bal REV BAL 0 100 ance 0 all symphonic reverb 100 all reverb THRU 21 2 Hz LN 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency m Low pass filter cutoff frequency Fea 0 05 40 00e Modulation speed Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTE 021 to determine FREQ o HP RITE Pe d 4 d d REU PAN This is a 1 in 2 out series connected reverb and auto pan effect wk _ Reverb and panned reverb bal REV BAL 0 100 ance 0 all panned reverb 100 all reverb THRU 21 2 Hz LN 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency aan Low pass filter cutoff frequency 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 2 NOTE to determine FREQ 1 L gt R LCR Turn L Turn R 2 4H PMT Be ddd ded 4 d 8 M7CL
17. YAMAHA DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE Owner s Manual 1 Eg E 110 i TX E ee iia Pelt as eee ee ica qs DYNAMICS 2 Hc NS WA j fa E Lo rd E FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifi cations not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product IMPORTANT When connecting this product to accesso ries and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Failure to follow instruc tions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class B digital devices Compliance with these require ments provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of
18. FILE or TIME STAMP at the top of each column in the file list The list will be sorted as follows according to the col umn title you pressed D 2 00 9 7 FILE Sort the list in alphanumerical order of file name 2 COMMENT Sort the list in alphanumeric order of the comment 3 READ ONLY Sort the list according to Write Protect on off status 4 FILE TYPE Sort the list according to file type 5 TIME STAMP Sort the list in order of date time of editing Using a USB storage device to save load data E 4 If necessary press the directory icon and change the directory By pressing the same location again you can change the dii d To move to the next higher level press the arrow but direction ascending or descending in which the list is sorted ton in the PATH field If you want to edit the file name or com 5 Press the PASTE button ment press the FILE NAME field or COM A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter MENT field of each file to access the the paste destination file name keyboard window For details on entering text refer to Entering names For details on entering text refer to Entering names gt p 30 p 30 6 Enter the paste destination file name and press the PASTE button If you specified a file name that already exists a mes sage will ask you for confirmation Press the OK but ton to execute NOTE
19. Here you can make HA related settings for the cur rently selected channel 1 Icon Channel number Channel name This shows the icon channel number and channel name for that channel 2 48V button This switches the phantom power on red or off black for the head amp assigned to this channel M7CL Owners Manual ff 55 Making HA Head Amp settings HA PATCH popup window 8 ch Here you can make HA related settings for a group of eight channels 9 n 1 Channel select button This shows the 1con channel number and channel name for the channel When you press this button that channel will be selected for operations and the corre sponding SEL key will light 2 INPUT PATCH button This indicates the currently selected input port You can press this button to access the INPUT PORT SELECT popup window where you can select the input port for each channel 3 48V button This switches the phantom power on red or off black for the head amp assigned to this channel 4 GAIN knob This indicates the gain of the head amp assigned to this channel Use multifunction encoders 1 8 to adjust the value The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the corre sponding port 5 Phase button This switches the head amp assigned to the channel between normal phase black and reverse phase orange HA PATCH p
20. 306 R SLOT OUT DELAY TIME HIGH 3DO6 3D35 a E OMNI OUT DELAY id duds DIGITAL OUT DELAY udi a d n Ee 3EB3 24 SERT 38A5 3EBB S 06 388 3EC3 ud 2 38BD 3ECB AEST 38C9 3ED3 SEPT 38D5 3EDB 38E1 252 38ED 3EEB ee 38F9 3EF3 38FF Canaan 7 6 Sere 3908 3EFF 3911 3F03 13912 3961 GAIN20 3F04 3F07 LCR IN MIX CSR 396 3989 GAIN21 3F08 3FOB DIRECT OUT N 5 3902 3929 GAIN22 3FOC 3FOF INPUT STEREO 3402 339 GAIN23 3F13 N N 3A42 3A49 DCA 3A42 GAIN24 3F14 3 17 FADER 3A4E 3A55 GAIN25 3F18 3F1B MUTEMASTER ON Bu SETS EST RECALL SAFE O 3A66 3AEA GAIN27 3F20 3F23 GAINI 3B06 3B0B GAIN28 3F24 3F27 GAIN2 3Bl 3B1B GAIN29 3F28 3F2B GAIN3 3826 2 GAIN30 3F2C 3F2F HA v Q Q lt 3838 3848 jur 3858 3568 3878 M7CL Owners Manual 251 Mixing parameter operation applicability 252 Mixing parameter operation applicability This table indicates how the behaviors of each of the input channel and output channel parame ters are affected by Stereo Link Recall Safe and User Level settings input Channels LINK RECALL SAFE USER LEVEL O INPUT HA INPUT HA NAME ICON BEEN INPUT NAME INPUT NAME INPUT LC INPUT ALL PROCESSING INPUT INPUT INPUT ON INPUT ON INPUT FADER INPUT FADER
21. 9 61 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section 61 Using the Centralogic section 63 Using the faders SENDS ON FADER mode 64 Sending the signal from an input channel to the MATRIX buses 66 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section 66 Using the Centralogic section 67 6 Output channel operations 69 Signal flow for output channels 69 Specifying the channel name and icon 71 Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO bus 72 Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses 75 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section 19 Using the Centralogic section 76 7 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 79 About the SELECTED CHANNEL section 79 About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 80 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 81 8 Operations in the Centralogic section 7 About the Centralogic section 87 About the OVERVIEW screen 88 Operations in the Centralogic section 90 Fixing the channels or DCA groups of the Centralogic section 94 9 Input output patching 99 Changing the output patch set
22. Input channel operations 51 Signal flow for input channels 52 INPUT PATCH This assigns an input signal to the input channel o Phase Switches the phase of the input signal HPF High Pass Filter This is a high pass filter that cuts the region below the specified frequency ATT Attenuator Attenuates boosts the level of the input signal 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer A parametric EQ with four bands HIGH HIGH MID LOW MID and LOW DYNAMICS 1 This is a dynamics processor that can be used for gating ducking expander or compressor DYNAMICS 2 This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a com pressor compander or de esser LEVEL DCA 1 8 Adjusts the input level of the channel ON On off Turns the input channel on off If off that channel is muted PAN This adjusts the panning of the signal sent from the INPUT channel to the STEREO bus If necessary this pan setting can also be applied to signals sent to two paired MIX MATRIX buses BALANCE On ST IN channels the BALANCE parameter is used instead of PAN The BALANCE parameter adjusts the volume balance of the left right signals sent from the ST IN channel to the STEREO bus If necessary you can turn on PAN LINK in the BUS SETUP popup window so that the setting of this parameter will also be applied to the sig nal sent to two MIX or MATRIX buses that are set to ste reo M7CL Owner s Manual LCR
23. NAVIGATION KEYS section Centralogic section When you press one of the navigation keys in the NAVIGATION KEYS section the channels DCA groups corresponding to that key will be assigned to the Centralogic section and can be controlled using the faders ON keys and CUE keys of the Centralogic section M7CL Owners Manual 87 About the OVERVIEW screen About the OVERVIEW screen 88 The OVERVIEW screen simultaneously shows the main parameters for the up to eight chan nels currently assigned to the Centralogic section When you use the navigation keys to select the eight channels that will be assigned to the Centr alogic section the touch screen will display the OVERVIEW screen for those channels The DCA key is an exception to this When you press one of the knobs in the OVERVIEW screen the same type of knob for each channel will be enclosed by a heavy frame This heavy frame indicates that the parameter correspond ing to those knobs can be edited In this state you can operate multifunction encoders 1 8 to edit the parameter values of the corresponding channels There is no OVERVIEW screen for the DCA group This means that if you press the DCA key to assign the DCA groups to the Centralogic section the OVERVIEW screen will continue to show the eight channels that had previ ously been displayed In this case the Centralogic section faders and ON keys will control DCA group operations an
24. 3 STEREO MONO buttons These buttons are individual on off switches for the signal that is sent from each channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST MONO mode 4 TO ST PAN TO ST BALANCE knob For INPUT channels this acts as the PAN knob that adjusts the left right panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus For ST IN channels this acts as the BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus To adjust the value press the knob to select it and operate the corresponding multi function encoder If the MODE button is set to LCR mode the following button and knob are displayed instead of the STEREO MONO button 3 CH 1 FEET GTI 5 LCR button This button is an overall on off switch for the signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus If this button 15 off no signals will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus 6 CSR knob This knob adjusts the relative level of the signals sent from the channel to the STEREO L R bus and to the MONO C bus in a range of 0 100 To adjust the value press the knob to select it and operate the corre sponding multifunction encoder M7CL Owners Manual Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO buses TO STEREO MONO popup window ALL The screen shows the status of the signals sent from all input channels to the STEREO bus
25. HI RIPE Be Badd Bd d d d 9 RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio 41 Used in conjunction with TEMPO 2 MOD NOTE 1 to determine FREQ Fe dh ddd ode d 4 d d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting DELAY LCR LN DC High pass filter cutoff frequency One input two output 3 tap delay left center right a 6 0 KHZ ow pass filter cutoff frequency Feedback gain plus values for 1 FS HG E J d Jd FB 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus Maximum value depends on the tempo setting values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio B CHORUS THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Two input two output chorus effect 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LENS SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed Used in conjunction with TEMPO AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth NOTE L 1 to determine DELAY L PM DEPTH 0 100 Pitch modulation depth NOTE C ee M TEMPO MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Modulation waveform NOTE R j Used in conjunction with TEMPO WAVE to determine DELAY R Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 MOTE TS d to determine FB DLY SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO Dind to determine DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTER to determine DELAY R NOTE FBL
26. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box Initialization will begin NOTE Do not press any button until initialization has been com pleted 5 Press the EXIT button The M7CL will start up in normal operating mode e Alternatively you can continue by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen Calibration function Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen Calibration function Here s how to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch screen 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY 3 Press the START button STORE key of the panel turn on the A confirmation dialog box will appear power After the opening screen the following startup menu 4 Press the OK button in the dialog box screen will appear A cross shaped cursor will appear in the screen 5 This cursor will appear a total of three times Press each location at which it appears In order to set the detection points accurately press the cross shaped cursor from the position and posture in which you normally operate the unit 6 Press the EXIT button The M7CL will start up in normal operating mode 2 Press the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION Alternatively you can continue by selecting a different menu button instead of pressing the EXIT button The TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear allowing you to adjust the touch
27. ROS Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 ddd de 4 d 8 on Low pass filter cutoff frequency M7CL Owner s Manual Appendices im 237 Effects Parameters 238 E MULTI FILTER Two input two output 3 band multi filter 24 dB octave TYPE 1 LPF HPF BPF Filter 1 type high pass low pass band pass FREQ 1 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 1 frequency LEVEL 1 0 100 Filter 1 level TYPE 2 LPF HPF BPF Filter 2 type high pass low pass band pass FREQ 2 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 2 frequency LEVEL 2 0 100 Filter 2 level TYPE 3 LPF HPF BPF Filter 3 type high pass low pass band pass FREQ 3 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 3 frequency LEVEL 3 0 100 Filter 3 level FREEZE One input two output basic sampler In MANUAL mode recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons In INPUT mode Record Ready mode is engaged by pressing the REC button and actual recording is triggered by the input signal REC MODE MANUAL INPUT Recording delay For plus values recording starts after the trigger is received For minus values record ing starts before the trigger is received In MOMENT mode the sample plays only while the that the PLAY button is pressed In CONT mode playback continues once the PLAY button has been pressed The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM param eter In INPUT mode playback is triggered b
28. x Nominal Output 10 44 4 3 Max Input dBu Sa ____ 40 __ 4 0 30 5 F ME vo NC 0 6 PHONES 10 40 wu dg AL Jay Max Output 10 4 9 Nominal Input t dBu NE NITE E C d 121 150 980 20 50 8 tg 20 9 EPISELE 75mW 280 30 60 10 E E E E E E The position on the level 30 11 control is 10dB lowered 2 Max Input 42dBu P 50 80 3 OMNI OUT1 16 50 14 Default setting 90 9 16 2 Nominal Input 62dBu 70 100 70 17 INPUT 1 48 GAIN MIN 256 110 _ 18 ST IN GAIN MIN ET 19 INPUT 1 48 GAIN MAX ET ST IN GAIN MAX 90 21 8 TALKBACK GAIN MIN 100 130 22 TALKBACK GAIN MAX in 110 140 23 Bs 24 120 150 25 n 130 160 gt 140 4 170 28 b 29 150 180 30 150 31 160 190 6 ee 4 __ es 33 Max DSP Noise Floor 170 200 170 34 180 210 35 180 36 190 190 DdBu O0 775Vrms OdBFS Full Scale For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below Pour plus de d tails sur
29. 2 C C c c C Cc Cc C c 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 0000000000003 000000000000 0000000000005 0000000000008 0000000000008 0000000000008 000000000000 000000000000 SELECTED CHANNEL section In this section you can control the mix parameters for the currently selected input channel or output channel o lt oe ot lt MATRIX Q FREQUENCY FREQUENCY GAIN FREQUENCY GAIN FREQUENCY GAIN O O 0000090 92 9 o9 OOOO 000 16 FREQUENCY 1 MIX MATRIX encoders When an input channel is selected This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from that channel to the MIX MATRIX buses When a MIX channel is selected This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the selected MIX channel to the MATRIX buses When a MATRIX channel is selected This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from each MIX channel to the selected MATRIX bus 2 HA encoder Adjusts the head amp gain of an input channel This does nothing if another type of channel is selected NOTE PAD will be internally switched or off when the gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom powe
30. ATT HPF EQ popup window 1 ch This lets you view and edit all EQ parameters of the currently selected channel This is convenient when you want to make detailed EQ settings for a specific channel 2 9 a EQ and Dynamics Co 9 1 TYPE I II buttons These buttons select the type of EQ Turn the TYPEI button on if you want to use the same algorithm as on previous Yamaha digital mixers or turn the TYPE II button on if you want to use the newly developed algo rithm TYPE II reduces the interference between bands 2 LOW shelving button If this button is on the LOW band EQ will function as a shelving type EQ In this case the LOW band Q knob is not shown M7CL Owners Manual 105 Using EQ 3 FLAT button This button resets the GAIN parameters of all bands to the default value 0 0 dB If you press this button a confirmation dialog box will appear 4 HIGH shelving button If this button is on the HIGH band EQ will function as a shelving type EQ In this case the HIGH band Q knob is not shown 5 Low pass filter button If this button is on the HIGH band EQ will function as a low pass filter In this case the HIGH band Q knob is not shown and the GAIN knob will act as an on off switch for the low pass filter 6 EQ ON OFF button Switches the EQ on off 7 Level meter These meters indicate the peak levels before EQ and after EQ If the signal clips before or afte
31. MIDI Data Format Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE 4 4 1 Format Parameter change Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE i Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Receive Data will be received when Parameter change Rx is on and the Device number Dn Onnnnnnn nh 5 number High of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when Onnnnnnn nl Scene Library number Low Parameter change ECHO is on The corresponding memory library title will eh Element High be changed immediately the data is received El Element Low Transmission 01111111 Ih Index High Parameter Change Message will be sent in reply to Request If Parameter change 01111111 11 Index Low ECHO is on the message will be sent as it is Ch Channel High STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message cl Channel Low ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA EOX 11110111 7 End of exclusive SUB STATUS 0O0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer 4 4 Module Name has ee MODULE NAME number size 2 SCENE LIB SCENE 0 300 0 response only 16 CATEGORY FUNCTION 01001100 L ASCII CODE INPUT EQ LIB 1 199 1 40 response only 16 NAME OUTPUT EQ LIB OUTEQ 1 199 1 3 response only 16 01101001 i ASCII CODE Dynamics LIB DYNA 1 199 1 41 response only 16 GEQ LIB 0 199 0 only 16 apnd EFFECT LIB EFFECT
32. OO M7CL Owners Manual 195 User Level settings Editing a user authentication key If you are logged in as a user you can edit your user defined keys and preference settings and overwrite save them onto your user authentication key If you are logged in as a Power User you can also change the user level 1 Log in as a user and edit the user defined keys p 200 and preference settings p 198 If you are logged in as a Power User you can also change the user level 2 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen SAVE KEY button 3 Press the SAVE KEY button A dialog box will ask whether you really want to over write save the user authentication key 4 Press OK to overwrite save the user authentication key 196 1 M7CL Owners Manual Changing the user level Here s how to view or change the user level For the Administrator There is no such setting for the Administrator himself but the setting for the Guest account can be changed e For the Guest The setting of the Guest account can be viewed It cannot be changed For a normal User The setting of that User account can be viewed It cannot be changed For a Power User The setting of that User account can be changed 1 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen USER SETUP button 2 Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP
33. So that the signals input to the AD8HR will be sent to the M7CL use a D sub25 pin AES EBU cable to connect the M7CL ADSHR s DIGITAL OUT A or B to an I O card installed in a slot of the M7CL Audio signals gt Remote signals gt M7CL AD8HR 1 HA REMOTE 2 connector HA REMOTE 1 connector DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 2 connector DIGITAL OUT A connector DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector HA REMOTE 2 connector Analog inputs x 8 Up to six units lt Graphic EQ and effects M7CL Owners Manual 177 Using an external head amp 3 Virtual racks Remotely controlling These are six racks in which remotely controllable external HA units can be mounted If an external HA external head amp is mounted its settings GAIN setting and phantom power on off are shown When you press a rack the Here s how an external head amp subsequently referred EXTERNAL popup window for that rack will to as the external HA connected to the REMOTE con nector can be remotely controlled from the M7CL 4 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup but 1 Connect the M7CL and external HA ton This button accesses the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window where you can specify the input ports to which the external HA mounted in the rack will be connected 5 Field select tabs Use these tabs to switch the
34. 151 15 Meters 193 Operations in the METER screen 153 Using the MBM7CL meter bridge option 155 16 Graphic EQ and effects 197 About the virtual EaCK 157 Virtual rack operations 158 Graphic EQ operations 161 About the graphic 161 Inserting a GEQ in a 161 Using the 31 Band GEQ 163 Using the Flex I5 GE 165 About the internal effects 167 Using an internal effect via SOFc T Ol I Esas bete Pme ono eoe 168 Inserting an internal effect into a channel 170 Editing the internal effect parameters 171 Using the Tap Tempo function 173 Using the Freeze 1 175 Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries 176 Using an external head amp 177 External head amp connections 177 Remotely controlling an external head amp 178 17 MIDI 181 MIDI functionality on the M7CL 181 Basic 182 Using program changes to recall scenes and library items 184 Using control cha
35. Es L R MONO C A L B R RACK4 same as 1 INSERT OUT 1 32 48 MIX INSERT OUT 1 16 STEREO INSERT OUT EFFECT CUE n L R MONO C RACKS IN EFFECT CUE A L B R 6 IN 2 MATRIX A L B R RACK6 same as RACKS pA INSERT OUT S 18 7 5 A L B R HH same as j RACK8 IN ER A L B R 1 RACK8 same as RACKS RACK7 OUT A L B R RACK8 OUT A L B R MATRIX INSERT OUT 1 8 DIRECT OUT 1 32 48 MIX OUT 1 16 STEREO OUT L R MONO C MATRIX OUT 1 8 MONITOR OUT L R MONO C MIX OUT 1 16 STEEREO OUT L R MONO C MATRIX OUT 1 8 MONITOR OUT L R MONO C OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH DELAY MAX 600ms OMINI OUT DELAY MAX 600ms MATRIX OUT1 8 M7CL 48 M7CL 32 Level Diagram Analog gt Digital Digital epe Analog MASTER Analog Digital Ap INPUT EQ DYN DYN DCA BUS EQ LEVEL MASTER OUTPUT ATT Analog CAIN PATCH HPF INSERT ATT x4 1 2 INSERT LEVEL x8 ON PAN Adder INSERT x4 DYN BAL ON PATCH DELAY TRIM dBu dBFS Bit dBu 130 0 0 0 Max Input 30dBu O O NOO LLL No NO Digital Clipping Level 2 Output 430 24dBu 24 1 24 Nen 10 2 CASCADEIN CASCADE OUT ven i OUT OUT OUT 10 20 13 Nominal rtodBu eae
36. M7CL Owner s Manual 2 Panels and controls 23 Under the front pad Under the front pad 0 PHONES LEVEL knob Adjusts the level of the signal that is output from the PHONES OUT jack 2 PHONES OUT headphone output jack This headphone jack lets you monitor the MONITOR OUT or CUE signal 8 TALKBACK jack This is a balanced XLR 3 31 jack to which a talkback mic can be connected You can make settings in the screen to supply 48V phantom power to this jack This is used to send instructions from the mixer operator to the desired output channel 4 TALKBACK GAIN knob This adjusts the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack D D 24 M7CL Owners Manual Chapter 3 Basic operation of the M CL This chapter explains the M7CLs user interface its basic operations Basic operations in the top panel touch screen This section explains the basic procedures you can perform in the M7CLs top panel and touch screen In general you will operate the M7CL using the appropriate combination of the opera tions explained here Pressing the touch screen Place your fingertip on a button knob or field in the touch screen and press lightly You will mainly use this opera tion to switch screens and pages to select the parameter to be operated and to turn a button on off Depending on the type of button the number may increase or decrease depending on the loc
37. p 39 2 In the top panel INPUT section press the SEL key for the channel corresponding to the INPUT jack you want to control In the state immediately after scene 000 15 recalled the input signals from INPUT jacks 1 32 1 48 are being sent to INPUT channels 1 32 1 48 respec tively and can be controlled by corresponding channel strip For example if you want to make head amp settings for INPUT jack 7 press the SEL key of the channel strip for INPUT channel 7 INPUT section channel strip 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 S SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL CUE CUE CUE CUE CUE CUE CUE OVER OVER 6 6 OVER 6 OVER OVER 6 OVER 6 E 6 OVER 6 1 SEL key 2 Level meter When you press the SEL key the key LED will light The lit LED indicates that this channel is selected for operations The level meter of that channel strip will indicate the input level for that channel 3 In the SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the left of t
38. 1 SEND TO This indicates the number channel name and icon of the MATRIX bus that is currently selected as the send destination for signals 2 buttons Use these buttons to switch between send destination MATRIX buses 3 Channel select button This indicates the channel number the 1con selected for that channel and the channel name When you press this button that channel will be selected for operations and the corresponding SEL key will light 4 PRE button This button selects the location from which the signal of the MIX or STEREO MONO channel will be sent to the MATRIX bus The signal is sent from the post fader position when this button is off and from the pre fader position when this button is on 5 TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF button This is an on off switch for the signal sent from the MIX or STEREO MONO channel to the MATRIX bus 6 TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the MIX or STEREO MONO channel to the MATRIX bus To adjust the level operate multifunction encod ers 1 8 If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo the TO MATRIX PAN knob for a stereo MIX channel or the STEREO channel the TO MATRIX BAL ANCE knob and TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob are shown in this location 7 ALL PRE button This button sets PRE as the position from which the signal is sent from all channels to the MATRIX bus ALL POST button This button sets POST as th
39. 4 TO ST PAN BALANCE knob For monaural MIX channels this acts as the PAN knob that adjusts the left right panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus For stereo MIX channels this acts as the BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume To adjust the value press the knob to select it and operate the correspond ing multifunction encoder If the MODE button is set to LCR mode the following button and knob are displayed instead of the STEREO MONO button 3 Output channel operations a 5 LCR button This button is an overall on off switch for the signals sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus If this button is off no signals will be sent from the corresponding MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus 6 CSR Center Side Ratio knob This knob adjusts the relative level of the signals sent from the channel to the STEREO L R bus and to the MONO bus in a range of 0 100 To adjust the value press the knob to select it and operate the corre sponding multifunction encoder TO STEREO MONO popup window ALL This shows the status of the signals sent from all MIX channels to the STEREO bus MONO bus and adjusts the pan or balance for the eight selected chan nels For MATRIX channels and STEREO MONO chan nels only the channel number icon and channel name are shown T rr 3 un 4 J eo lt wu uu
40. 7 Press the GEQ rack that you want to insert into the channel the GEQ EFFECT popup window will appear 8 Press the GEQ ON OFF button to turn the GEQ on After you ve turned the GEQ on adjust the bands of the GEQ For details on operating the GEQ refer to Using the 31 Band that follows or Using the Flex 15GEQ 165 The rack in the GEQ EFFECT field shows the input output levels of the GEQ 9 Turn insert on for the patched channel For details refer to Inserting an external device into a channel p 100 Graphic EQ operations Using the 31 Band GEQ You will use the Centralogic section s faders 1 8 and ON keys to control the 31 Band GEQ 1 As described in Virtual rack operations p 158 steps 1 3 mount a 31 Band GEQ in a rack The rack in which the 31 Band GEQ is mounted will show the approximate settings and input output levels 1 1 Rack graphic display area 2 Input output meters This indicates the level of the signals before and after the 31 Band GEQ 2 In the GEQ EFFECT field press the rack in which you mounted the 31 Band GEQ The GEQ EFFECT popup window will appear In the GEQ EFFECT popup window you can use the tabs to switch between the eight racks D EQ graph This indicates the approximate response of the current 31 Band GEQ settings 2 Faders These faders indicate the amount of boost cut for each band of the 31 Band GEQ Th
41. 9 0 dB 0 0 dB 90 0 Hz 17 0 kHz IET G PEAKING G 100 Hz 475Hz 2 36 kHz 10 0 kHz 100 90 PEAKING H SHELF 4 5 dB 13 0dB 4 5 2 5 dB 190 Hz 12 5 kHz 10 0 PEAKING PEAKING 5 5 3 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 5 5dB 1 5dB 5 0 dB 3 0 dB 190 Hz 400 Hz 6 70 kHz 5 60 kHz 10 0 0 10 5 0 G Fine EQ Cass G L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 1 5 dB 0 0 dB 1 0dB 3 0 dB 75 0 Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 12 5 kHz 45 1 RN PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0 1 0dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 106 Hz 10 0 kHz 8 2 2 8 4 0 DYNAMICS Library List 9 eod Gp 8 A Dr BD A Dr SN M7CL Owners Manual Threshold dB Frequency kHz Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 3o Comp COMPRESSOR 30 Out gain dB 00 i Threshold dB Ratio 2 Compander H COMPANDER H Out gain dB 00 Width dB 6 Release ms Compander S Dr OverTop E B Finger 8 Out gain 0 0 Knee Threshold dB 8 Out gain 0 0 Knee Knee N N N N N N N N N A UJ DYNAMICS Library List v Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Out gain dB 3 0 Knee Release ms 250 Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms COMPRESSOR Out gain dB Knee Release ms Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms COMPRESSOR Out g
42. CURRENT SCENE SCENE LIST LIBRARY LIST 6 MONITOR SETUP This specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed OSCILLATOR TALKBACK 7 SYSTEM SETUP This specifies the system setup operations that can be performed MIXER SETUP OUTPUT SETUP MIDI SET ALL CLEAR ALL button This button permits clears all items 4 Specify the user level by pressing the but ton for each item that will be permitted 5 When you have finished making settings close the popup window and press the SETUP button in the function access area User settings Security M7CL Owners Manual 197 Preferences Here s how you can make various settings for the M7CLs operating environment such as how popup windows appear and whether SEL key operations will be linked These settings are changed for the user who is logged in but if you are logged in as the Administrator you will also be able to change the Guest settings 1 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen USER SETUP button 2 Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window PREFERENCE tab PREFERENCE for GUEST tab 3 Press the PREFERENCE tab to access the PREFERENCE page If you are logged in as the Administrator you can also switch to the PREFERENCE for GUEST page and make preference settings for the Guest account This page includes the following items 1 STORE RECAL
43. LIE SEM II NE cri Ri i x KR T STE SES IE SIE SE E ao M7CL Owners Manual 1 73 Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO bus 74 1 Channel select button This indicates the channel number the 1con selected for that channel and the channel name When you press this button that channel will be selected for operations and the corresponding SEL key will light 2 TO ST PAN BALANCE knob For monaural MIX channels this acts as the PAN knob that adjusts the left right panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus For stereo MIX channels this acts as the BALANCE knob that adjusts the vol ume To adjust the value press the knob to select it and operate the corresponding multifunction encoder If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel the indicator at the right of the knob will light 3 ST MONO indicator If a MIX channel is set to ST MONO mode this indi vidually indicates the on off status of the signal sent from the channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus If a channel is set to LCR mode the LCR indicator is displayed in this location The LCR indicator indicates the on off status of all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus 3 Access the eight channel TO STEREO MONO popup window 4 Use the MODE button to select either ST MONO mode or LCR mode for each chan nel D In the STER
44. Operations in the Centralogic section Operations in the Centralogic section 90 This section explains how you can use the Centralogic section and the OVERVIEW screen to simultaneously control the parameters of up to eight channels 1 Use the navigation keys of the NAVIGATION KEYS section to select the channels or DCA groups that you want to control When you press a navigation key the LED of that key will light The touch screen will show the OVER VIEW screen and the parameters of the up to eight channels you selected will appear a gt e When the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed you can switch to the OVERVIEW screen by pressing any of the multifunction encoders 1 8 This is convenient when you want to quickly switch to the OVERVIEW screen while leaving the same channels or DCA groups selected for control 2 Use the faders and ON keys of the Central ogic section to adjust the level of the up to eight selected channels and switch them on off a gt The bottom line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the chan nels or DCA groups that can be controlled by the faders and ON keys of the Centralogic section The top line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels that can be controlled by the CUE keys and multifunction encoders 1 8 of the Centralogic section 3 Use the fields in the OVERVIEW screen and the multifunction encoders and CUE keys to adjust the parameters for the up to eight
45. These buttons select the send destination that is con trolled by the TO MIX TO MATRIX field If the TO MATRIX button is on you can control the signal sent to the MATRIX bus 3 TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX bus To adjust the send levels use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a PAN knob for a ST IN channel the BALANCE knob 4 TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF button This is an on off switch for the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX bus An indication of PRE in black characters on a white background is shown above these buttons only if PRE pre fader is selected as the position from which the signal is sent from the input channel This indication is not shown for POST post fader For details on how to switch between PRE and POST gt p 77 In the TO MIX TO MATRIX field in the screen make sure that the TO MATRIX but ton is turned on When the TO MATRIX button is on the TO MIX TO MATRIX field shows the knobs and buttons for MATRIX buses 1 8 If this button is off press the but ton to turn it on If necessary you can specify two adjacent odd num bered even numbered MATRIX buses as a stereo bus and link the main parameters p 212 Sending the signal from an input channel to the MATRIX buses If the send destinati
46. This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Perchlorate 2 i M7CL Owners Manual CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The above warning is located on the rear of the unit Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers
47. You can press this field to open the OSCILLATOR popup window 5 OUTPUT button Turns the oscillator on off to open the OSCILLATOR popup window In this popup window you can make detailed settings for the oscillator 1 MODE field Press a button in this field to select the type of oscilla tor This operation can also be performed using the MODE button in the MONITOR screen 2 Parameter field Here you can adjust the parameters for the oscillator you selected in the MODE field The knobs shown in this field can be operated using the corresponding mul tifunction encoders 3 OUTPUT button Turns the oscillator on off This operation can also be performed using the OUTPUT button in the MONI TOR screen 4 Oscillator level This indicates the output level of the oscillator 5 ASSIGN field Selects the bus es to which the oscillator signal will be sent You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections Press a button in the MODE field to select the type of signal you want to output You can choose the following signals SINE WAVE 1CH Single channel sine wave PINK NOISE Pink noise BURST NOISE Burst noise repeated output of pink noise M7CL Owner s Manual Talkback Oscillator fa 151 Using the oscillator 152 Use the knobs and buttons in the parameter field to adjust the oscillator parameters The displayed parameters will differ depending on the oscillator select
48. 1 199 1 57 response only 16 01000001 A ASCII CODE 01110100 t ASCII CODE 01110010 r ASCII CODE 01100010 b ASCII CODE 4 5 Exist Library Range 01110100 t ASCII CODE 4 5 1 Format Parameter change MODULE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Transmission When M7CL receives Library Exist request command from outside the answer will be sent back with the following Parameter change This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only Data Valid Top Number 100 End Number 101 FO 43 1n 3E 11 00 in pr pn Xx in gn pn nn nh nl nh nl nh nil F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Digital mixer M7CL OTHER DATA ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE Data Status 0 Invalid data 1 Valid Data Request Number High v 9 Q Q lt Request Number Low Top Number High Top Number Low End Number High End Number Low End of exclusive Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE 0 mm ASCII CODE Top number is requested number or more Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Example Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE SCENE is stored 5 6 7 10 100 and 101 Ommmmmmm mm ASCII
49. 24 C 30C 4000 50 60 CI MIX channels 1 16 You can select the metering point the point at which the level is detected from the following choices To change the metering point refer to the preceding section Opera tions in the METER screen gt p 154 PRE Immediately before the attenuator PRE FADER Immediately before the fader e POST Immediately after the ON key 0000000000005 p 2 v e 2 000000000000 0000000000003 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 gt 000000000000 5 D x MATRIX channels 1 8 o lt 2 METER BRIDGE MBM7CL FOR M7CL For details on installing the meter bridge MBM7CL refer to p 272 M7CL Owner s Manual Meters A nn 155 156 1 M7CL Owners Manual Chanter 16 Graphic EQ and effects This chapter explains how to use the built in graphic EQ and effects and how to perform remote control operations via the dedicated protocol to control an external head amp Yamaha AD8HR from the M7CL About the virtual rack The lets you use the built in graphic EQ subsequently abbreviated as GEQ and effects to modify signals You can use two types of GEQ 31 Band GEQ which lets you freely adjust thirty one bands frequency regions and Flex15GEQ which lets you adjust any fifteen of thirty one bands You can also u
50. 4 M y Y RON 25 535 442 83 130 Unit mm v 9 Q Q lt Specifications and descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice Since specifications equipment or options may not be the same in every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer European models Purchaser User Information specified in EN55103 1 and EN55103 2 Inrush Current 21A Conforms to Environments El E2 and E4 M7CL Owners Manual 271 Installing the MBM7CL meter bridge option Installing the MBIM7CL meter bridge option 1 Remove screw A from the rear of the M7CL s touch screen and remove the connector cover 2 Remove screws B two locations 3 Loosen screws C two locations so that they protrude approximately 2 mm Connector cover M7CL main unit 4 Hook holes D of the MBM7CLs attachment fixture over the M7CLs screws C two locations at left and right 5 Connect the MBM7CLs connector E to the M7CLs connector Orient the connector so that the red cable is at the right when viewed from the rear panel 6 Insert the two screws B which you removed in step 2 into holes G of the MBM7CLs attachment fixture and tighten them 7 Tighten screws C two locations to fasten the MBM7CL to the M7CL 8 Using
51. AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC SLOVAKIA HUNGARY SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria CEE Department Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 602039025 PA19 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgef hrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshandlern in den jeweili gen Bestimmungslandern erh ltlich Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha mas cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp z 0 0 Oddzial w Polsce ul 17 Stycznia 56 PL 02 146 Warszawa Poland Tel 022 868 07 57 THE NETHERLANDS BELGIUM LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5 b 4133 AB Vianen The Netherlands Tel 0347 358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Combo Division Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTUGAL Yamaha Musica Ib rica S A Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 91 639 8888 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J A Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S 400 43 Goteborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 NORWAY Norsk filial
52. Adjust the level as high as possible without allowing the OVER segment of the channel strip level meter to light when the mic or instrument is being played loudly When you turn the HA encoder in the SELECTED CHANNEL section the knob in the HA field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will move in tandem with the encoder NOTE The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power If the level meter does not show any movement even if you have raised the HA encoder it is possible that the INPUT channel selected by its SEL key does not match the INPUT jack to which your mic or instrument is connected Make sure that the connections and the selection of the SEL key are correct If necessary recall scene number 000 once again 5 Press the SEL key of another input chan nel and adjust the head amp gain in the same way When you press a SEL key to select another channel the channel shown in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will change accordingly gt In the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen you can also switch the head amp s phantom power orvoff and switch the phase between normal and reverse To do this press the HA PHASE field to access the popup window For
53. C bus as shown in the following diagram Signal sent to the C bus Signal sent to the 7 STEREO L bus A Signal sent to the STEREO R bus PAN knob M7CL Owners Manual 59 Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO buses Operating the TO ST BALANCE knob of a ST IN channel will change the level of the signals sent from the ST IN L R channels to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following diagram Signal sent from the d N ST IN L channel to 5 i 5 the MONO bus I M Signal sent from the v3 ST IN L channel to Y the STEREO L bus the STEREO R bus Signal sent from the Sf tN ST IN R channel to the MONO C bus S Signal sent from the STIN R channel to TO ST BALANCE knob 60 1 M7CL Owners Manual This section explains how to send the signal from an input channel to MIX buses 1 16 MIX buses are used mainly for the purpose of sending signals to foldback speakers on stage or to effect processors You can send a signal from an input channel to a MIX bus in the following three ways Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section In this method you use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MIX buses When using this method the signals sent from a specific input channel to all
54. COMMENT For M7CL files shows the com ment If you press this area a key board window will appear allowing you to enter a comment for the file READ ONLY A lock symbol is shown to indicate protected files You can press this area to enable or disable the protect setting M7CL Owners Manual e FILETYPE Files that contain M7CL internal set tings are shown as ALL user keys as KEY other files as and directories as DIR e TIME STAMP This shows the date and time at which the file was last modified NOTE The file list can display only up to one hundred items File selection knob This knob selects a file shown in the file list You can operate this knob using multifunction encoder 1 9 SAVE button Saves all of the M7CL s internal settings together gt p 202 LOAD button Loads the selected M7CL setting file p 203 1 CREATE USER KEY button Creates a user authentication key p 193 12 FORMAT button Formats media on the USB storage media p 206 3 Perform the desired editing operation For details on the procedure refer to the explanations that follow Sorting files and editing file names comments 1 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window 3 To sort the files press one of the titles FILE NAME COMMENT READ
55. CUE SEL LINK Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations If this button is on turning the CUE key of a channel OFF to ON will simulta neously select that channel and light its SEL key NAVIGATION KEY gt SEL LINK INPUT NAVIGATION KEY gt SEL LINK OUTPUT Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with operations of the navigation keys If this button is on pressing the desired navigation key will cause the SEL key of the most recently selected channel in the Centralogic section to light This can be turned on off separately for INPUT CH input channels and OUTPUT CH output chan nels e SEL NAVIGATION KEY LINK Specifies whether the navigation key selection will be linked with channel selection If this button 1s on selecting a channel will cause the corresponding nav igation key for that channel to also be selected Preferences POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS Specifies whether pressing a knob of the SELECTED CHANNEL section when the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is shown will cause a popup window 1 ch to appear If this button is on a popup window 1 ch will appear or close whenever you press a knob SCENE UP DOWN This specifies what the SCENE MEMORY AJ W keys will do when pressed in the SCENE screen You can choose one of the following two operations SCENE 1 1 Pressing the SCENE MEMORY A key will select the next highest
56. INPUT INPUT INPUT EQ INPUT EQ PROCESSING INPUT INPUT EQ INPUT EQ PROCESSING INPUT INPUT EQ INPUT EQ PROCESSING INPUT INPUT INPUT DYNAMICS 1 DYNAT PROCESSING INPUT INPUT INPUT DYNAMICS2 1 DYNA2 PROCESSING MUTE GROUP DCA GROUP INPUT INPUT MIX INPUT ON MIX ON 2 FADER ON INPUT INPUT INPUT MIX MIX SEND 2 SEND FADER ON INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT MATRIX ON 3 MATRIX ON FADER ON INPUT MATRIX pel SEND 3 MATRIX INPUT Insert On Direct Out On Level O INPUT FADER ON INPUT Fader FADER ON Pan Balance HPF R n Att P EQ Dynamics Dynamics2 Mute Assign DCA Assign To Mix To Mix LEVEL To Mix PRE POST To Matrix Z To Matrix LEVEL 5 SEND FADER ON INPUT INPUT ALL PROCESSING To Stereo Mono Cue Key In Cue Mute Safe Recall Safe Fade Time oO 29 Oo cm STORE 1 Except for Key In Source 2 Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1 16 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled 3 Applies to parameters for which the MATRIX channel 1 8 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled E MIX Channels NAME ICON MXNAME OUTPUT o _ MIX PROCESSING Insert On O MIXALL MIX PROCESSING O MIXFADER ON MIXFADER MIXFADER ON Fader Pan Balance MIX FADER ON Att MIX PROCESSING E
57. Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power If the channel is patched to an input port that has no head amp or to the rack internal effect or GEQ the port name number and phase are shown ETE If you want to switch the phantom power on off switch the phase between normal reverse or change the input port patching for each channel press the HA PHASE field if the GAIN knob is displayed press the knob to select it and then press the knob once again to access the HA PATCH popup window For details on the popup window gt p55 Changing the output patching output chan nels only From the OVERVIEW screen you can change the output port that s patched to an output channel by pressing the OVERVIEW screen s OUTPUT PORT field to access the PATCH NAME popup window For details on the popup window gt p 53 Making settings for Insert other than ST IN channels monitor or Direct Output INPUT channels only In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the INSERT DIRECT OUT field to make settings related to Insert and Direct Output This field includes the following items CD IHS CD INS This indicates the insert on off status 2 D OUT INPUT channels only This indicates the direct output on off status To make details settings
58. M7CL Owner s Manual Connections and setup co 49 501 M7CL Owners Manual Chapter 5 Input channel operations This chapter explains operations for input channels INPUT channels and ST IN channels Signal flow for input channels The input channels are the section that processes the signals received from the rear panel input jacks or slots 1 3 and sends them to the STEREO bus MONO bus MIX buses and MATRIX buses There are two types of input channel as follows INPUT channels 1 32 1 48 These channels are used to process monaural signals When the M7CL is in the default state the input signals from INPUT jacks 1 32 1 48 are assigned to these channels MATRIX CUE 12 78 LR CH 1 32 48 INSERT OUT 1 32 48 PRE EO INSERT OUT PRE HPF PRE EQ PRE FADER OUTPUT PATCH ___ PAN MiPOSTPANL kt IY POST PAN R INSERT IN 1 32 48 EQ OUT DYNA1OUT 2 POST ON LR MONO TO MONQ TO ST MODE gu o 31 gt PRE HPF ON 74 54 _ 5 INSERT OUT Keyin PAN LINK SePREEO um Self POST EQ 1 POST ON ON MIX1 3 15 MIX13 16OUT 1 pen E ON 2 4 16 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 EQ 32 LIME TTT 10 CH CH 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 33 40 41 48 POST EQ 48 ey INPUT PATCH 1
59. N CH 1 CH 48 STIN1L STINAR MIX 1 MIX 16 RECALL SAFE ON MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STEREO L MONO C RACK1 8DCA 1 DCA 8 246 M7CL Owners Manual Control change parameter assignments Control change parameter assignments PRESET ST Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Change Change CHON INPUT 88 FADER H DCA 8 CH 1 CH 10 CH 11 CH 12 INPUT CH 13 CH 10 CH 11 CH 14 CH 15 FADER H CH 16 CH 12 PAN BALANCE INPUT CH 13 CH 14 CH 17 CH 15 CH 18 CH 19 CH 16 CH 17 DCA 1 DCA 2 DCA 3 DCA DCA 4 DCA 5 DCA 6 DCA 7 CH 1 CH 24 CH 3 CH 5 FADER L v 9 E Q Q lt M7CL Owner s Manual 247 Control change parameter assignments CUu Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 TT 248 1 M7CL Owners Manual NRPN parameter assignments NRPN parameter assignments FADER INPUT to Mix9 1 6 Matrix1 4 LEVEL MIX1 16 STEREO LR to MATRIX LEVEL INPUT to Mix9 16 Matrix1 4 ON HIGH MID FREQ INPUT DYNAMICS2 MIX MATRIX STE EQ INPUT MATRIX STEREO LR INPUT DYNAMICS1 PAN BALANCE INPUT 2096 20CD MIX9 10 20F6 212D MIX11 12 2156 218D INPUT to Mix9 10 MIX13 14 21B6 21ED 15 16 Matrix1 2 3 4 PAN MIX15 16 2216 224D INPUT TO MATRIX1 2 2276 22AD INPUT TO MATRIX3 4 22D6 230D MIX1 16 STEREO jaro SEND mana lance MATRIX1 2 2336 234B LR to MATRIX ON MIX1 16 STEREO MATRIX3 4 234C
60. OVER indicator This will light when the post EQ signal reaches the overload point 3 EQ ON OFF button Switches the EQ on off To edit the EQ switch the EQ ON OFF button on and use the EQ Q EQ FREQUENCY and EQ GAIN knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the cue center frequency and the amount of boost cut If you want to edit more detailed parameters or recall existing settings from the library press any EQ or HPF knob or a location within the EQ graph field to access the EQ popup window For details on the popup window p 105 NOTE 7 The type of the LOW band EQ or HIGH band EQ cannot be switched in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen If nec essary you can access the EQ popup window and switch the EQ type If the HIGH band EQ type is already set to Low Pass Filter the HIGH band Q knob will not be displayed and the GAIN knob will function as an on off switch for the Low Pass Filter e Making insert settings INPUT MIX MATRIX STEREO and MONO channels only Use the INSERT field to make insert related settings for an input channel in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen This field includes the following items 1 INSERT popup button When you press this button the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window will appear allowing you to make settings for insert and direct output 2 IN indicator This indicates the presence or absence of a signal at the input port patched to INSERT IN 3 INSE
61. PEAKING PEAKING FISHEL 100 He 265 He 106 knz 530546 q 125 100 090 TT PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING TPF a00 Hz 2 50 knz 45 22 TT PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING SPIELE 132 He 3 15 krz 500146 a 15 45 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 236 krz 200146 raf 100 070 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 630 kHz raf 14 109 125 028 PEAKING PEAKING 425 He 106 knz 132v raf 99 PEAKING PEAKING F 2 80 krz 7 50 Wie a os C PEAKING PEAKING 00 nz 400 He 280 17054 raf 4s 936 PEAKING PEAKING SHELF e ps tf Bass Drum 1 N Bass Drum 2 e UJ e Tom tom 1 N High Hat Percussion 355 200 kz 00st ref 59 45 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Pe 2 26 wie 002 raf ox so 63 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING SPIELE F 2 00 knz 12 5 Khe al om so 4s FEARING PEAKING PEAKING FISHEL 2s He 180 He 1221 12 5 wee a 16 89 22 sra ESHELF PEAKING PEAKIN
62. SCENE MEMORY STORE key About the firmware version You can view the firmware version number in the SETUP screen gt p 207 You can also download the most recent firmware version from the website http www yamahaproaudio com M7CL Owners Manual Chapter 2 Panels and controls This chapter explains the names and functions of each part of the M7CL Top panel The top panel of the M7CL is divided into the following sections A c O O 49 A c Display section 18 Meter bridge option SCENE MEMORY SELECTED CHANNEL P 17 MONITOR section section P 17 P 19 0 IG 0 0 00 00 0 0 0 365 55 65 tom 0000 MIX MATRIX PAN DYNAMICS2 Q HPF 906 161 909 0000000 0000000 SCENE MEMORY SEL Cow Se ow E
63. STEREO MONO to STEREO MONO MATRIX SEND FADER ON STEREO MONO STEREO MONO ALL PROCESSING Recall Safe Except for Key In Source Functions that can be assigned to user defined keys Functions that can be assigned to user defined Keys mea i sce ae TOMBE _ pewa soemo LATCH Switch TALKBACK on off TALKBACK ON UNLATCH Turn TALKBACK on while pressed TALKBACK While holding down this key press a SEL key of an OUTPUT SELECTED CH ASSIGN channel to switch the assignment on off During this time the SEL LED will be lit if assign is ON or dark if OFF Switch the OSC on off HN The OSC popup window will appear when this is turned on While holding down this key press a SEL key of an OUTPUT channel to switch the assignment on off During this time the SEL LED will be lit if assign is ON or dark if OFF OSCILLATOR SELECTED CH ASSIGN MONITOR ON SELECTED CH ASSIGN Clear all CUE settings together Switch MONITOR on off While holding down this key press the SEL key of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the assignment on off During this time the SEL LED will be lit if assign is ON or dark if OFF MONITOR STEREO L R MONO C LCR SOURCE SELECT STIN1 4 DEFINE Recall the selected signal to the monitor Switch the monitor dimmer function on off EFFECT BYPASS TAP TEMPO MUTE MASTER BRIGHTNESS PAGE BOOKMARK
64. You can make settings so that a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation For details on this setting refer to p 198 6 The selected data will immediately be loaded into the channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect you selected in step 2 Storing settings in a library 1 Open a popup window that provides the tool buttons 2 Select the channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect whose settings you want to store NOTE 0 You can select only one channel or rack as the source for storing If multiple channels are selected in the dynamics EQ popup window 8 ch or ALL you won t be able to perform the Store operation 3 In the upper part of the popup window press the LIBRARY button to access the library 1 STORE button The settings of the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect will be stored to the position selected in the list M7CL Owners Manual Turn one of the multifunction encoders to select the store destination library number NOTE You can t store to a library number that contains read only data indicated by an R symbol 5 When you ve selected the store destina tion press the STORE button The LIBRARY STORE popup window will appear allowing you to assign a title to the settings For details on entering text refer to Entering names p 30 6 When you ve assigned a title to the set tings press the STORE button in the LIB
65. ally start up in the log in state in which the power was turned off If a user password has been assigned you will need to enter the password However if you cancel the input you will be forcibly logged in as Guest Similarly you will also be forcibly logged in as Guest if you had been logged in as a user requiring a user authen tication key but the USB storage device is no longer connected Logging in as Administrator 1 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen Log in button M7CL Owner s Manual User settings Security 193 User Level settings 2 Press the log in button to open the LOGIN window 3 Press the LOGIN button for ADMINISTRA TOR If no Administrator password has been set you will simply be logged in If a password has been set a key board window will appear allowing you to enter the password 4 Enter the password and press the OK but ton For details on entering a password refer to Entering names p 30 If the password was incorrect a message of WRONG PASSWORD will appear in the bottom of the screen Logging in as Guest T In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Press the log in button to open the LOGIN window 3 Press the LOGIN button for GUEST to log in 194 1 M7CL Owners Manual Logging in as a User To log in as a User you will use a user authenticati
66. below the threshold DECAY ms 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired The value 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 160 points is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB O Characteristics Time Series Analysis u Input Signal u Output Signal S HOLD i Ib ATTACK DECAY 5 Q 2 i c 2 E O THRESHOLD Input Level Time Time DUCKING Ducking is commonly used for voice over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD the output level is attenuated by a specified amount RANGE HOLD ms 44 1kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 sec This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen 48kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 sec 160 points below the THRESHOLD level 2 This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger sig DECAY ms A8kH Ks nal level drops below the threshold The value is expressed as the duration required 160 points for the level to change by 6 dB Appendices a I O Characteristics Time Series Analysis Input Signal u Output Signal gt gt HOLD 8 THRESHOLD 3 ATTACK DECAY 8 E 2 1 O 2 1 THRESHOLD qub T TN RANGE I
67. button The pre fader signal will be output AFL After Fader Listen button The signal immediately after the ON key will be output e PFLTRIM knob If you select PFL you can also use the PFL TRIM knob located in the lower part of this field to adjust the output level in a range of 20 dB 10 dB You can operate this knob using multifunction encoder 5 5 Meter field Level meter This indicates the level of the cue signal ACTIVE CUE indicator T This indicates the currently active Cue group e CLEAR CUE button Clears all Cue selections This oper ation can also be performed using the CLEAR CUE button in the MON ITOR screen 3 Use the buttons of the CUE MODE section to specify what will happen when multiple CUE keys within the same CUE group are turned on Use the following two buttons to choose the Cue mode MIX CUE button All channels or DCA groups within the same Cue group whose CUE key is on will be mixed for monitoring MIX CUE mode LAST CUE button Only the channel or DCA group whose CUE key was last turned on will be monitored LAST CUE mode m gt CUE keys belonging to different Cue groups cannot be turned on simultaneously The Cue group to which the last pressed CUE key belongs will be turned on allowing only the signals of that group to be monitored Operating the Cue function Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT field DCA f
68. encoder When an input channel is selected Adjusts the THRESHOLD parameter of the gate etc When a MIX MATRIX or STEREO MONO channel is selected Adjusts the THRESHOLD parameter of the compres sor etc 5 DYNAMICS 2 encoder When an input channel is selected Adjusts the THRESHOLD parameter of the compres sor etc When a MIX MATRIX or STEREO MONO channel is selected No function 6 HPF encoder Adjusts the HPF cutoff frequency for an input channel This does nothing for other types of channel 7 EQ Q EQ FREQUENCY EQ GAIN encoders For each band of the four band EQ these adjust the Q center frequency cutoff frequency and gain M7CL Owners Manual 17 Top panel 18 Display section This is a touch screen that you can operate by touching the surface of the screen A USB connector is provided on the right side of the display CD Display touch screen This display shows the information you need to operate the M7CL and lets you make system wide settings and control mix parameters for input and output channels Since this is a touch screen you can use your finger on the screen to select menus or set parameters However you cannot press two or more locations to operate them simul taneously NOTE f the touch screen becomes dirty wipe it with a soft dry cloth N CAUTION e Never use a sharp or pointed object such as your fingernail to operate the touch screen Doing so
69. f the symbol for the selected clock does not turn light blue make sure that the external device is correctly connected and that the external device is set to transmit clock data ting is changed In order to protect your speaker system be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock setting f you attempt to select a channel whose SRC is on as the word clock source a message will appear warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled 4 To close the WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP popup window press the x symbol located in the upper right You will return to the SETUP screen 5 To close the SETUP screen press the SETUP button in the function access area M7CL Owner s Manual f you use a digital I O card that contains a sampling rate con Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock set Other functions MO 209 Using cascade connections Using cascade connections By cascade connecting two or more M7CL units or an M7CL with an external mixer such as the Yamaha PM5D you can share the buses For example this is convenient when you want to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs Here we will explain cascade connections and operation using an example in which two M7CL units are cascade connected To cascade two M7CL units you will install digital I O cards in their respective slots and connect the output ports of the s
70. nal will be delayed according to the setting of the MONITOR DELAY knob 5 MONO MONITOR button This button allows monaural monitoring If this button is on the signal sent from the PHONES OUT jack and the MONITOR OUT L R channels will be monaural 6 PHONES LEVEL LINK button If this is on the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack 7 OUTPUT button Switches the monitor function on off This operation can also be performed using the OUTPUT button in the MONITOR screen Meter field Output select button This opens the OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window where you can select the port that will output the monitor signal e Level meter This indicates the level of the moni tor signal This meter shows the level immediately before the dimmer 9 ASSIGN field If you selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field use this field to specify the monitor source You can select up to eight monitor sources simultaneously Pressing the CLEAR ALL button will clear all selec tions Using the Monitor function Use the buttons of the SOURCE SELECT field to select a monitor source In the SOURCE SELECT field you can select only one monitor source However if you ve selected DEFINE you can use the ASSIGN field to specify multiple monitor sources The following table shows the monitor sources you can select in the SOURCE SELECT field STEREO L R button STEREO L R channel
71. p 53 You can also select input ports from the HA PATCH popup window 5 Repeat step 2 4 to assign input ports for other channels Changing the input patch settings M7CL Owner s Manual Input output patching 99 Inserting an external device into a channel Inserting an external device into a channel If desired you can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal path of an INPUT MIX MATRIX STEREO or MONO channel When doing so the type of input output port used for the insertion and the location of the insertion in out can be specified individually for each channel 1 As desired connect your external equip ment to the I O card s in slots 1 3 digital I O card If you install a digital I O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device you ll need to synchronize the word clock between the M7CL and your external device p 208 2 Use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen for the channel to which you want to assign an input source 3 Press the INSERT DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window In the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window you can view or change the type of input output port used for insertion and the location at which insertion will occur There are two variations of this popup window one channel and eight channel These windows include the following items INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window 1ch
72. screen m gt e When you cannot start calibration by touching press the SCENE key to select TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button and then press the STORE key to start Other functions MO M7CL Owners Manual 217 Adjusting the faders Calibration function 218 Adjusting the faders Calibration function Depending on the environment in which you use the M7CL discrepancies may occur in the motion of the motor faders You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY STORE key of the panel turn on the power After the opening screen the following startup menu screen will appear 2 Press the FADER CALIBRATION button The FADER CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear where you can adjust the faders Calibration will be performed semi automatically for the specified faders INPUT ST IN Centralogic fad ers STEREO MONO This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader settings while the M7CL is running 3 Press a SEL key to specify the faders that you want to calibrate Faders for which a problem was detected at start up will already be selected 4 Press the START button A confirmation dialog box will appear M7CL Owners Manual 5 Press the OK button in the dialog box 6 Each of the specified faders will move to the target positions in the following sequence Manually move the fader to
73. x previous TEMPO new TEMPO Example 1 When SYNC ON DELAY 250 ms TEMPO 120 you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note DELAY new NOTE x 4 x 60 TEMPO 1 4 x 4 x 60 120 0 5 500 ms Thus the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms Example 2 When SYNC ON DELAY 250 ms 8 note you change TEMPO from 120 to 121 DELAY original DELAY x previous TEMPO new TEMPO 250 x 120 121 247 9 ms Thus the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247 9 ms a Rounded values are used for the calculation results Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ values You cannot set NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo This lim itation also applies even when SYNC is OFF Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters It isa common value shared by all effects You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library You can store it to and recall it from a Scene This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored Here is an example Store the effect TEMPO 120 Change TEMPO to 60 Recall the effect TEMPO 60 Normally when you change the TEMPO the DELAY or FREQ will be re set accordingly How
74. 0 tx Control Change 0 tx 4 6 3 Module Name MODULE NAME Setup User Defined Key USERDEF_ Program Change PRGMCHG_ Control Change CTRLCHG_ 4 7 Function call module 4 7 1 Format Parameter change Receive Data will be received when Parameter change Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when Parameter change ECHO is on The corresponding effect will function immediately the data is received depending on the effect type DATA Onnnnnnn nh Request Number High Onnnnnnn Request Number Low EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 4 5 3 Module Name MODULE NAME number SCENE LIB SCENE 1 300 INPUT EQ LIB MEO 41 199 OUTPUT EQ LIB QUTEQ 2 4 199 Dynamics LIB DYNA 42 199 GEQ LIB GEQ g 1 199 EFFECT LIB __ 58 199 4 6 Function call collection store 4 6 1 Format Parameter change Transmission Data will be transmitted with the Device Number in Tx CH when Parameter change Tx is on STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0O0001nnnn 1n nz0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010001 11 M7CL DATA 00000000 00 OTHER DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION 01001100 ASCII CODE NAME 01101001 ASCII CODE 01100010 1 ASCII CODE 01010101 U ASCII CODE 01101
75. 48 00 Knee Threshold 8 Knee Threshold dS 9 Knee Knee Threshold dS 9 nemo 0 COMPRESSOR a out gain cay 00 rato 6 COMPRESSOR out gain 8 60 Release ms Limiter2 Total Comp1 Total Comp2 At fs 44 1 kHz Dynamics Parameters Dynamics Parameters Input channels provide DYNAMICS section 1 and DYNAMICS section 2 Output channels pro vide DYNAMICS section 1 An input channel s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types GATE DUCKING COMPRESSOR and EXPANDER An input channel s DYNAMICS section 2 provides the following four types COMPRESSOR COMPANDER H Compander Hard COMPANDER S Compander Soft and DE ESSER An output channel s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER H Compander Hard and COMPANDER S Compander Soft GATE A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount RANGE THRESHOLD dB 54 to 0 55 points This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied RANGE dB co 69 to 0 71 points This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points 4 how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold HOLD ms 44 1kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 sec This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen 48kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 sec 160 points
76. 48 and M7CL 32 12 M CL 32 This model provides 32 INPUT jacks and 32 INPUT channels INPUT jacks 1 32 are located at the right side of the right panel just as on the M7CL 48 model but there are no INPUT jacks at the left side of the rear panel 000000000000000000000000001000 QVAMAHA gt 0000000 000000000000000000000000 10000000000 DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE CORPORATION 10000 000000000000000000000000000000 al ceu e E aeta OR 1 INPUT jacks 1 32 The channel strip for INPUT channels 1 32 is located in the left side of the front panel just as on the M7CL 48 model but there is no channel strip for INPUT channels in the right side x 0000 YAMAHA 0000 0000 a 5 2 5 DEDE oo e
77. 7 1 OMNEOUE Ie 1990 INPUT 1 32 lt M7CL 32 gt PHONES Bo OMNIOUT 1 16 6000 OMNI OUT 1 16 6000 PHONES 1 Gain Error Fs 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz 1 kHz Input Level 62 dBu GAIN Max INPUT 1 48 lt M7CL 48 gt OMNI OUT 1 16 600 p INPUT 1 32 lt M7CL 32 gt Input Level 10 dBu GAIN Min Input Level 62 dBu GAIN Max ST IN 1 4 L R OMNI OUT 1 16 600 Q dBu Input Level 10 dBu GAIN Min OMNI OUT 1 16 600 Q Full Scale Output 23 5 24 0 24 5 Pc OMNI OUT 1 16 6000 p 23 5 24 0 24 5 PHONES 30 dBFs PHONES Level Control Max 05 9 05 1 Total Harmonic Distortion Fs 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz Input Output RL Conditions Typ Max p p yp INPUT 1 48 lt M7CL 48 gt 4 dBu 20 Hz 20 kHz GAIN Max OMNI OUT 1 16 600 Q INPUT 1 32 lt M7CL 32 gt owwourie ema 4 dBu 920 Hz 20 kHz GAIN Min 4 dBu 920 Hz 20 kHz GAIN Max ST IN 1 4 1 OMNI OUT 1 16 600 Q 4 dBu 20 Hz 20 kHz GAIN Min m OMNI OUT 1 16 600 Q Full Scale Output 1 kHz nterna PHONES Full Scale Output 1 kHz PHONES Level Control Max Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB octave filter 80 kHz o o N L Hum amp Noise Fs 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz EIN Equivalent Input Noise Rs 1500 GAIN Max 128 Master fader at nominal level and EIN one Ch fader at nominal level 62 INPUT 1 48 M7CL 48 OMNI OUT 1 16 600 Q
78. CODE Request Number 0 DATA Onnnnnnn nh Scene Library number High Data Valid Top Number 5 End Number 7 Onnnnnnn nl Scene Library number Low Request Number 8 Data Valid Top Number 10 End Number 10 Oeeeeeee eh Element High Request Number 11 E Element Low Oiiiiiii Ih Index High Request Number 102 01111111 11 Index Low Data Invalid Top Number 0 End Number 0 Ch Channel High cl Channel Low STATUS 11110000 0000dddd dd Data28 3lbit ID No 01000011 Oddddddd dd Data21 27bit SUB STATUS 0001nnnn Oddddddd dd Datal4 20bit GROUP ID 00111110 Oddddddd dd Data7 13bit MODEL ID 00010001 Oddddddd Data0 6bit DATA 00000000 EOX 11110111 F7 End ofexclusive CATEGORY FUNCTION 01001100 NAME 4 4 2 Format Parameter request 01101001 Receive 01100010 The Parameter change will be sent with Device number Rx CH immediately 01000101 the data is received 01111000 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message 01101001 ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 01110011 SUB STATUS 0011 3 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel 01110100 GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODULE NAME Ommmmmmm MODEL ID 00010001 11 M7CL Ommmmmmm DATA 00000000 00 OTHER DATA Ommmmmmm CATEGORY Ommmmrmmm FUNCTION 01001100 L ASCII CODE mra NAME Ommmmmmm 01101001 i ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm 01100010 ASCII CODE ASCII CODE 01000001 A DATA 0 01110100 t ASCII CODE Onnnnnnn 0111001
79. DCA groups can be used only with input channels DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene M7CL Owners Manual ll 113 Using DCA groups 2 Press the DCA GROUP button to access the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window In the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window you can select the channels to be assigned to DCA groups The popup window includes the follow ing items LO EBESBESBECBESBESBESB pc _ 1 Channel display field Channels assigned to the DCA group selected by the DCA GROUP 1 8 buttons 3 are highlighted in yel low 2 DCA GROUP ASSIGN button Use this button to switch the mode in which you want to assign DCA groups 3 DCA GROUP 1 8 buttons Use these buttons to select the DCA group for which you want to make assignments 4 CLEAR ALL button Press this button to clear all channels that are assigned to the selected DCA group a gt f the DCA key is selected the NAVIGATION KEYS sec tion you can access the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window by pressing the Centralogic section SEL key twice in rapid succession In this case the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window will appear with the DCA GROUP 1 8 button selected for that DCA group 3 Use the DCA GROUP 1 8 buttons to select the DCA group to which you want to assign channels f the DCA key is selected in the NAVIGATION KEYS sec tion you can also select the assignment destination
80. DYNAMICS 1 field 6 DYNAMICS 2 field input channels only This shows the Dynamics 1 2 parameters This also accesses a popup window where you can edit detailed dynamics parameters that cannot be edited in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 7 HPF field input channels only These controls switch the HPF high pass filter on off and adjust its cutoff frequency EQ field Here you can switch the four band EQ on off and view its parameters About the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 9 EQ graph field 3 FADER field This shows the response of the EQ HPF Here you can view the input output level of the channel INSERT field INPUT MIX MATRIX STEREO MONO channels only DCA field input channels only The signal route for insertion in the channel can be Here you can select the DCA group to which that channel switched on off here is assigned 1 DIRECT OUT field INPUT channels only 5 MUTE field This is an on off switch for the signal that is directly out Here you can select the mute group to which that channel put from the channel The output level is also shown here is assigned 2 RECALL SAFE field Switches the Recall Safe status on off for that channel If only some of the channel parameters are set to Recall Safe the PARTIAL indicator will light Onerations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section This section explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to contr
81. Dump Request is received A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the Rx CH channel in response to a Bulk Dump Request In the data portion seven words of 8 bit data are converted into eight words of 7 bit data Conversion from actual data to bulk data d 0 6 actual data b 0 7 bulk data b 0 0 for 1 0 I lt 7 I if d I amp 0x80 b 0 1 lt lt 6 D j b I 1 d I amp 0x7F Recovery from bulk data to actual data d 0 6 actual data b 0 7 bulk data for 1 0 lt 7 I b 0 lt lt 1 b I 1 0x80 amp b 0 3 2 PARAMETER CHANGE Reception This message is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON This message is received if Parameter change RX is ON and Rx CH matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS When a parameter change is received the specified parameter will be controlled When a parameter request is received the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a parameter change with its Device Number as the Rx CH Transmission If Parameter change TX is ON and you edit a parameter for which control change transmission has not been enabled a parameter change will be transmitted with the Tx CH as its device number In response to a parameter request a parameter change will be transmitted with Rx CH as its device number Command rx tx function FO 43 in 11 F7 rx tx M7CL native parameter change RARAMETER CHANGE FO 45 3n
82. FADER PFL POST ON AFL VARI 1 To MATRIX PRE FADER POST ON VARI STEREO These channels process the signals sent from MIX channels STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses and send them to the corresponding output ports When the M7CL 1s in the default state the following output ports are assigned MATRIX channels 1 8 Slot 3 output channels 1 8 9 16 MATRIX channels 1 2 OMNI OUT jacks 13 14 MATRIX 1 8 RACKIN PATCH Te OUTPUT PATCH MATRIX SUBE eae FADER INGEET OUT INSERT OUT 1 1 8 IPREEQ INSERT OUT MATRIX INSERT IN 1 8 PRE PRE EQ METER INSERT 4BAND LS 8 8 2 Q FF ee PREEQ POSTEQ REE SERT GUT ATT Attenuator Attenuates boosts the level of the signal 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer A parametric EQ with four bands HIGH HIGH MID LOW MID and LOW DYNAMICS 1 This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a com pressor compander or expander LEVEL This adjusts the output level of the channel BALANCE STEREO channel only Adjusts the left right volume balance of the STEREO L R channel ON On off Turns the output channel on off If off that channel is muted MATRIX ON OFF MATRIX send on off This is a
83. He 090 G 3 5 dB F 300 Hz ESHELF G 0 5 dB F 224 He po LSHELF c 0048 F 180 Hz _ PEAKING c 2 0 dB F 90 0 Hz 28 M7CL Owner s Manual v 9 E Q Q lt 221 EQ Library List e DYNAMICS Library List NER A E E n PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 190 Hz 6 70 kHz 0 11 0 11 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF PEAKING 2 0 dB 4 0 dB 170 Hz 6 70 kHz 0 11 PEAKING G Male Vocal 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 1 0 dB 2 0 dB 118 Hz 6 00 kHz 0 18 0 14 G Female Vo 1 L SHELF H SHELF 7 0 dB 12 5 dB 112 Hz 6 70 kHz G Female Vo 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 2 0dB 1 0dB 1 5dB 3 0 dB 5 6 29 Chorus amp G Harmo 90 0 Hz 850 Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz 2 8 7 0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 30 Total EQ 1 G 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 3 0 46 5 dB ota 95 0 Hz 950Hz 2 12 kHz 16 0 kHz 7 0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 31 Total EQ 2 G 4 0dB 1 5dB 2 0dB 6 0 dB ota 95 0 Hz 750Hz 1 80 kHz 18 0 kHz 7 0 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 5 1 5 0 5dB 2 0dB 4 0 dB 67 0 Hz 850Hz 1 90 kHz 15 0 kHz G Total EQ 3 UR TT PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING rp nene 4 25 kaz 20 0 nz raf 2o 109 040 040 G G KIT 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 224 Hz 4 00 kHz 0 10 L SHELF H SHELF
84. IN channels Here s how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use 1 As described in Virtual rack operations p 158 steps 1 3 mount a GEQ in a rack The rack shown in the GEQ EFFECT field indicates the approximate GEQ settings and the input output levels A rack in which a Flex 15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units A and B 1 Racks 2 INPUT buttons 3 OUTPUT buttons e If you re using a stereo source you can mount a Flex15GEQ or mount two 31 Band GEQ units in adjacent odd numbered even numbered racks This will let you link the two GEQ units in a later step 2 Press the INPUT button to open the OUT PUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the input source for the rack and choose the insert out of the desired channel The insert out will be assigned to the input of the GEQ For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window gt p 97 m gt f an insert out is selected as the input source the output destination of the rack will automatically be set to the insert in of the same channel For details on Insert Out In refer to Inserting an external device into a channel p 100 M7CL Owner s Manual Graphic EQ and effects A 161 Graphic EQ operations 3 Press the OUTPUT button to open the INPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the output destination for the rack and choose the insert in to which you want to assig
85. INPUT PORT popup button This shows the input port assigned to this channel It also accesses a popup window in which you can select the input port 3 48V This indicates the phantom power on red or off black status for the head amp assigned to the chan nel 4 Phase This indicates either normal phase black or reverse phase orange for the input assigned to the channel 5 OVER indicator This will light when the input signal from the HA reaches the overload point To adjust the head amp gain use the HA encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section In the screen the indicator at the upper right of the HA knob shows the presence or absence of a signal at the patched input port and also indicates whether an overload has occurred When you press the GAIN knob in the screen the HA PATCH popup window 1 ch will appear allowing you to make settings for the head amp For details on the popup window gt p 55 When you press the INPUT PORT but ton the PATCH NAME popup window will appear allow ing you to select the input port for each channel For details on the popup window gt p 98 NOTE The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power Operations in th
86. INPUT sec tion or ST IN section to adjust the send level from the input channels to the selected MIX bus m gt You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a user defined key This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX bus and quickly switch back again Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus 5 Repeat steps 3 4 to adjust the send level for other MIX buses in the same way 6 When you re finished adjusting the MIX send levels press the symbol in the function access area The function access area display will return to its prior state and the M7CL will exit SENDS ON FADER mode and return to normal mode Input channel operations M7CL Owners Manual 65 Sending the signal from an input channel to the MATRIX buses Sending the signal from an input channel to the MATRIX buses 66 This section explains how to send the signal from an input channel to MATRIX buses 1 8 The MATRIX buses are used to produce a mix that is independent of the STEREO bus or MIX buses mainly for sending to a master recorder or to the monitor system for the musicians You can send a signal from an input channel to the MATRIX buses in the following two ways Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section In this method you use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses When using this method the signals sent from a specific input channel t
87. Initializing the M CLs internal memory If an error occurs in the M7CLs internal memory or if you have forgotten the password you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory N CAUTION e The entire contents of memory will be lost if you initialize the internal memory Proceed with the following operation only if you are very sure you want to do this 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY STORE key of the panel turn on the power After the opening screen the following startup menu screen will appear 2 Press one of the following buttons accord ing to the type of initialization you want to perform INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES The entire memory including scene memories and libraries will be returned to their factory set condi tion INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES The contents of memory except for scene memories and libraries will be returned to its factory set condition NOTE e If the backup battery voltage is low or if an error occurs in the internal memory a warning dialog box will appear and then the initialization menu will appear If the warning dialog box appears and you press the EXIT button to start up in normal operating mode Yamaha will not guarantee that the unit will operate correctly M7CL Owner s Manual A dialog box will ask you to confirm the ini tialization Press the INITIALIZE button A dialog box will ask you to reconfirm the operation
88. MIX bus Here you can also adjust the pan or balance in groups of the selected eight channels I 2 MP m ug 2 on NX NX wa Wa ux s 1 Channel select button This indicates the channel number the 1con selected for that channel and the channel name When you press this button that channel will be selected for operations and the corresponding SEL key will light 2 TO ST PAN TO ST BALANCE knob For INPUT channels this acts as the PAN knob that adjusts the left right panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus For ST IN channels this acts as the BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus To adjust the value press the knob to select it and operate the corresponding multifunction encoder If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel the indicator at the right of the knob will light 3 ST MONO indicator If a channel is set to ST MONO mode this individu ally indicates the on off status of the signal sent from the channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus If a channel is set to LCR mode the LCR indicator is displayed in this location The LCR indicator indicates the on off status of all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus Access the eight channel TO STEREO MONO popup window D Use the MODE button to select either ST MONO mode or LCR mode f
89. ON MIX TO STEREO TO MONO ON MIX 1 MIX 16 MATRIX 1 POINT MATRIX 8 POINT MATRIX 1 ON MATRIX 8 ON MATRIX 1 LEVEL MIX TO MATRIX MATRIX 8 LEVEL H MIX 1 MIX 16 MATRIX 1 LEVEL L MATRIX 8 LEVEL L MATRIX 1 2 PAN MATRIX 7 8 PAN MIX MATRIX SEND Parametri MATRIX 1 POINT MATRIX 8 POINT MATRIX 1 ON MATRIX 8 ON MATRIX 1 LEVEL H MATRIX 8 LEVEL H MATRIX 1 LEVEL L MATRIX 8 LEVEL L MATRIX 1 2 PAN MATRIX 7 8 PAN STEREO TO MATRIX STEREO L MONO C Z LOW Q LOW FREQ LOW GAIN LOW MID Q LOW MID FREQ LOW MID GAIN HIGH MID Q HIGH MID FREQ HIGH MID GAIN HIGH Q HIGH FREQ HIGH GAIN LPF ON LOW TYPE HIGH TYPE CH 1 CH 48 INPUT ATT INPUT STINTI STINAR FREQ STINTL STINAR ON LOW Q LOW FREQ LOW GAIN LOW MID Q LOW MID FREQ LOW MID GAIN HIGH MID Q HIGH MID FREQ HIGH MID GAIN HIGH Q STIN1L STIN4R M7CL Owner s Manual CH 1 CH 48STIN1 L INPUT EQ STIN4R INPUT HPF MIX 1 MIX 16 MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STEREO L MONO C OUTPUT EQ INPUT DYNAMICS1 Appendices 245 Parameters that can be assigned to control changes Parametri ON ATTACK cu tc as DYNAMICS2 STINTL STINAR DYNAMICS 2 55 EFFECT pee RACK5 8 PARAM 1 H PARAM 32 L GEQ RACK1 8 GAIN A 1 GAIN A 31 GAIN B 1 GAIN B 31 FADER H DCA 1 DCA 8 FADER L MUTE MASTER MASTER 1 MASTER 8
90. OR MOISTURE ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig handtering Udskiftning ma kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lever det brugte bat teri tilbage til leverandoren 98 6500 NEDERLAND THE NETHERLANDS Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back up This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back up e Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anvand samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rek ommenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anvant batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion VAROITUS Paristo voi rajahtaa jos se on virheellisesti asen nettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin Havita kaytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti lithium caution moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur of gelieve dan contact op te nemen met de vertegenwoordiging van Yamaha in uw land For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of life please consult your retailer or Yamaha representative office in your country Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever hem in als KCA Do not throw away the battery Instead hand it in as small chemical waste lithium disposal M7CL Owner s Manual 3 A PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe p
91. Owner s Manual v 9 C Q Q lt 235 Effects Parameters 236 DELAY ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel Feedback gain plus values for GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio Delay and early reflections bal DLY ER 0 100 ance 0 all delay 100 all early reflections THRU 21 2 Hz LN 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF e One Low pass filter cutoff frequency S Hall L Hall Ran TYPE dom Revers Plate Type of early reflection simulation Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteris EERE e tics 0 dead 10 live wg ooo ii9 Number of early reflections NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTER to determine right channel DELAY R Used in conjunction with TEMPO MONETE to determine FB DLY 1 Jd Hd B JS ddd d ded des Maximum value depends on the tempo setting M7CL Owners Manual DELAY ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in series DELAYR 0 0 1000 0 ms FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback High frequency feedback ratio Delay and early reflected d
92. P P This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec 48kHz 5 mis 42 3 sec 160 points once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively The P value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB OUT GAIN dB 18 0 to 0 0 181 points This sets the compander s output signal level This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied The 1 20 120 points expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high frequency consonants of the vocal RELEASE ms THRESHOLD 54 to 0 55 points Threshold level at which the de esser effect applies FREQUENCY 1kHz 12 5kHz 45 points Cutoff frequency of the HPF used to detect the high frequencies v 9 Q Q lt M7CL Owner s Manual 227 Effect Type List Effect Type List Reverb Hall REVERB HALL simula REV CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel REV gt CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series REVERB ROOM a Rev Flange REV FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel Rev Flange REV gt FLANGE _ Reverb and flanger in series Reverb Stade REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals with 9 gate Rev Sympho REV SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in parallel Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate
93. PAGE CHANGE CLOSE POPUP CH SELECT INC DEC SEND ENCODER Switch MONO MONITOR on off Bypass the specified effect Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen Use the tap tempo function for the specified effect Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on off Turn the meter PEAK HOLD function on off Toggle between the brightness settings stored in A and B Memorize the currently selected screen hold down the key for two seconds or longer or display the last memorized screen press and release the key within two seconds Popup screens can also be memorized In the case of a rack the number of that rack is also memorized Close the displayed popup window Decrement the channel selection If INPUT or ST IN is selected swich the function of the Selected Channel section s send encoders from TO MIX TO MATRIX TO MIX TO MATRIX SET 48V SET SET PRE SEND SET BY SEL SET TO STEREO SET TO MONO SET TO LCR Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it on off During this time the SEL LED will be lit if on or dark if off v 9 Q Q lt While holding down this key push encoder of the Selected Channel or Centralogic section to reset it to the default value While holding down this key press a SEL key to set the fader SET NOMINAL LEVEL of that channel to nominal level SENDS ON FADER MIX1 16 Recall the Sends On Fader function to the selected MIX M7CL Owner s Ma
94. Pressing this button will restore all event assignments in the list to their default state 6 Scroll knob This knob scrolls the contents of the list You can use multifunction encoder 1 to control this M7CL Owner s Manual MIDI 187 Using control changes to control parameters 6 Use the buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field to select the control change transmission reception mode You can choose one of the following two modes for control change transmission reception NRPN mode when the NRPN button is on The M7CL s various mix parameters will be trans mitted and received on a single MIDI channel as NRPN messages If you select this mode the assignments in the list will be ignored TABLE mode when the TABLE button is on The M7CL s various mix parameters will be trans mitted and received on a single MIDI channel as control change messages The channel on which control changes are transmitted and received is specified by the MIDI SETUP page PORT CH field gt p 182 7 Use the buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception on off and make settings for echo output Each button has the following function Tx button Switches control change transmission on off Rx button Switches control change reception on off ECHO button selects whether incoming control changes will be echoed out from the MIDI transmit port To change the event assignment for
95. Q Q lt 229 Effects Parameters E MOD DELAY ECHO One input two output basic repeat delay with modulation Two input two output stereo delay with crossed feedback DELAY 0 0 27250 ms Delay time Feedback plus values for DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FB DLY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel feedback delay time DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth Left channel feedback gain plus E values for normal phase feedback WAVE Modulation waveform pee minus values for reverse phase THRU 21 2 Hz Hich pass filter cutoff frequenc 8 00 kHz g rP q y Right channel feedback gain plus 0 Hz 16 0 _ values for normal phase feedback a 16 0 kHz Low pass filter cutoff frequency PEGER AR TORA minus values for reverse phase feedback Left to right channel feedback 99 to 99 gain plus values for normal phase 2 feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Right to left channel feedback _ gain plus values for normal phase hee 99 to 49990 feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback Used in conjunction with TEMPO mo to determine DELAY 2 2 2 2 gh
96. Rev Sympho 55 Reverb and symphonic in series Early Ref EARLY REF 0 BET ANG AULO pa ESENS Delay and early reflections in par Delay Er DELAY ER Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reflections meis Sig and ea reflections in par REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections Delay Er DELAY SER Sind and early reflections in Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay Delay Rev DELAY REV Delay and reverb in parallel Delay Rev DELAY REV Delay and reverb in series Mod Del MOD DELAY Simple repeat delay with modula pa ee Dist Delay DIST DELAY Distortion and delay in series Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3 tap left center right delay Multi Filter MULTI FILTER parallel filter 24 Ech ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left cho right feedback Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler sampler Flange FLANGE M Band Dyna M BAND DYNA Multi band dynamics processor Proprietary Yamaha effect that M Band Comp M BAND COMP Multi band compressor produces richer and com Symphonic SYMPHONIC plex modulation than normal REV X Hall REV X HALL New reverb algorithm that deliv chorus ers dense and rich reverberation smooth decay and provides a Phaser PHASER 16 stage stereo phase shifter spaciousness and depth that AUTO PAN REV X Room REV X ROOM enhances the original sound Choose from three types depend TREMOLO ing on yo
97. TEMPO 4 DELAY 5 FREQ DING M This is the on off switch for tempo synchronization NOTE and TEMPO These the basic parameters for tempo synchronization DELAY and FREQ DELAY is the delay time and FREQ is the frequency of the modulation signal These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change DELAY is relevant only for delay type effects and FREQ is relevant only for modulation type effects How the parameters are related Tempo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo and continues making adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY or FREQ This means that when TEMPO NOTE and DELAY or FREQ are synchronized and you change any of these values the other parameters will be re set in order to maintain the correct relationship The parameters that are re set and the calculation method a used are as follows If you turn SYNC on NOTE will be set If you edit DELAY or FREQ NOTE will be set In this case the NOTE value is calculated as follows NOTE DELAY or FREQ 4 x 60 TEMPO If you edit NOTE DELAY or FREQ will be set In this case the DELAY or FREQ value is calculated as follows DELAY or FREQ NOTE x 4 x 60 TEMPO If you edit TEMPO DELAY or FREQ will be set In this case the DELAY or FREQ value is calculated as follows DELAY or FREQ original DELAY or FREQ
98. TO MATRIX5 314C 3183 CAINTZ 280c 2811 INPUT TO MATRIXS 314C INPUT TO MATRIX6 318C 3163 GAIN1 3 2812 2817 INPUT MATRIX7 31CC 3203 2818 12810 INPUT TO MATRIX 31CC INPUT TO MATRIX8 320C 3243 GAIN15 281E 2823 RACKI 3 GE 5256 326 GAIN16 2824 2829 325E LOW Q 3264 3268 GAIN1 7 282A 282F LOW FRE 326A 326E GAINTS 2830 2835 LOW FREQ 326A LOW GAIN 3270 3274 GAIN19 2836 283B LOW MID 3276 327A GAIN20 283C 2841 LOWMDQ 3276 LOW MID FREQ 327C 3280 GAIN21 2842 2847 LOW MID GAIN 3282 3286 202051505 LOW MID GAIN 3282 MONO C EQ HIGH MID Q 3288 328C GAIN23 284E 2853 HIGH MID FRE 328E 3292 CAINA 2854 2859 HIGH MID FREQ 328 HIGH MID GAIN 3294 3298 GAIN25 285A 285F HIGH 329A 329 GAIN26 2860 2865 32 HIGH FREQ 32A0 32A4 GAIN27 2866 286B HIGH GAIN 32A6 32AA GAIN28 286C 2871 HIGHGAIN 32 46 HPF ON 32AC 32B0 GAIN29 2872 2877 LPF ON 32B2 32B6 GAIN30 2878 2875 PFON 3282 GAINS 287E 2883 INPUT EQ LOW TYPE 3440 3477 INPUT EQ HIGH TYPE 3480 34B7 FADER MONO C 28E4 28E8 MIX MATRIX STE LOW TYPE 34CO 34E2 REO LRC EQ HIGH TYPE 34E4 3506 250 1 M7CL Owners Manual NRPN parameter assignments Parameter From To Parameter FUE ES HEX HEX HEX HEX BUR 3BF6 INPUT to MIX1 8 Matrix5 8 PAN MONOIC to 1 8 PAN MIRS T6 tO STE Sur on ON
99. Te ooreo neser MM eter Tre oont bands zoo 4k 20k button The eight bands 4 00 2 20 0 kHz When you press one of these buttons the faders for the selected group of bands will turn white in the touch screen and you will be able to use the faders of the Centralogic section to control them The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic sec tion is locked When you turn off the button in the FADER ASSIGN field it will return to the locked state 5 Operate the faders of the Centralogic sec tion The corresponding frequency region will be boosted or cut a gt e When a fader of the Centralogic section is in the center flat position the corresponding ON key will go dark This indi cates that the corresponding band is not being modified If you raise or lower the fader even lightly the ON key will light indicating that this band is being modified If you press a lit ON key to make it go dark the corresponding band will immediately return to the flat state 164 1 M7CL Owners Manual 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust each band e f you switch the display to a different screen or rack the fader assignments of the Centralogic section will forcibly be defeated However if you once again display the same rack the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders 7 When you ve finished making settings turn off the buttons of the FADER ASS
100. When the M7CL is in the default state the following output ports are assigned MIX channels 1 12 OMNI OUT jacks 1 12 Output channel operations MIX channels 1 Slot 1 output channels 1 8 9 16 MIX channels 9 16 Slot 2 output channels 1 8 9 16 M N MIX MATRIX CUE 142 1516 LR C 12 78 LR RACKIN PATCH toourpuT PATCH mix To OUTPUT PATCH i o PRE FADER INSERT OUT INSERT OUT 116 lt 8 PREEQ INSERT OUT INSERT IN Mx l L 6 PRE EQ EQ OUT DYNA OU PRE FADER POST METER METER METER METER IGR METER LEVEL 0 13 16 INSERT INSERT 5 4 BAD COMPAND IS ne To RACKIN PATCH EXPAND l ee ee Q Q To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT PRE FADER ae PREEQ POSTEQM 1 INSERT OUT MPRE FADER INSERT OUT Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX13 16 OUT MIX 1 8 9 16 POST EQ 1 PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL S es ee es LEVEL PRE FADER post ON MATRIX 1 MATRIX2 4 8 LEVEL VARI i To MATRIX EL o Gly PRE FADER POST ON PAN E MEM M MEME PAN MODE TOST TOMONO LR tine MONO LXT LCR LCR l HMI Coa o So 2 a STR LY 919 9 POSTO
101. You can t paste with an existing file name Deleting a file 5 Enter a file name or comment and press 1 In the function access area press the the RENAME button or SET button SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 6 To turn the protect setting on off press the 2 Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the READ ONLY field of the file SAVE LOAD popup window A protect symbol is displayed for write protected files these files cannot be overwritten 3 Turn multifunction encoder 1 to select the file you want to delete and press the E DELETE button You cannot edit the file name or comment of a write protected A dialog box will ask you to reconfirm the Delete operation Copying pasting a file Here s how to copy a desired file into buffer memory and then paste it with a different file name T In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 4 To execute the Delete operation press the OK button User settings Security 2 Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window p You can t delete a protected file Turn multifunction encoder 1 to select the copy source file and press the COPY but ton The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations M7CL Owner s Manual 205 Using a USB storage device to save load data 206 Creating a directory T In the function access area press the SETUP but
102. an extreme setting gt p 108 O Is the EQ attenuator raised p 105 O Is the fader of the output channel raised O Try using the various screens of the METER function to check the levels gt p 153 O Is the DCA fader assigned to that channel raised O Is the word clock set correctly p 208 O Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level p 44 55 O Could the fader of the input channel be raised too high O Could the fader of the STEREO channel be raised too high O Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely high setting p 105 O Could you have assigned an input channel to direct out gt p 102 O Could you have assigned an output channel as the insert out p 100 O Could GATE COMP be set to ducking p 108 O Is SENDS ON FADER selected and INPUT TO MIX FADER active in the panel O Could a CUE key be on O Is the word clock set correctly p 208 O Could the input signal be unsynchronized O Could oscillator or talkback be turned on gt p 149 151 O Could emphasis be applied This problem will occur if the input signal status does not match the emphasis data p 208 O Could EQ be applied gt p 105 O Is the dimmer applied O Is the MONITOR C assigned even though its output port has not been connected to external device Use the EQ attenuator function to lower the level gt p 105 Check whether the delay setting for each channel is s
103. and use multifunction encoders 1 8 to adjust the level difference between the signals sent from that channel to the STEREO L R bus and to the MONO C bus The CSR knob settings are the same as for input chan nels For details refer to gt p 59 10 In the TO STEREO MONO popup window press the TO ST PAN knob to select it and use multifunction encoders 1 8 to adjust the panning of the signals sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO L R bus and the balance of the signals sent to the MONO C bus and STEREO L R bus Refer to page 59 for details on how the signal level sent from an LCR mode MIX channel to each bus will change according to the operation of the TO ST PAN knob Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses This section explains how to send the signal from a MIX or STEREO MONO channel to MATRIX buses 1 8 You can do this in either of the following two ways Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section In this method you use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses This method allows you to simultaneously control the signals sent from a specific MIX STEREO L R or MONO C channel to all MATRIX buses Using the Centralogic section In this method you use the multifunction encoders of the Centralogic section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX bu
104. another channel When you execute the copy operation the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy des tination You can copy between the following combinations of channels Between input channels Between the STEREO L R channel and MONO chan nel Between MIX channels Between MATRIX channels 1 In the function access area press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB menu COPY button E ae 2 Press the COPY button to access the CH COPY MODE popup window This popup window lets you copy channel settings The window contains the following items D 2 1 SOURCE CH field Indicates the channel that is selected as the copy source You can press this field to cancel the channel that is shown 2 DESTINATION CHs field Indicates the channel that is selected as the copy desti nation You can press this field to cancel the channel that is shown 122 1 M7CL Owners Manual 3 COPY TARGET field If you ve selected a MIX channel MATRIX channel or STEREO MONO channel as the copy source use the buttons of this field to select the parameters that will be copied You may turn both buttons on if desired If both buttons are on the following parameters will be copied e MODULE PARAMETERS button VA All parameters of the copy source channel e SENDS button On off status and send level settings of the send signals sent to the copy source channel 4 COPY Executes the copy 3 T
105. applied to the input signal in sets of two channels This item is only for display and cannot be edited This is available only for slots in which a digital I O card is installed In the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field select the desired clock source You can choose one of the following clock sources INT 48 k INT 44 1 k The M7CL s internal clock sampling rate 48 kHz or 44 1 kHz respectively will be the clock source Choose one of these if you want to use the M7CL as the word clock master WORD CLOCK IN The word clock supplied from the rear panel WORD CLOCK IN jack will be used as the clock source In this case the M7CL will operate as a word clock slave SLOT 1 3 The clock data of the digital audio signal supplied via a digital I O card in slot 1 3 selectable in two channel units will be used as the clock source In this case the M7CL will operate as a word clock slave The status operating state of the clock data being received from each port is indicated by the color of the symbol displayed immediately above Each color has the following significance LOCK light blue This indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected source is being input If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot input output is occurring normally between that device and the M7CL If the sampling frequency is close this status may be displayed even if not syn chronized Word Clock
106. assign functions to user defined keys 1 12 Graphic EQ and effects M7CL Owner s Manual 173 About the internal effects 174 User defined keys popup buttons 4 Press the popup button for the user defined key to which you want to assign the Tap Tempo function The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear 5 Select TAP TEMPO in the FUNCTION col umn select CURRENT PAGE in the PARAMETER 1 column and press the OK button Use the T J buttons to select an item in each column Press the OK button the Tap Tempo function will be assigned to the user defined key you selected in step 4 and you will return to the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP page e f you specify CURRENT PAGE in the PARAMETER 1 col umn the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currently shown effect rack f you specify RACK x x 5 8 in the PARAMETER 1 col umn the Tap Tempo function can be used only for a specific effect rack For more about user defined keys refer to User defined keys p 200 6 In the function access area press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window and use the GEQ EFFECT tab to display the GEQ EFFECT field M7CL Owner s Manual Press the rack in which the effect you want to control is mounted The GEQ EFFECT popup window will appear 8 Press the effect type field to open the EFFECTTYPE popup window and select an effect type that include
107. be used to transmit or receive each type of MIDI mes sage press the transmit Tx or receive Rx port select popup button The MIDI SETUP popup window for selecting the port will appear Operations in this window are the same for both transmission Tx and reception Rx and include the following items Basic MIDI settings a no 1 TERMINAL field Select the port that will transmit or receive MIDI mes sages You can choose from the following items ltem Explanation NONE No port will be used Rear panel MIDI IN Rx OUT Tx connector REMOTE Rear panel REMOTE connector SLOT 1 3 A card that supports serial transmission installed in a rear panel slot 1 3 2 PORT NO field If you select SLOT 1 3 in the TERMINAL field choose port number 1 8 in this field The number of available ports will depend on the card that is installed The currently available card is valid only for port 1 5 Specify the type of port and the port num ber Use the T J buttons to select an item Press the OK button to confirm the selected port and close the MIDI SETUP popup window Alternatively you can select a port by pressing the desired port name in the field or by pressing the field to highlight it and then turning one of the multifunction encoders to select the port 6 To specify the channel on which MIDI mes sages will be transmitted or received press the channel select popup button The MIDI SETU
108. buses On off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses ON key operations MIX SEND button MATRIX ON button MATRIX SEND button FADER button CH ON button m gt If you link Dynamic 1 and 2 for two or more input channels the parameter values will be linked but the key in signals are not linked For more about dynamics refer to Using dynam ics gt p 108 e f you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS 1 2 button library recall operations will also be linked If you turned on the MIX ON MIX SEND MATRIX ON or MATRIX send buttons in step 3 use the buttons of the SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus es for which you want operations to be linked multiple selections are allowed The table below lists the parameters you can select in the SEND PARAMETER field MX 1 16 buttons MIX buses 1 16 MT 1 8 buttons MATRIX buses 1 8 e f nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field send on off and send level will not be linked 5 To link channels hold down the SEL key of the link source input channel and press the SEL key of the link destination chan nel At this time the values of the parameters you selected in steps 3 and 4 will be copied from the link source to the link destination channel Subsequent operations of the parameters you selected in steps 3 and 4 will be linked between channels belonging to the same link group The current link s
109. button switches the insert on off If this button 1s off the insert out in signal path is bypassed 5 INSERT IN popup button This indicates the input port that is selected as the insert in for this channel Press this button to open a popup window where you can select the input port 4 Access either the one channel or the eight channel INSERT DIRECT OUT popup win dow and press the INSERT OUT popup but ton The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the output port used for insert out The window includes the following items 1 Output port select tabs These tabs select the output ports shown in the win dow Each tab corresponds to the following output ports SLOT 1 SLOT 3 m Output channels 1 16 from slots 1 3 will be displayed RACK Input ports to rack 1 8 will be dis played 2 Output port select buttons These buttons assign the output port that will be used as insert out for the currently selected channel NOTE out or insert in the other patch point will automatically be assigned to the same rack Additionally if you defeat the insert out or insert in of a rack in which a GEQ is mounted the other patch point will automati cally be defeated 5 Use the output port select tabs and the out put port select buttons to specify the out put port that will be used as insert out and press the CLOSE button You will return to the INSERT DIRECT OUT
110. contact or fader motion Backup battery e This device has a built in backup battery When you unplug the power cord from the AC outlet the current scene data and library data is retained However if the backup battery fully discharges this data will be lost When the backup battery is running low the LCD display indicates Low Battery when you starting up the system In this case the Battery field indicates LOW or NO in the SET UP screen immediately save the data to a USB storage device then have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery XLR type connectors are wired as follows IEC60268 standard pin 1 ground pin 2 hot and pin 3 cold Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device or data that is lost or destroyed Always turn the power off when the device is not in use The performance of components with moving contacts such as switches volume controls and connectors deteriorates over time Consult qualified Yamaha service personnel about replacing defective components This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal information in the United States refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site www eiae org This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA COR
111. cute You can also assign the same function as the RECALL UNDO button to a user defined key gt p 200 You also use MIDI messages program changes to recall scenes gt p 184 Using scene memories z z 3 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to Using user defined keys to recall select the USER DEFINED KEYS page The USER DEFINED KEYS page lets you assign You can use the user defined keys to directly recall a functions to user defined keys 1 12 selected scene with a single keystroke or to step through the scenes To do this you must first assign a scene recall operation to a user defined key The following recall operations can be assigned to a user defined key e INC RECALL ere Immediately recalls the scene of the number that follows the currently loaded scene DEC RECALL Immediately recalls the scene of the number that precedes the currently loaded scene User defined keys popup buttons If no scene is stored the number that precedes or follows the currently loaded scene the closest scene number in which a scene is stored will be recalled e DIRECT RECALL ER Directly recalls the scene number that 4 Press the popup button for the user defined you assigned to the user defined key key to which you want to assign a function When you press a user defined key to The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window which this function is assigned the assigned scene will be recalle
112. depth Feedback gain plus values for GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset PHASE 0 00 354 38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance Number of phase shift stages 2 4 6 8 10 12 STAGE 14 16 SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Wd Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain Lo du BOIS B h ddd D 4 de d on E AUTOPAN Two input two output autopanner 05100 Modulation speed m 2 rege O 100 He 8 00 KHz EQ peaking type trequeny 100 010 tQ peaking type bandwidth 1 L amp R LoR LR Turn L Turn R 2 4H BUS B D 4 de d M7CL Owner s Manual v 9 C Q Q lt 231 Effects Parameters E TREMOLO DUAL PITCH Two input two output tremolo effect Two input two output pitch shifter FREQ 005 1000 Hz Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 to determine FREQ PITCH 1 24 to 24 semitones Channel 1 pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Channel 1 pitch shift fine Channel 1 level plus values LEVEL 1 100 to 100 for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel 1 pan LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 2 Low shelving filter frequency DELAY I Channel 1 delay time tar T00 Hz 8 00 KHz EQ pea
113. desired use the navigation keys to switch the group of eight channels con trolled by the OVERVIEW screen multi function encoders 4 To release the channels or DCA groups that were fixed to the Centralogic section press the navigation key you operated in step 1 once again and hold it down until the navigation key LED changes from blinking to lit When the navigation key LED changes to being lit its channels or DCA groups will be assigned to both the Centralogic section and the OVERVIEW screen Chapter 9 Input output patching This chapter explains how to edit the input patch and output patch settings and how to use insert connections and direct output Changing the output patch settings When the M7CL is in its default state the output ports are patched to the following channels STEREO channel L R STEREO channel L R However the above patching can be changed as desired To change the patching you can either select the output port that will be the output destination of each output channel or you can select the output channel that will be the output source for each output port Selecting the output port for each out put channel Here s how to select the output port that will be the output destination for each output channel 1 Use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen containing the output channel whose output port you want to assign 1 Channel number Channel name 2 In th
114. differences you established in step 1 NOTE The input faders will not operate at this time 5 To switch a DCA group on off press the Centralogic section ON key for that DCA group When you press a Centralogic section ON key to make it go dark the channels assigned to that DCA group will be turned off the same state as when the faders are lowered to the dB position Grouping and linking 6 To cue monitor a DCA group press the Centralogic section CUE key for that DCA group When you press the Centralogic section CUE key to make it light the CUE keys of the channels assigned to that DCA group will blink and cue monitoring will be enabled For more about cue refer to Using the Cue function p 145 M7CL Owners Manual 115 Using mute groups Using mute groups This section explains how to assign channels to mute groups and use the user defined keys to control them Assigning channels to mute groups To assign channel to mute groups you can either select a specific mute group and then assign channels to that mute group or you can select a specific channel and then spec ify the mute groups to which it will belong To operate a mute group you ll need to assign the desired chan nels to a mute group and then assign MUTE MASTER to a user defined key a gt nels Both types of channel can exist in the same group Mute group settings are saved as part of the
115. each control number press the corresponding event The MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window will appear In this window you can specify the event assigned to each control number The window contains the following items 1 MODE field Select the type of event 2 PARAMETER 1 2 field In conjunction with the MODE field this specifies the type of event M7CL Owners Manual NOTE e If NRPN mode is selected as the control change transmis sion reception mode the settings in this window are ignored gt For details on the events that can be assigned to control changes refer to the appendix gt p 245 In the order of the MODE field PARAME TER 1 field PARAMETER 2 field specify the type of event you want to assign Use the T l buttons to select an item Press the OK button to confirm the change and close the MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window You can also press the desired event in the field to select it You can press a field to highlight the item you want to select and then turn one of the multifunction encoders to select an event 1 Assign events to other control numbers in the same way When you operate the parameters you assigned on the M7CL control change messages will be transmitted to external devices Similarly if the corresponding con trol change messages are sent from an external device on the appropriate channel the parameters assigned to those control numbers wi
116. either TABLE or NRPN Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if Control Change ECHO is ON If TABLE is selected these messages are received when Control Change Rx is ON and Rx CH matches and will control parameters according to the settings of the Control assign table For the parameters that can be assigned refer to Parameters that can be assigned to control changes on page 245 If NRPN is selected these messages are received when Control Change Rx is ON and the Rx CH matches the four messages NRPN control number 62h 63h and DATA ENTRY control number 06h 26h are used to control the specified parameter Transmission If TABLE is selected and if Control Change Tx is ON when you operate a parameter that is assigned in the Control assign table these messages will be transmitted on the Tx CH channel For the parameters that can be assigned refer to Parameters that can be assigned to control changes on page 245 If NRPN is selected and if Control Change Tx is ON when you operate a specified parameter the four messages NRPN control number 62h 63h and DATA ENTRY control number 06h 26h are transmitted on the Tx CH channel For the parameters that can be assigned refer to Parameters that can be assigned to control changes on page 245 Control Change messages are not used for transmission to M7CL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will
117. field shown in the VIR TUAL RACK window For details on the GEQ EFFECT fields refer to Virtual rack operations gt p 158 Refer to External head amp connections p 177 or the owner s manual for your external HA 2 In the function access area press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window 4 To specify the input ports for an external HA press the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup button for that rack 7 The EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window will appear The popup window includes the following items 1 RACK button 2 EXTERNAL HA tab oO In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK win dow press the EXTERNAL HA tab to dis play the EXTERNAL HA field The EXTERNAL HA field includes the following items 1 PORT SELECT buttons These buttons specify the input ports to which the external HA is connected 2 NO ASSIGN button This button defeats the port selection D Use the PORT SELECT buttons to specify the input ports to which the audio output of the external HA is connected When you ve finished making settings press the CLOSE button to close the popup window gt 4 f an external HA is connected to one of the 7 slots 1 EXTERNAL HA field This field shows the state of the connected external HA 2 ID Model name 48V master This displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack The ID number is automatically assigned in o
118. first select the send destination buses MIX buses or MATRIX buses Use the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen TO MIX TO MATRIX button p 82 to make this selection The screen will change as fol lows according to the buses you select If MATRIX buses selected as the send destination If MIX buses are selected as the send destination Press the selected knob once again and the MIX SEND MATRIX SEND popup window 8 ch will appear depending on the send destination buses you selected This popup window contains on off switches for the signals sent from the channel to the corre sponding buses and lets you select the send point PRE or POST For details on the popup window gt 212 If the send destination MIX bus or MATRIX bus is set to stereo the left of the two adjacent knobs will oper ate as the TO MIX PAN or TO MATRIX PAN knob or as the BALANCE knob if the send source channel is stereo TO MIIX PAN TO MATRIX PAN knob M7CL Owner s Manual These knobs will adjust the panning between two buses that are set to stereo For a stereo channel they will adjust the volume balance of the left and right channels sent to the two buses 2 TO MIX SEND ON OFF button These are on off switches for the signal sent from the input channel to the MIX buses These buttons are shown only when the send source is an input channel and the send destination is a FIXED type MIX bus To switch the on off status
119. fixed Channel Mode fixed Users Bit Management Use of AUX 2 fixed 27 0 7 Multi Channel Digital Audio Reference Signal fixed 2 Sampling Frequency Sampling Frequency Scan Flag fixed 0 byte Sampling Frequency UJ o N EN L Control I O Characteristics Terminal ETHERNET ETH ETHERNET m MB 50 1 750 Input output characteristics description professional use audio off lock others 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 2ch mode 24 bits Audio Data others Connector RJ 45 DIN Connector 5P BNC Connector REMOTE RS422 D Sub Connector 9P Male LAMP 1 32ch 2 48ch 0V 12V XLR 4 31 type 51 4 3pinZ2 COLD Lamp rating 5 W Voltage control by software _1 SLOT 1 3 Characteristics The Number Of MY8 AT a MY8 TD 8 OUT MY8 AE AES EBU MY8 AEB MY4 DA ANALOG OUT 4 OUT MY8 AD24 ANALOG IN 8 IN MY8 AD96 MY8 DA96 ANALOG OUT 3 MY8 AE96S 8 OUT AES EBU 8 IN MY8 AE96 MY16 AT ADAT MY16 AE AES EBU 16 IN 16 OUT MY16 TD TASCAM MY16 C CobraNet 16 IN 16 OUT MY16 CII D MY8 ADDA96 ANALOG 8 IN 8 OUT lt M7CL Owners Manual 267 Electrical characteristics Electrical characteristics All faders are nominal when measured Output impedance of signal generator 1500hms E Freq uency Response Fs 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz 20 Hz 20 kHz referenced to the nominal output level 1 kHz ipu INPUT 1 48 4
120. for control change trans mission reception Tx button Switches control change transmis sion on off Rx button Switches control change reception on off ECHO button Selects whether incoming control changes will be echoed out from the MIDI transmit port 7 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field Here you can select the control change transmission reception mode NRPN button Em If this button is on the M7CL s mix parameters will be transmitted received as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel NRPN mode TABLE button If this button is on the M7CL s mix parameters will be transmitted received as control change mes sages on one MIDI channel TABLE mode PARAMETER CHANGE field Here you can make settings for transmission reception of parameter change system exclusive messages Tx button Switches parameter change trans mission on off Rx button Switches parameter change recep tion on off ECHO button Selects whether incoming parame ter changes will be echoed out from the MIDI transmit port 9 OTHER COMMAND field Here you can specify how MIDI messages other than program changes control changes and parameter changes 1 e messages such as note on off and MIDI timing clock will be received ECHO button Selects whether other MIDI mes sages that are received will be ech oed out from the MIDI transmit port 4 To specify the port that will
121. input output chan nels 1 IN 2 OUT or 2 IN 2 OUT of this effect is also shown When you press this field the EFFECT TYPE popup window will appear allowing you to select the effect type 4 EFFECT CUE button This button cue monitors the output of the currently displayed effect This cue function is valid only while this screen is displayed The cue will be cancelled automatically when you switch to a different screen 5 Special parameter field This shows special parameters that are specific to some effect types 6 BYPASS button This button temporarily bypasses the effect 7 Input output meters These indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect Effect parameter field This area shows parameters for the currently selected effect type When you press a knob in this field you ll be able to use the multifunction encoders to control the corresponding horizontal row of knobs 9 Rack select tabs These tabs switch between racks 1 8 3 To change the effect type press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window Press a new effect type to select it You can also switch the effect type by recalling a library set ting e Effect types HQ PITCH and FREEZE can be used only rack 5 or 7 Also even if you copy these two effect types you will not be able to paste them to rack 6 or 8 4 To edit the effect parameters press a knob in the effect parameter field to sel
122. multifunction encoder or press the multifunction encoder while you turn it e If you selected multiple scenes as the store destination the same contents will be stored in all scene numbers This is convenient when you want to create several variations of the same mix settings You can also use the SCENE MEMORY keys to select scene numbers NOTE e Note that you can t use the STORE UNDO button if you ve stored to multiple scenes simultaneously Press the STORE button The SCENE STORE popup window will appear allowing you to assign a title or comment to the scene 5 Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired For details on entering text refer to Entering names p 30 6 Press the STORE button located at the bot tom of the SCENE STORE popup window The SCENE STORE popup window will close and a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation 7 To execute the Store operation press the OK button The current mix settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 3 If you decide to cancel the Store operation press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button 8 If you want to cancel a scene overwrite store operation press the STORE UNDO button Immediately after overwrite storing a scene you can use the STORE UNDO button to undo cancel the most recently executed scene store operation When you press the STORE UNDO button a dialog box will ask you to confirm
123. num bered scene and pressing the SCENE MEMORY key will select the next lowest numbered scene Key presses will increment decrement the scene number e LIST UP DOWN m Pressing the SCENE MEMORY A key will scroll the list upward and pressing the SCENE MEMORY key will scroll the list downward The up down key corresponds to the direction in which the list will scroll e LIST ORDER This specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear in the screen NORMAL Show the list in ascending numeri cal order REVERSE Show the list in descending numeri cal order 4 Use the buttons in the screen to make pref erence settings 5 When you have finished making settings close the popup window and press the SETUP button in the function access area User settings Security CO M7CL Owners Manual 199 User defined keys User defined keys Here s how you can assign the desired functions to the user defined keys in the USER DEFINED section of the top panel and press these keys to execute the defined function This assignment procedure will define the user defined keys for the user who is currently logged in but if you are logged in as the Administrator you can also make user defined key settings for the Guest account T the function access area press the 4 Press the button for the user defined key to SETUP button to access the SETUP screen which you wa
124. of inputs and outputs and the levels before and following the effect 1 Racks 2 INPUT buttons 3 OUTPUT buttons 2 Press the INPUT L button to open the OUT PUT CH SELECT popup window and select the insert out of a channel as the input source For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup win dow refer to step 5 of Virtual rack operations gt p 158 Insert out is now assigned to the L input of the effect 3 Press the INPUT L button to open the INPUT CH SELECT popup window and select the insert in of the same channel as the output destination For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup win dow refer to step 6 of Virtual rack operations gt p 158 Insert in is now assigned to the L output of the effect If you are inserting in a channel that handles a stereo source assign the R channel insert out insert in to the R input output 4 Use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen for the channel in which you want to insert the effect 5 Press the INSERT DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window Make sure that the rack you inserted in the input out put ports is selected For details on Insert Out In refer to Inserting an external device into a channel gt p 100 M7CL Owner s Manual INSERT ON OFF button The INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window also lets you change the insert out in position within the channel 6 sure that the INSE
125. of the signal sent from the channel to VARI type MIX buses or to MATRIX buses press the selected knob once again to open the MIX SEND MATRIX SEND popup window 8 ch Alterna tively you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen Adjusting the send levels from all MIX chan nels to a MATRIX bus In the OVERVIEW screen you can simultaneously adjust the send level of the signals sent from all MIX channels to each MATRIX bus To do this use the MATRIX key of the NAVIGATION KEYS section to assign MATRIX channels 1 8 to the Centralogic section At this time the OVERVIEW screen will show the FROM MIX field This field includes the following items 1 FROM MIX SEND LEVEL knob For each MATRIX bus this shows the send level of the signals sent from MIX channels 1 16 To adjust the value press the knob to select it and operate mul tifunction encoders 1 8 If you press the selected knob once again the MATRIX SEND popup window 8 ch will appear In this popup window you can switch the on off status of the signal sent from a specific MIX channel to MATRIX buses 1 8 and select the send position PRE POST Use the lt buttons in the window to select MIX channels For details on the popup win dow p 64 Adjusting the pan balance INPUT ST IN STEREO and MIX channels only In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the TO STEREO field to switch the on off status and adjust the pan balance of the sign
126. on 4 If you want to enable Recall Safe for spe cific parameters of the selected channel or DCA group make the following settings in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field Simply selecting a parameter in step 4 does not enable Recall Safe To turn Recall Safe on off you must also perform the operation of step 5 e While the APPLY TO ALL INPUT button or the APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button is on operations in the SAFE PARAM ETER SELECT field will apply to all input channels or output channels If an input channel is selected Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAME TER SELECT field except for the ALL button to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe multiple selections are allowed If you want all parame ters to be subject to Recall Safe turn on the ALL button this is the default setting These buttons correspond to the following parameters sarete aus n MATRIX ON MATRIX SEND NOTE If the ALL button is on all other buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field will be turned off STEREO MONO channel is selected With the exception of the types of button that are dis played this is the same as for an input channel These but tons correspond to the following parameters Corresponding parameters NOTE If the ALL button is on all other buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAM
127. on off 2 In the center of the screen press the MIDI ECHO button button to access the MIDI popup window j Te This selects whether incoming pro This window includes several pages which you can gram changes are echoed out from switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the MIDI transmission port the window For details on how to assign the scene or effect for each pro gram number refer to Using program changes to recall scenes and library items p 184 5 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field Here you can select the program change transmit receive mode Tabs SINGLE button ae If this button is on program changes 3 Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page a single MIDI channel In the MIDI SETUP page you can select the type of e OMNI button If this button is on program changes MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received of all MIDI channels will be received and choose the port that will be used This page in Single mode Multi mode trans transmission are disabled D BANK button If this button is on bank select mes sages can be transmitted and received in Single mode This is disabled for Multi mode transmis sion reception MULTI button If this button is program changes will be transmitted received on mul tiple MIDI channels Multi mode 182 M7CL Owner s Manual 6 CONTROL CHANGE field Here you can make settings
128. one output basic repeat delay DELAY 0 0 2730 0 ms Delay time Feedback gain plus values for GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO ndis URN to determine DELAY 1 GE HI PM B 444 4 4 4 4 d Max value depends on tempo setting STEREO DELAY Two input two output basic stereo delay DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time Left channel feedback plus values FB GL 99 to 99 for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback Right channel feedback plus val ues for normal phase feedback G minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz LN 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE L 1 conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY 1 GE HI RIS Fe 4 4 4 d d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Low pass filter cutoff frequency Low pass filter cutoff frequency M7CL Owner s Manual v 9 E
129. or output stage of the effect 10 Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack s output destination in step 3 adjust the level as appropriate About the internal effects Editing the internal effect parameters This section explains how to change the effect type and edit the parameters 1 As described in Virtual rack operations gt p 158 steps 1 3 mount an effect in a rack A rack in which an effect is mounted will show the following information 1 Effect title type This shows the effect title the name of the type that is used and a graphic The number of input output chan nels 1 IN 2 OUT or 2 IN 2 OUT of this effect is also shown 2 Input output meters These indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect 2 Press the rack in which the effect you want to edit is mounted The GEQ EFFECT popup window will appear allow ing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or effect In the GEQ EFFECT popup window you can use the tabs to switch between the eight racks j 2 7 1 ae fom Graphic EQ and effects 1 INPUT L R buttons These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window 2 OUTPUT L R buttons These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup window M7CL Owners Manual ff 171 About the internal effects 3 Effect type field This shows the effect title the name of the type that is used and a graphic The number of
130. other output ports When you have finished making settings click the x symbol in the upper right of the window to return to the previous screen Changing the input patch settings When the M7CL is in its default state the following input ports are patched to each input channel INPUT channels 1 32 1 48 INPUT jacks 1 32 1 48 ST IN channels 1 4 EFFECT RETURN 1 4 L R However the above patching can be changed as desired Here we will explain how to change the patching for each input channel 1 Use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen for the input channels whose input source you want to change 1 Channel number Channel name 2 In the top part of the screen press the channel number channel name field to access the PATCH NAME popup window In the PATCH NAME popup window you can change the channel name icon and input port assigned to each input channel 98 1 M7CL Owners Manual PATCH NAME popup window PATCH 1 Input port button This indicates the currently selected input port If you press this button when selecting an icon or changing the channel name you will return to the input port select screen 2 Icon button This indicates the icon selected for that channel When you press this button a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name 3 Channel name input box This indicates the name assigned to that channel When you press th
131. output This field includes the following items Tx button Switches program change transmission on off Rx button Switches program change reception on off ECHO button This selects whether incoming program changes are echoed out from the MIDI transmission port 8 To change the event assignment for each program number press the desired event in the list The MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window will appear In this window you can specify the event assigned to each program number The popup window includes the following items TYPE field Select the type of event The following table lists the events you can select Ponssen oson SCENE Scene memory recall operations RACK 5 8 Effect library recall operations for racks 5 8 only if an effect is mounted 2 LIBRARY NAME field Select the number and title of the scene or library item to recall If you selected SCENE in the TYPE field this shows the scene number and its title If you selected RACK 5 8 this shows the library number and its title M7CL Owners Manual 9 Use the TYPE field to select the type of event you want to assign and use the LIBRARY NAME field to select the scene library number that will be recalled Use the T J buttons to select an item Press the OK button to confirm the change and close the MIDI PRO GRAM CHANGE popup window You can also select the desired event or scene library num ber in this fi
132. output port used for direct output of the currently selected INPUT channel 5 Use the output port select tabs and the out put port select buttons to specify the out put port that will be used for direct output and press the CLOSE button You will return to the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window Directly outputting an INPUT channel 6 Press the DIRECT OUT ON OFF button to turn it ON In this state direct output 1s enabled Adjust the input level of your external device as necessary e With the factory settings all are turned on 7 If you want to change the position of the direct output access the one channel INSERT DIRECT OUT popup button and press one of the three DIRECT OUT fields The DIRECT OUT field you pressed will be enabled and the other DIRECT OUT field will be disabled 8 If you want to adjust the level of the direct output access either the one channel or the eight channel INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window and operate the DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob 9 When you have finished making all set tings click the x symbol located in the upper right to close the window You will return to the OVERVIEW screen 10 As desired make direct output settings for other channels as well Input output patching M7CL Owners Manual 103 104 1 M7CL Owners Manual Chanter 10 EQ and Dynamics This chapter explains the EQ equalizer and dynamics that are provided on each channel of the M7CL About EQ
133. output signal MONO C button MONO channel output signal LCR button STEREO L R MONO channel LCR output signal ST IN 1 4 buttons ST IN jacks 1 4 input signals DEFINE button The signal s selected in the ASSIGN field If you ve selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field you can use the ASSIGN field to select multiple sources The following table shows the monitor sources you can select in the ASSIGN field NOTE You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field If you select eight monitor sources no further selections will be possible Please turn off the buttons for unneeded sources 5 To specify a port as the output destination for monitor signals L C R press one of the output select buttons L R C in the meter field to open the OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window and choose from the follow ing monitor signal output destinations multiple selections are allowed Monitor Cue CO 2TR OUTL R 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack L R SLOT 1 3 Output channels 1 16 of an card installed in slots 1 3 When you ve selected an output port press the CLOSE button to close the popup window In the same way specify the output ports for MONI TOR OUT L R and C M7CL Owners Manual 143 Using the Monitor function 144 a gt f desired you can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and R and monitor through two speakers f you have not specified an output
134. passing through the gate and according to the open closed status of the gate Red This will light if no signal is passing through Dynamics 1 2 gain reduction amount 30 dB or more Yellow This will light if the signal is passing through Dynamics 1 2 and the gate is even slightly closed gain reduction amount less than 30 dB Green This will light if the signal is passing through Dynamics 1 2 and the gate is open gain reduction amount 0 dB NOTE e The DYNAMICS 2 field of the OVERVIEW screen is available only if an input channel is selected If you want to control Dynamics from the OVERVIEW screen press the DYNAMICS 1 2 field to open the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 popup window 1 ch For details on the popup window gt p 108 M7CL Owner s Manual Operations in the Centralogic section 91 Operations in the Centralogic section Adjusting the send levels from a channel to all MIX buses MATRIX buses In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the TO MIX TO MATRIX field to send signals from a channel to the MIX buses and MATRIX buses This field includes the follow ing items 1 MIX TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to each MIX bus MATRIX bus To adjust the value press the knob for the desired bus to select it and operate multifunction encoders 1 8 If the send source is an input channel you ll need to
135. popup window USER LEVEL for GUEST tab USER LEVEL tab 3 Press the USER LEVEL tab to access the USER LEVEL page If you are logged in as the Administrator you can switch to the USER LEVEL for GUEST page and view or change the user level of the Guest account This page includes the following items 1 CH OPERATION Here you can specify for each channel the operations that will be permitted for input channels output chan nels and DCA groups The settings will apply to the currently selected channel The channel display field shows the settings for the selected channel Use the panel SEL keys to select the channel for which you want to make settings e HA Restricts operation of the HA Head Amp patched to that channel e PROCESSING PE Restricts operation of all signal pro cessing parameters for that channel except for fader ON key send level etc For the channel parameters included in PROCESSING refer to the appendix p 252 FADER ON Restricts operation of that channel s fader ON key send level etc SET BY SEL If this button is on a group of multi ple channels can be set to the same settings in a single operation To select channels turn this button on and then press the SEL keys of the desired channels on the panel If you change the setting of any chan nel in the group the change will affect all channels in the group Channels that have th
136. port for MONITOR OUT C selecting the MONO C button or LCR button as the monitor source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be distributed to MONITOR OUT L R 6 To enable monitoring press the OUTPUT button to turn it on The monitor source you selected in step 4 will be sent to the output destination you specified in step 5 e The PHONES OUT jack will always output the monitor signal regardless of whether the OUTPUT button is on or off M7CL Owners Manual 7 To adjust the monitor level use the MONI TOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE MEMORY MONITOR section of the top panel If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON you can use both the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor level when moni toring through headphones The MONITOR LEVEL knob will apply to the PHONES OUT jack as well Make settings for Dimmer Delay and Mon aural as desired Monitor on off operations selection of the monitor source and dimmer orvoff operations can also be assigned to user defined keys gt 200 Using the Cue function Using the Cue function This section explains how to use the M7CLs Cue function About cue groups The M7CL s cue signals can be categorized into the fol lowing four groups 1 INPUT CUE group The cue signals of input channels make up this group To enable Cue for this group press the CUE key of any INPUT channel or ST IN channel to turn Cue on
137. read only presets For details on how to access the ATT HPF EQ popup window refer to Using EQ p 105 Dynamics library Use the Dynamics Library to store recall dynamics set tings All of the M7CL s dynamics processors use this dynamics library However the available types will differ between an input channel s Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2 and an output channel s Dynamics 1 Types that cannot be selected cannot be recalled To recall an item from the dynamics library press the LIBRARY tool button in the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window Library button For details on using the library refer to Using libraries gt p 31 wm gt 199 items can be recalled from the library 41 of these are read only presets For details on how to access the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup win dow refer to Using dynamics p 108 M7CL Owner s Manual EQ and Dynamics Co 112 1 M7CL Owners Manual Chapter 11 Grouping and linking This chapter explains the DCA Group and Mute Group functions that let you control the level or muting of multiple channels together the Channel Link function that links the parameters of multiple channels and the operations that let you copy or move parameters between channels About DCA Groups and Mute Groups The M7CL provides eight DCA groups and eight mute groups that let you control the level of multiple channels simultaneously DCA groups allow you to assign input c
138. s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz REV X HALL REU X ROOM REV X PLATE Newly developed two input two output reverb algorithm Delivers dense and rich reverberation smooth decay and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the origi nal sound Choose from three types depending on your location and needs REV X HALL REV X ROOM and REV X PLATE Reverb me LO FREQ 22 0 Hz 18 0 kHz point for LO RATIO set Reverb diffusion left right reverb 0 10 spread ROOM Gate closing speed THRU 22 0 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 1 00 kHz 18 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency 1 These values are for when the effect type is REV X HALL and the ROOM SIZE 28 The range will differ depending on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting Effects Parameters M7CL Owner s Manual v 9 C Q Q lt 239 Effects and tempo synchronization Effects and tempo synchronization 240 Some of the M7CLs effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo There are two such types of effect delay type effects and modulation type effects For delay type effects the delay time will change according to the tempo For modulation type effects the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo Parameters related to tempo synchronization The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization 1 SYNC 2 3
139. screen 2 INPUT field Here you can select one of the following positions from which input channels will be cued PFL Pre Fader Listen button The pre fader signal will be output AFL After Fader Listen button The post fader signal will be output POST PAN button re The post pan signal will be output PFLTRIM knob If PFL is selected you can adjust the output level of the cue signal in a range of 20 dB 10 dB You can operate this knob using multifunc tion encoder 3 Be aware that if you turn the POST PAN button on you will be unable to monitor the signal sent to the MONO bus from an input channel that is set to LCR mode 3 DCA field Here you can select the position from which Cue will be output from DCA groups and specify the output level PRE PAN button The pre pan signal will be output e POST PAN button P The post pan signal will be output DCA TRIM knob Adjusts the level of cue output from a DCA group in a range of 20 dB 10 dB You can operate this knob using multifunction encoder 4 DCA UNITY button ETE If this button is on pressing the CUE key of a DCA group will always monitor the corresponding DCA group at unity gain the same level at when the fader in the Centr alogic section is at O dB 4 OUTPUT field Here you can select one of the following choices as the position from which output channels will be cued PFL Pre Fader Listen
140. screw A which you removed in step 1 fasten the cable cover included with the MBM7CL This completes the installation procedure Shown as completed N CAUTION Before connecting the MBM7CL meter bridge to the M7CL you must turn off the power switches of the M7CL and the PW800W Failure to observe this will cause malfunctions or electric shock 272 M7CL Owners Manual MIDI Implementation Chart YAMAHA Digital Mixing Console Model Date Plur EE M7CL MIDI Implementation Chart Version Function Default Changed Basic Channel Default Messages Altered Note Number True voice Note ON Note OFF Velocity Ch s 0 32 6 38 98 99 1 31 33 98 Control 102 119 Change System Common Song Pos Song Sel Tune System Clock Real Time Commands All Sound Off Reset All Cntrls Local ON OFF 11 Notes OFF Active Sense Reset SUL Mode 1 Mode 3 OMNI ON OMNI OFF POLY POLY MT 5 2 X X X kkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk o 0 127 Mode 2 Mode 4 OMNI ON MONO OMNI OFF MONO Remarks Memorized Memorized Effect Control Bank Select Data Entry NRPN LSB MSB Assignable Cntrl Assignable Appendices i Bulk Dump Request Parameter Change Request and MMC Yes No M7CL Owners Manual O X 273 Index Symbols DCA 21 DYNAMICS 1 encoder 17 DYNAMICS 2 e
141. shown in the touch screen The cur rently mounted modules can be seen at a glance and you can switch modules and change input output patching in an intuitive manner M7CL Owners Manual 9 An overview of the M7CL 10 Cascade connections in the digital domain A second M7CL unit or a digital mixer such as the Yamaha PMSD connected via a digital I O card installed in a slot can be cascade connected in the digital domain Of the MIX buses MATRIX buses STEREO MONO buses and CUE bus up to twenty four buses can be cas caded individually Security functions that can be specified at user level or system level The available functionality can be restricted for users other than the administrator with three levels of security Administrator Guest and User Passwords can be fied for the administrator and users preventing important settings from being changed accidentally Information specific to each user user level system set tings and user defined key settings can be stored on a USB storage device as a user authentication key By loading your own user authentication key from a USB storage device you can instantly set up the ideal operating environment for yourself M7CL Owner s Manual E 1 0 card expansion The rear panel provides three slots in which separately sold mini YGDAI cards can be installed AD cards DA cards or digital I O cards can be installed in these slots to add inputs
142. signal delay at the cascade slave will increase according to the number of units from the cascade master M7CL Owners Manual Operations on the cascade slave M7CL T In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen press the CAS CADE button to open the CASCADE popup window The CASCADE popup window contains the following items D Port select popup buttons These buttons access a popup window where you can select the input output port for each bus 2 CASCADE IN PATCH CASCADE OUT PATCH tabs These switch between the CASCADE IN PATCH page and the CASCADE OUT PATCH page The CASCADE popup window is divided into two pages a CASCADE IN PATCH page where you can select the input ports for the cascade connection and a CASCADE OUT PATCH page where you can select the output ports Use the tabs located in the lower left of the screen to switch between these pages 3 Press the CASCADE OUT PATCH tab to access the CASCADE OUT PATCH page In this screen you can select the slot and output port that will output each bus 4 Press the port select popup button for the bus whose port you want to assign The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear This popup window contains the following items 1 Slot select tabs These tabs select slots 1 3 2 Port select buttons These buttons select the port of the
143. stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus NO oh QOD WARNING 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer 12 Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus e When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped ju TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN
144. the correct positions 1 all the way down 2 20 dB 8 0 dB 4 10 dB all the way up 7 When you ve adjusted the fader position press the NEXT button The process will proceed to the next fader position 8 Repeat steps 6 7 to adjust the faders for positions 1 through 4 9 When calibration has been completed and the RESTART button has not appeared press the APPLY button The calibration settings will be saved in internal mem Ory If the RESTART button appears calibration has failed Press the RESTART button to execute calibration once again 1 Press the EXIT button The M7CL will start up in normal operating mode Alternatively you can continue by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button Adjusting the input output gain Calibration function Adjusting the input output gain Calibration function If necessary you can make fine adjustments to the input output gain 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY STORE key of the panel turn on the power After the opening screen the following startup menu screen will appear OUTPUT PORT TRIM Fine adjustment of the output ports Access the OUTPUT PORT TRIM window and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog output port in 0 01 dB steps E Am X i 2 In the MODE SELECT field select the item you want to adjust and press the button The corresponding set
145. the Undo operation Press the OK button if you want to execute the Undo After execut ing the Undo you can press the STORE UNDO button once again to Redo re execute the store operation NOTE e The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after overwrite storing You can also assign the same function as the STORE UNDO button to a user defined key gt p 200 M7CL Owner s Manual Scene memory NO 127 Using scene memories 128 Recalling a scene Here s how to recall a stored scene from scene memory You can recall a scene either by using the keys of the top panel SCENE MEMORY MONITOR section or by using the SCENE LIST window Using the keys of the SCENE MEMORY MONITOR section 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY AT Y keys to select the scene number that you want to recall The number of the currently selected scene is shown in the SCENE field of the function access area SCENE MEMORY t SCENE MEMORY A W keys SCENE field 2 Press the SCENE MEMORY RECALL key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall opera tion 3 To execute the Recall operation press the OK button The scene you selected in step 1 will be recalled If you decide to cancel the Recall operation press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button You have the option of making settings so that the Recall Confirmation dialog box does not appear in step 2 p 198 Using the SCENE LIST w
146. to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses a gt e If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus use the navigation keys to access the corre sponding MATRIX channel and press the appropriate CUE key in the Centralogic section 7 Use the navigation keys and the SEL keys of the Centralogic section to switch chan nels and adjust the send level from other channels to the MATRIX buses in the same Way M7CL Owners Manual Using the Centralogic section This method lets you use the multifunction encoders to simultaneously adjust the send levels from the eight chan nels selected in the Centralogic section to the desired MATRIX bus 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals and that your external device is connected to the corresponding output port For details on assigning an output port to a MATRIX bus refer to p 95 For details on connecting an exter nal device refer to p 39 2 Use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the chan nel MIX channels 1 8 9 16 or STEREO MONO channels that you want to control In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX bus 1 TO MATRIX field This field specifies the send level of the signal sent from the MIX and STEREO MONO channels to the MATRIX bus 2 TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob This adjusts the s
147. use multifunction encod ers 6 7 to adjust the Q and FREQUENCY cutoff fre quency center frequency 9 KEY IN SOURCE button This displays the KEY IN SOURCE SELECT popup window where you can select the key in signal DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window 8 ch This window shows the settings for eight channels including the currently selected channel You can switch between eight channel groups such as 1 8 and 9 16 Compared to the one channel display fewer parameters can be controlled This window 1 conve nient when you want to adjust the threshold or certain other parameters while watching the adjacent channels to the left and the right 1 Channel select button This indicates the channel number the 1con selected for that channel and the channel name You can press these buttons to select a channel or a range of chan nels 2 GR meter This indicates the amount of gain reduction If you are using GATE as the dynamics type an indicator showing the open closed state of the gate is shown Gate status E EN indication red yellow green Openiclosed close open open status E P tion amount more Using dynamics 3 Dynamics graph This mini graph displays the approximate response of the dynamics processor 4 THRESHOLD knob This specifies the threshold at which the dynamics processor will begin operating You can use multifunc tion encoders 1 8 to control this 5 DYNAMICS ON OFF butt
148. user defined keys 253 MIDI Formal 2n cina ctae uiu cue 255 Warning Error Messages 262 Troubleshooting esse 264 General Specifications 265 Input output characteristics 266 Electrical characteristics 268 Olh r FUN HONS eH 269 Pin 4 270 Pli et 271 Installing the MBM7CL meter bridge option 272 MIDI Implementation Chart 273 Iis E 274 Block DIaGrali Renee End of Manual Level Diagram End of Manual e The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner s manual are for instructional purposes only and may be different from the ones on your device Centralogic is trademark of Yamaha Corporation e The company names and product names in this Owner s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies M7CL Owners Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Introduction ea Thank you Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha M7CL digital mixing console In order to take full advan tage of the M7CLs superior functionality and en
149. which the Fade function is enabled gt p 139 the FOCUS and FADING indications will respectively be lit 2 Time stamp This indicates the date and time at which the scene was last stored as the year month date and hours min utes seconds 3 Field select tabs These tabs switch the fields that are shown in the right half of the SCENE LIST window For details on the Focus field refer to Using the Focus function gt p 135 and on the Fade Time field refer to Using the Fade function p 139 3 To select a scene number turn any of the multifunction encoders on the top panel The line highlighted in blue in the scene list indicates the scene currently selected for operations m gt You can also use the SCENE MEMORY AJ TW keys to select scene numbers the list itself will move up down can be specified in the PREFERENCE screen SCENE UP DOWN field 4 To sort the list press one of the column headers NO TITLE COMMENT TIME STAMP at the top of the scene list and COMMENT field The list will be sorted as follows according to the location you pressed 0 3 4 1 NO Sorted in order of scene number 2 TITLE Sorted in numeric alphabetical order of title 3 COMMENT Sorted in numeric alphabetical order of comment 4 TIME STAMP Sorted in order of date of creation wr gt e By pressing the same location again you can cha
150. will light If the corresponding channel is stereo a ST IN channel a MIX MATRIX channel set to stereo or the STEREO channel level meters for two channels are displayed 4 DYNAMICS ON OFF button Turns the dynamics on off 5 KEY IN CUE button only for GATE and DUCKING This button cue monitors the currently selected key in signal Even if the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE the mode in which all channels whose CUE key is on are mixed for monitoring turning on the KEY IN CUE button will cause only the signal of the corresponding channel to be monitored The CUE keys that had been turned on previously will be forcibly defeated 6 THRESHOLD knob This specifies the threshold at which the dynamics will begin operating You can use multifunction encoder 1 to control this 7 Other parameters The other parameters of the dynamics processor are shown here The parameters displayed will depend on the dynamics type that 1s selected You can use multi function encoders to adjust these parameters For details on the parameters refer to the supplementary material at the end of this manual gt p 225 KEY IN FILTER button only for GATE and DUCKING This field lets you apply a filter to the key in signal As the filter to use choose either a HPF high pass filter BPF band pass filter or LPF low pass filter If all of these buttons are off no filter will be applied If a filter is enabled you can
151. with latch are balanced 1 GND 2 HOT 3 COLD In these specifications 0 dBu 0 775 Vrms All input AD converters are 24bit linear 128 times oversampling 448V DC phantom power is supplied to INPUT 1 48 1 32 ST IN 1L 4R and TALKBACK XLR type connectors via each individual software con trolled switches Analog Output Characteristics Actual Source For Use With Output Level Output Terminals Impedance Normal GAIN SW Nomina Max Before Clip Before Clip Connector 600 OL 24 dB default 4 dBu 1 23 V 24 dBu 12 28 V XLR 3 32 type ines 18 dB 2 dBu 616 mV 18 dBu 6 16 V Balanced 40 2 Phones 150 mw Unbalanced 1 XLR 3 32 type connectors are balanced 1 GND 2 HOT 3 COLD 2 PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced Tip LEFT Ring RIGHT Sleeve GND 3 There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum output level 4 The position of the level control is 10 dB lowered from Max OMNI OUT 1 16 In these specifications 0 dBu 0 775 Vrms All output DA converters are 24 bit 128 times oversampling Digital Output Characteristics Terminal Format Connector Z AES EBU 2TR OUT DIGITAL AES EBU 1 24 bit RS422 XLR 3 32 type Balanced Professional Use 1 The channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL is described on page 267 2 XLR 3 32 type connectors are balanced 12GND 2 HOT 3 COLD M7CL Owners Manual Channel Status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL Block Format
152. 0 Hv Ov o N 00 CN CN CN CN 017 029 244 M7CL Manual Parameters that can be assigned to control changes Parameters that can be assigned to control changes Parametra CH 1 CH 48 STINTL STINAR MIX 1 MIX 16 MATRIX 1 8 STE REO L MONO C CH 1 CH 48 STINTL STINAR MIX 1 MIX 16 MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STEREO L MONO C CH 1 CH 48 pu STINIL STINAR MIX 1 MIX 16 MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STEREO L MONO C CH 1 CH 48 PHASE INPUT STINTL STINAR INPUT CH 1 CH 48 INSERT MIX 1 16 OUTPUT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STEREO L MONO C DIRECT OUT CH 1 CH 48 CH 1 CH 48 PAN BALANCE INPUT 00 1 16 BALANCE OUTPUT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STEREO L STEREO R CH 1 CH 48 CH 1 CH 48 ON CH 1 CH 48 LCR 2 STINIL STINAR MIX 1 MIX 16 FADER H OUTPUT FADER L OUTPUT OUTPUT S MIX 1 ON MIX16 N MATRIX 1 ON MATRIX 8 ON MIX 1 PRE POST MIX 16 PRE POST MATRIX 1 PRE POST MATRIX 8 PRE POST MIX 1 LEVEL H MIX 16 LEVEL H CH 1 CH 48 MIX 1 LEVEL L STINTL STINAR MIX 16 LEVEL L MATRIX 1 LEVEL MATRIX 8 LEVEL H MATRIX 1 LEVEL MATRIX 8 LEVEL L MIX 1 2 PAN MIX 15 16 PAN MATRIX1 2 PAN MATRIX7 8 PAN TO STEREO
153. 0 ASCII CODE Onnnnnnn 01100010 ASCII CODE Onnnnnnn 01110100 t ASCII CODE Onnnnnnn MODULE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Onnnnnnn Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE ET ASCII CODE 9 mm 4 EOX 11110111 Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE 259 M7CL Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 260 4 5 2 Format Parameter request Receive The Parameter change will be sent with Device number Rx CH immediately the data is received STATUS ID No SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n 20 15 Device number MIDI Channel 11110000 FO System exclusive message 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA DATA Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low Occccccc ch channel High Occccccc cl channel Low EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME 00111110 00010001 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000101 01111000 01101001 01110011 01110100 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm 3E TR 00 T in in gn pn Digital mixer M7CL OTHER DATA ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE 4 6 2 Function Name Function Number tx rx ColUnStr Setup 0 cx User Defined Key 0 tx Program Change
154. 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz REV CHORUS One input two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel wk Reverb and chorus balance 0 RENO all reverb 100 all chorus THRU 21 2 Hz LN 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 10096 Pitch modulation depth WAVE Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTE C to determine FREQ 1 RUIT Fe 4 1 ded d MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time M7CL Owners Manual REV CHORUS One input two output reverb and chorus effects in series Initial delay before reverb begins High frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb densi Reverb and chorused reverb bal REV BAL 0 10096 ance 0 all chorused reverb 100 all reverb THRU 21 2 Hz LN 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Low pass filter cutoff frequency 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed Amplitude modulation depth Pitch modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Tempo parameter sync on off qs HP IIT ddd ode d 4 d d 8 55 REV FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel Description Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High frequency reverb tim
155. 00000000 00 OTHER DATA 11110000 FO System exclusive message 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME 01001100 01101001 01100010 TIIITIT Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm din pr ff ff ff ff EE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE DATA Ommmmmmm mh number source start High Ommmmmmm ml number source start Low Ommmmmmm mh number source end High Ommmmmmm ml number source end Low Ommmmmmm mh number destination start High Ommmmmmm ml number destination to start Low EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 4 3 2 Function Name FUNCTION NAME Source Source Destination start end start Copy Valid Paste LibPst Valid Clear LibClr Valid Cut LibCut Valid Insert LibIns Valid Edit Undo LibEdtUd 4 3 3 Module MODULE NAME function SCENE LIB SCENE Copy Paste Clear Cut Insert EditUndo INPUT EQ LIB INEQ Only Copy OUTPUT EQ LIB OUTEO Only Copy Dynamics LIB DYNA Only Copy GEQ LIB GEQ Only Copy EFFECT LIB EFFECT Only Copy 4 4 Function call library attribute
156. 1 1 VAR STEREO 1 eS ee 2 ee le I ON S LEVEL 1 1 3 7 To MATRIX PRE PRE FADER POST oO 1 VARI LEVEL MATRIX24 8 Er lam opum m 1 1 1 To MATRIX ON LEVEL PRE FADER POST ON 0 0 VARI PANOH i a pl cl en ee ee ee PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL POST PAN L as o QN CUEL TTHT TT 1 B ST IN channels 1 4 These channels are used to process stereo signals When the M7CL is in the default state the signals from EFFECT RETURN 1 4 L R are assigned to these channels TE ATRIX CUE 22 78 LR STCH 11 48 BAL PRE EQ EQ OUT DYNA1OUT DYNA 20UT PRE FADER POSTON METER ON PRE HPF 1 1 Self PRE EQ 1 3 15 H Self POSTEQ OMX POSTON to i MIX13 16 OUT FIXED ON 2 4 16 1 E STCH1L 4RPOSTEQ kb es m Tomix POSTPAN L t 1 1 SON EVEL INPUT PATCH MATRIX1 8 7 MATRIX2 A 8 1 To MATRIX _ 1 XLEVEL yap PREEQ PRE FADER POST ON 000 SEI STEREO 1 v D m m D m x m D 5 o s Ju 1 4 1 Io gt gt m m lt lt gm 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 J 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T M7CL Owner s Manual 5
157. 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX bus to which you want to send signals and that your monitor system or external effect etc is connected to the cor responding output port For details on assigning an output port to a MIX bus refer to p 95 For details on connecting an external device refer to p 39 2 In the function access area press the SENDS ON FADER button The M7CL will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode The most recently selected group of MIX buses will be assigned to the Centralogic section The faders of the INPUT section and ST IN section will move to the send level values of each channel for the currently selected MIX bus In SENDS ON FADER mode the function access area in the display will show buttons for selecting the send destination MIX bus 1 MIX bus selection buttons These buttons select the send destination MIX bus The buttons will be joined if two MIX buses are set to stereo 3 Use the MIX bus selection buttons in the function access area to select the send destination MIX bus You can also select a MIX bus by using the navigation keys and the SEL keys of the Centralogic section e If you once again press the MIX button selection button that is currently selected cue monitoring will be turned on for the corresponding MIX channel This method is convenient when you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX bus 4 Use the faders of the top panel
158. 109 Using dynamics 110 4 To select a key in signal proceed as fol lows 1 Inthe DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window 1 ch press the KEY IN SOURCE button to access the KEY IN SOURCE SELECT popup window 2 Select one of the following as the key in sig nal For an input channel The pre EQ attenuator signal of the cur rently selected input channel SELF POST EQ The post EQ signal of the currently selected input channel CH 1 48 POST EQ 1L 1R 4L 4R POST EQ MIX OUT 13 16 The post ON signal of the corresponding MIX channel 1 The selectable signals are limited to the group to which that channel belongs from the seven groups CH 1 8 CH 9 16 CH 17 24 CH 25 32 CH 33 40 41 48 and 1L 1R 4 L 4 R SELF PRE EQ The post EQ signal of the corresponding input channel 1 For an output channel SELF PRE EQ The pre EQ attenuator signal of the cur rently selected output channel The post EQ signal of the currently SUPPE selected output channel MIX 1 16 POST EQ MTRX 1 8 POST EQ ST L R MONO C POST EQ MIX OUT 13 16 The post ON signal of the corresponding MIX channel 2 The selectable signals are limited to the group to which that channel belongs from the four groups MIX 1 8 MIX 9 16 MATRIX 1 8 and ST MONO 3 Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window The post EQ signal of the corresponding output channel 2 M7CL Owners Manual
159. 11 F7 rx tx M7CL native parameter request PARAMETER REQUEST 4 PARAMETER CHANGE details 4 1 Current Scene Setup Backup User Setup 4 1 1 Format Parameter change Receive Data will be received when Parameter change Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when Parameter change ECHO is on The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received Transmission Data will be transmitted with the Device Number in Tx CH when Parameter change Tx is on and the parameter is not registered on the control change assign table STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID Nox 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010001 11 Category DATA ee Element no ee Element 01111111 ii Index no 01111111 ii Index no Channel Channel Oddddddd data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive MIDI Data Format 4 1 2 Format Parameter request Receive Data will be received when Parameter change Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when Parameter change ECHO is on The corresponding parameter will be changed via ParameterChange immediately the dat
160. 110 n ASCII CODE 01010011 5 ASCII CODE 01110100 t ASCII CODE 01110010 ASCII CODE MODULE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE M7CL Owner s Manual STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n nz0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010001 11 M7CL DATA 00000000 00 OTHER DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION 01001101 M NAME 01101111 01100100 01000110 F 01111000 01010100 01110010 01100111 MODULE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE DATA ee Effect number 0 5 3 RACK8 Oppppppp pp Release 0 Press 1 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 4 7 2 Module Name MODULE NAME Freeze Play button Freeze Record button FRZPLAY ERZREC channel O RACK5 2 RACK7 O RACK5 2 RACK7 This will not work when the Effect Type is different 4 8 Function call Channe 4 8 1 Receive Pair ON OFF Trigger Format Parameter change Data will be received when Parameter change Rx is on and the Device numb
161. 12 tx rx User Setup Memory amp Request a 1 199 512 tx rx Dynamics library amp Request 1 199 512 tx rx Input Equalizer library amp Request q 1 199 768 tx rx Output Equalizer library amp Request F 1 199 512 527 tx rx GEQ Equalizer library amp Request 1 199 512 515 tx rx Effect library amp Request T 512 tx rx Program change table amp Request 512 tx rx Control change table amp Request 0 300 Scene number 512 Current Data without Recall Safe 768 Current Data with Recall Safe 5 512 Current Data q 1 199 Library number 512 559 Input 1 48 560 567 STIN 1L 4R 768 783 MIX 1 16 1024 1031 MATRIX 1 8 1280 1282 STEREO L RMONO C F 1 199 Library number 512 527 RACK 1A 8B 1 199 Library number 512 515 RACK 5 8 1 199 Library number 512 559 51 Input 1 48 560 567 STIN 1L 4R 768 783 MIX 1 16 1024 1031 MATRIX 1 8 1280 1282 STEREO 1536 1583 Dynamics2 Input 1 48 1584 1591 STIN 1L 4R Data is lost when you write to the preset library The unique header Model ID identifies whether the device is a M7CL To calculate the check sum add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE COUNT LOW and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM take the binary complement and set bit 7 to 0 CHECK SUM sum amp Ox7F Bulk Dumps can be received at any time and can be transmitted at any time when a Bulk
162. 138 dB to 10 dB Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB Oscillator 5 is J Ratio 1 1 to 1 Attack 0 msec to 120 msec Hold 0 02 msec to 1 96 sec 4 Output Port Decay 5 msec to 42 3 sec Release Function Parameter Releace Smsec to 42 3 sec Out Port Delay 0 msec to 600 msec Range 70 dB to 0 dB Out Port Phase Normal Reverse Gain 18 dB to O dB 0 dB to 18 dB Attenuator 96 to 24 dB Knee Hard to 5 soft Key In d Out 13 16 J Processor Key In Filter HPF LPF BPF Function Parameter Type Comp De Esser Compander H GEQ 31 bands x 4 8 systems Compander 5 Effects Stereo In Stereo Out multi effector x 4 systems Threshold 54 dB to 0 1 1 to ee 1 Attack 0 msec to 120 msec Release 5 msec to 42 3 sec Gain 18 dB to O dB 0 dB to 18 dB Knee Hard to 5 soft Key In Self Pre EQ Self Post EQ Mix Out 13 16 Ch1 STIN4R 8ch block Fader Level 1024 steps 138 dB to 10 dB On On Off DCA Group 8 Groups Mute Group 8 Groups 9 16 sends e Fix Variable can be set each two mixes Mix Send Mix Send Point Pre EQ Pre Fader Post On Level 1024 steps 138 dB to 10 dB 8 Sends Matrix Send Matrix Send Point Pre EQ Pre Fader Post On Level 1024 steps 138 dB to 10 dB LCR Pan CSR 096 to 10096 M7CL Owner s Manual 269 Pin Assignment Pin Assignment fe 2 DC POWER INPUT CAUTION CAUTION GND DETECT B GND DETECT GND GND Frame GND
163. 16 0 kHz THRU E M BAND DYNA Two input two output 3 band dynamics processor with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band Parameter Description LOW GAIN Low band level MID GAIN Mid band level HI GAIN High band level For positive values the thresh old of the high band is low ered and the threshold of the PRESENCE 10 to 10 low band is increased For negative values the opposite will occur When set to O all three bands are affected the same L M XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low mid crossover frequency M H XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Mid high crossover frequency SLOPE 6 dB 12 dB Filter slope CEILING 6 0 dB to 0 0 dB OFF Le the maximum output CMP THRE Compressor threshold CMP RAT Compressor ratio CMP ATK Compressor attack CMP REL Compressor release time CMP KNEE Compressor knee CMP BYP Compressor bypass LOOKUP Lookup delay EXP THRE Expander threshold EXP RAT Expander ratio EXP REL Expander release time EXP BYP Expander bypass LIM THRE Limiter threshold LIM ATK Limiter attack LIM REL Limiter release time LIM KNEE Limiter knee 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz Low pass filter cutoff frequency M BAND COMP Two input two output 3 band compressor with individ ual solo and gain reduction metering for each band MID GAIN LM XOVR XOVR CEILING 6 0 dB to 0 0 dB OFF Vern the maximum output LOW THRE MID THRE 1 6 0 ms 46 0
164. 2361 ete O LO STEREO lk TO ST 0864 OB6B LR to MATRIX 5 6 2362 2377 MATRIX7 8 2378 238 SET EUR SITE CA MIX1 8 to STEREO eae FINPUT OBCC 0 03 PAN MIX TO ST 238E 2395 MIX MATRIX LR 0C2C 0C49 BALANCE MIX MATRIX STEREO LR 2396 2383 SEND 0 81 MIX10 SEND OCE1 MIX11 SEND ODOA 0D41 MIX12 SEND OD6A ODAI MIX13 SEND ODCA OEO01 Input to Mix9 16 MIX14 SEND OE2A OE61 5 E POST MIX15 SEND OE8A OECI MIX16 SEND OEEA OF21 INPUT TO MATRIX1 OF4A OF81 INPUT TO MATRIX2 OFE1 INPUT TO MATRIX3 100A 1041 INPUT TO MATRIX4 106A 10A1 o lt M7CL Owners Manual 249 NRPN parameter assignments Parameter From To Parameter From To HEX HEX HEX HEX 292A 29 Input to Mixi 8 MIX6 SEND 2 Matrix5 8 LEVEL 8 SEND 282 NPUTTOMATRXS 78A 288 271C 2BFO mama 2725 MONO C to Matrix MATRIX4 SEND LEVEL 18 71274 MATRIX8 SEND 2 14 277 Input to Mix1 8 Matrix5 8 ON PARAM30 27 27AF INPUT TO MATRIX7 2 2EE7 1 2784 27 7 INPUT TO MATRIX8 2EFO 22 7 ae en 27 SSeS 2FC3 3003 3043 5 304C 3083 ne ee ete Input to MIX1 8 MIX6 SEND 308C 30C3 GAIN9 27FA 27 MATRIX5 8 PRE GAIN10 2800 2805 POST MIX7 SEND 30CC 3103 GAIN11 2806 280B MIX8 SEND 310C 3143 INPUT
165. 343 59m s The delay time is shown as a dis tance in meters calculated as the speed of sound 343 59 m s at an air temperature of 20 C 68 F multiplied by the delay time sec onds FEET 1127 26ft s The delay time is shown as a dis tance in feet calculated as the speed of sound 1127 26 feet s at an air temperature of 20 C 68 F multiplied by the delay time sec onds SAMPLE The delay time is shown as a num ber of samples If you change the sampling frequency at which the M7CL operates the number of sam ples will change accordingly MSEC The delay time is shown in units of milliseconds If this button is on the same value is displayed above and below the delay time knob 5 3 Output port This indicates the type and number of the output port to which the channel is assigned 4 Channel select popup button This button lets you select the channel that is assigned to the output port The name of the currently selected channel is displayed 5 Delay time knob This knob sets the delay time of the output port Press this knob to select it and use multifunction encoders 1 8 to adjust the settings The millisecond value is shown above the knob and the delay time value in the units selected the DELAY SCALE field 2 is shown below the knob 6 DELAY button Switches the output port delay on off 7 Phase button Switches the phase of the si
166. 4 4 4 4 d dss Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Low pass filter cutoff frequency Effects Parameters DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in series Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY HI 101 10 Delay high frequency feedback ratio Delay and delayed reverb balance DLY BAL 0 100 0 all delayed reverb 100 all delay THRU 21 2 Hz LN 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz wk NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTER to determine right channel DELAY R Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOME EE to determine FB DLY GE ROI Be ddd 4 4 4 d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting DIST DELAY One input two output distortion and delay effects in series Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 to determine DELAY MOD NOT Used in conjunction with TEMPO E to determine FREQ Feedback gain plus values for 7 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100906 Modulation depth Distortion and delay balance 096 DLY BAL 0 100 all distortion 100 all delayed distortion 1
167. 5 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob Adjusts the level of the signal that is directly output INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window 8ch 1 Channel number Icon This shows the channel number and the icon that is selected for that channel You can press this field to change the selected channel 2 Channel name This indicates the name assigned to that channel 3 DIRECT OUT ON OFF button This button switches the direct output on off If this button is off the direct output for that channel will be disabled The currently selected direct output position is shown above the button 4 DIRECT OUT popup button This indicates the output port used for direct output Press this button to open a popup window where you can select the output port 5 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob Adjusts the level of the signal that is directly output Access either the one channel or the eight channel INSERT DIRECT OUT popup win dow and press the DIRECT OUT popup but ton The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the output port used for direct output The window includes the following items 1 Output port select tabs These tabs select the output ports shown in the win dow Each tab corresponds to the following output ports OMNI OMNI OUT jacks 1 16 will be dis played e SLOT 1 SLOT 3 Output channels 1 16 of slots 1 3 will be displayed 2 Output port select buttons These buttons assign the
168. 5 If you want to copy dynamics settings to another channel or initialize the dynamics settings use the tool buttons of the popup window For details on how to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons p 31 Dynamics settings can be saved loaded at any time using the dedicated library gt 31 Presets suitable for a variety of instruments or situations are also provided e You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the dynamics settings gt p 81 Even when the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window is displayed you can use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL sec tion to control the dynamics Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall EQ and dynamics settings EQ library There is an INPUT EQ LIBRARY that lets you store recall EQ settings for input channels and an OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY that lets you store recall EQ settings for output channels To recall settings from a library press the LIBRARY tool button in the ATT HPF EQ popup window Library button For details on using the library refer to Using libraries gt p 31 m gt You can recall 199 different settings each from the input EQ library and from the output EQ library 40 of the input library items are read only presets and 3 of the output library items are
169. AND ovo P2 Ki n nn 8 DE ESSER i i INSERT PREEQ POSTEQ PREFADER gt 4 n MATRIX 1 8 l Keyin 1 Q PAN LINK RACKIN PATCH OO ee 2 E INSERT POINT storie Self POSTEQ 10 POSTON KON MT 318 OUTPUT BATOH MATRIX FADER INSERT OUT 51072 1 16 MIX13 16OUT FIXED LON 2 4 16 lt 8 PREEQ INSERT OUT SLOTS 1 16 STCH1L 4RPOSTEQ 1 22 2 4 UE To MIX POSTPAN L E SON et 8 PRE EQ EQOUT DYNAOUT PREFADER POST ON FIXED ON EE METER o 1 LEVEL ON _ N MATRIX OUT 1 8 ToMIX PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON pm osent eano LT 5 INSERT P VARI SDSS 7 eee fh M VORNE 4 101 9 EQ EXPAND To MONITOR SELECT PRE FADER EQ PRE FADER POST ON og EQ POSTEQ INSERT OUT MPRE FADER M INSERT OUT Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX13 16 OUT pressum M DI m Bean MATRIX1 8 POST EQ 1 To MATRIX PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON oh MR MATRIX 3 7 PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL vani MATRIX2 4 8 dH dE jV Ano B ux X ge EUM Co ems es VU PREEQ PREFADER POSTON 0 0 QN TUN RACK1 OUT STERE
170. ANNEL section use the MIX SEND LEVEL knobs to adjust the send levels to the MIX buses f you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MIX bus use the navigation keys to access the corresponding MIX channel and press the appropriate CUE key in the Central ogic section F You can use the top panel SEL keys to switch input channels and control the send level to all MIX buses in the same way Using the Centralogic section Here s how you can use the multifunction encoders of the Centralogic section to adjust the send level of the signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX bus 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX bus to which you want to send signals and that your monitor system or external effect etc is connected to the cor responding output port For details on assigning an output port to a MIX bus refer to p 95 For details on connecting an external device refer to p 39 2 Use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel you want to control In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the TO MIX TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the MIX MATRIX bus 1 TO MIX TO MATRIX field In this field you can switch the on off status and adjust the level of the signal sent from the input channel to the MIX buses MATRIX buses Use the TO MIX TO MATRIX buttons of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to switch the typ
171. Below the M7CLs front pad there is a PHONES OUT jack for monitoring and this jack always lets you monitor the signal that is selected as the monitoring source By assigning the MONITOR OUT L R C channels to the desired output jacks you can also monitor the same sig nal through external speakers You can select the following signals as the monitor source STEREO channel output signal MONO channel output signal STEREO MONO channel output signal ST IN channel 1 4 input signal A combination of up to eight MIX MATRIX STEREO or MONO channel output signals and ST IN channel input signals The Cue function lets you check an individual selected channel DCA group by temporarily moni toring it via MONITOR OUT or PHONES When you press the top panel CUE key the cue signal of the corresponding channel DCA group is sent as the monitor output from the selected output port e The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal Be aware that for this reason if you turn off the Monitor function the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speak ers However the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES OUT jack The following diagram shows the cue monitor signal flow Monitor Cue CO CUE LR CUE TRIM a 1 INPUT OUTPUT DCA T zm e CUEL l CUEL A PHONES OUT LR PHONES CUE R AL en
172. CENE LIST window between three different fields In this case press the tab to make the FADE TIME field appear 1 Channel display field The channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied are highlighted 2 FADE TIME knob This knob sets the fade time You can use the corre sponding multifunction encoder to adjust this 3 SET ALL button If you press this button the Fade effect will be applied to all faders of that scene 4 CLEAR ALL button If you press this button the Fade effect will be can 1 FADE TIME field celled for all faders of that scene In this field you can make settings for the Fade func tion The buttons in this field correspond to the scene 4 Press the SEL keys of the desired chan list shown in the left side of the SCENE LIST window nels or DCA groups to select the channels The CURRENT SETTING field lets you make Fade and DCA groups to which the Fade effect settings that will be used the next time you perform a will be applied multiple selections are Scene Store operation allowed The SEL keys of the selected channels and DCA groups will light and those channels and DCA groups e When you recall a scene the Fade settings of that scene will will be highlighted in the channel display field of the popup window You can cancel a selection by pressing a lit SEL key once again to make it go dark M7CL Owner s Manual Scene memory NO 139 Using the Fade function 5
173. CL Owners Manual Setting up to use the M7CL Setting up to use the M 7CL This section explains the setup required when starting up the M7CL for the first time We will also discuss basic operations for sending an input channel signal out from the STEREO bus so that you can check the connections Restoring the current scene to the default state Turn on the power of the M7CL and recall load the default setting scene scene number 000 NOTE e In the procedure described here you are asked to recall this default setting scene so that the remaining step in this chap ter can be performed appropriately In actual operation there is no need to recall the default setting scene each time 1 Turn on the power of the M7CL When you turn on the power of the M7CL you should first power on the M7CL and then power on your power amp and monitor system When turning the power off follow the opposite order e Ifa PW800W power supply is connected to the M7CL the power will turn on regardless of whether you first turn on the POWER switch of the M7CL or of the PW800W 2 Use the top panel SCENE MEMORY AY V keys to make scene number 000 appear in the SCENE field in the function access area of the display SCENE MEMORY PN SCENE MEMORY keys 5 SCENE MEMORY RECALL key Initial Data SCENE field 3 Press the top panel SCENE MEMORY RECALL key Scene number 000 will be loade
174. CSR knob to adjust the level differ ence between the signals sent from that channel to the STEREO L R bus and to the MONO C bus 10 In the TO STEREO MONO popup window use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO C bus Signal level Signal level Signal level Signal level If the CSR knob is set to 096 operating the TO ST PAN knob of an INPUT channel will change the level of the signals sent to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following diagram In this case the TO ST PAN knob operates as a conven tional PAN knob and no signal is sent to the MONO C bus MS Signal sent to the STEREO 1 bus ___ Signal sent to the STEREO R bus TO ST PAN knob Operating the TO ST BALANCE knob of a ST IN channel will change the level of the signals sent from the ST IN L R channels to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following diagram In this case the TO ST PAN knob operates as a conven tional BALANCE knob and no signal is sent to the MONO C bus Input channel operations Signal sent from the ST IN L bi channel to the STEREO L bus Signal sent from the ST IN R channel to the STEREO R bus ST BALANCE knob If the CSR knob is set to 100 operating the INPUT TO ST PAN knob will change the level of the signals sent to the STEREO L R bus and MONO
175. DCA group by pressing a SEL key in the Centralogic section Use the SEL keys of the INPUT section or ST IN section to select the channels you want to assign to the group multiple selec tions are allowed The SEL keys of the assigned channels will light and the corresponding channels will be highlighted in yellow in the channel display field of the window To cancel an assignment press a lit SEL key once again to make it go dark 114 ll M7CL Owners Manual 5 Assign channels to other DCA groups in the same way You may assign a single channel to more than one DCA group In this case the value will be the sum of the levels of all assigned DCA faders 6 When you finish making assignments press the CLOSE button to close the popup window and press the x symbol in the function access area CH JOB display You will return to the previous screen The DCA MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indi cates the DCA group s to which each channel is assigned Numbers that are lit yellow in the upper line of this field indicate the DCA groups to which that channel belongs DCA MUTE GROUP field e You can also access the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window by pressing the DCA MUTE GROUP field in the OVERVIEW screen Selecting the DCA groups to which a specific channel will belong 1 Press a SEL key to select the input chan nel for which you want to make assign ments 2 Press any one of t
176. E field of the MIDI SETUP page 3 List This list shows the event scene recall effect library recall assigned to each program number The list shows the following items CH BANK Indicates the MIDI channel 1 16 on which program changes are trans mitted received In Single mode if the BANK button is on this will be labeled BANK and the numerical value in this column will correspond to the bank number NO Indicates the program number 1 128 PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT Indicates the type number title of the event assigned to the program number for each MIDI channel bank number You can press an individual event to access the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup win dow where you can change the assignment for each program num ber 4 CLEAR ALL button Pressing this button will delete all event assignments in the list 5 INITIALIZE ALL button Pressing this button will restore all event assignments in the list to their default state 6 Scroll knob This knob scrolls the contents of the list You can use multifunction encoder 1 to control this Use the buttons of the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field to select the program change transmission reception mode You can select one of the following two program change transmission reception modes Multi mode when the MULTI button is on Program changes of all MIDI channels will be trans mitted and received The transmit receive channel sp
177. ENE STORE window you can use this button to switch between two text input boxes and in the PATCH NAME window you can use this to switch channels SHIFT LOCK button Switches between uppercase and lowercase alpha betical characters You can enter uppercase charac ters and symbols while this button is on and lowercase characters and numerals while this button is off ENTER button Finalizes the name you entered In the SCENE STORE window this has the same effect as pressing the STORE button 4 When you ve entered the name press the STORE button or the ENTER button The name you entered will be applied e This basic procedure also applies in screens where you enter names for channels or other library items When you enter a name for a channel your input will be reflected immediately without your having to press the ENTER button e By pressing inside the text entry box you can move the input position to the location you pressed If you select a region of characters you ve entered in the box and then enter a new character the newly entered character will overwrite the selected region Using the tool buttons Using the tool buttons In some popup windows the title bar at the top of the window contains tool buttons for additional functions You can use these buttons to access related libraries or copy parameters from one channel to another channel This section explains how to use the tool buttons About the tool
178. EO MONO MASTER section of the top panel make sure that the ON key of the STEREO channel MONO channel is turned on and raise the fader to an appro priate position 6 Press the MIX 1 8 key or MIX 9 16 key so that the MIX channels you want to control are recalled to the Centralogic section 7 Make sure that the ON key of that channel is on and use the fader in the Centralogic section to raise the master level of the MIX channel to an appropriate position M7CL Owners Manual The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 5 Channels for which mode is selected 8 In the TO STEREO MONO popup window use the STEREO MONO button to turn the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus on or off For a channel that is set to ST MONO mode the sig nals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on off individually In the TO STEREO MONO popup window press the TO ST PAN knob to select it and use multifunction encoders 1 8 to adjust the pan of the signal sent from the MIX channels to the STEREO bus Channels for which LCR mode is selected 8 Make sure that the LCR button is turned on in the TO STEREO MONO popup window Channels for which the LCR button is off will not send any signal to the STEREO bus or MONO bus In the TO STEREO MONO popup window press the CSR knob to select it
179. ETER SELECT field will be turned off Using the Recall Safe function MIX channel is selected Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAME TER SELECT field except for the ALL button to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe multiple selections are allowed In addition you can use the WITH MIX SEND button dis played in the lower left part of the field to enable Recall Safe for the on off status and send level of the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses If you want all parameters shown in the lower part of the field to be subject to Recall Safe turn on the ALL button this is the default setting These buttons correspond to the following parameters Corresponding parameters All parameters except for WITH MIX SEND a o oeer On off status and send level of signals sent from input channels to MIX buses If the ALL button is all buttons will be turned off except for the WITH MIX SEND button located in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field e You can switch the WITH MIX SEND button on off while the ALL button is left on CH ON WITH MIX SEND NOTE MATRIX channel is selected With the exception of the types of button that are dis played this is the same as for a MIX channel These buttons correspond to the following parameters Corresponding parameters ALL All parameters except for WITH MATRIX SEND EQ 22 EQ
180. FECT field 2 Mount an effect in rack 5 or rack 7 Effect types FREEZE and can be used only rack 5 or 7 Press the rack in which the effect you want to control is mounted The GEQ EFFECT popup window will appear 4 Press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window and select FREEZE If the FREEZE effect type is selected a PLAY but ton REC button and progress bar are shown in the special parameter field 1 PLAY button 2 REC button 3 Progress bar e As an alternative to switching the effect type you can also recall settings that use the FREEZE effect type from the effect library ton The signal being input to the effect will be recorded The progress bar shows the current recording location When a fixed time has elapsed the buttons will auto matically turn off m gt You can adjust the parameters in the window to make detailed settings for recording time the way in which recording will begin and the way in which the sample will play back For details on the parameters refer to the supplementary material at the end of this manual gt 238 6 To play back the recorded sample press the PLAY button NOTE Once you stop the sampled content will be erased Graphic EQ and effects A M7CL Owner s Manual 175 Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries 176 Using the graphic EQ and effect libra
181. Focus settings of that scene will be reflected in CURRENT SETTING M7CL Owners Manual 135 Using the Recall Safe function Using the Recall Safe function 136 Recall Safe is a function that excludes only specific parameters channels DCA groups from Recall operations This differs from the Focus settings p 135 made for individual scenes in that Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes 1 In the function access area press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB popup window RECALL SAFE button 2 Press the RECALL SAFE button to access the RECALL SAFE MODE popup window In this popup window you can make settings for the Recall Safe function The window contains the follow ing items 1 CH RECALL SAFE field The channels and DCA groups for which Recall Safe is turned on are highlighted in this field If you turn on the SET BY SEL button you can turn on Recall Safe for a channel or DCA group simply by pressing the SEL key of that channel or DCA group 2 CLEAR ALL button This clears all Recall Safe settings for the channels or DCA groups that are highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field 3 GLOBAL RECALL SAFE field Press the buttons in this field to select the global parameters 1 parameters that apply to the entire mix rather than to specific channels that will be set to Recall Safe M7CL Owners Manual 4 SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field Here you can switch Recall Safe on off fo
182. G H SHELF e qmm Pets sso ns 750 fq 80 090 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING HISHELF_ 5 6 PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 2 5 dB 265 Hz 4 50 kHz 0 18 PEAKING PEAKING 44 5 dB 42 0 dB 140 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90 kHz 5 60 kHz 4 5 2 G G Crunch 1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 5 dB 41 5 dB 2 5 dB 0 0 dB G Crunch 2 125 Hz 450 Hz 3 35 kHz 19 0 kHz L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 45 0 dB 0 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 355 Hz 950Hz 3 35 kHz 12 5 kHz 9 0 100 L SHELF H SHELF G 46 0 dB 44 0 dB 315 Hz 12 5 kHz PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 14 0 dB Stroke 1 3 0 106 Hz 5 30 kHz L SHELF PEAKING 3 5 dB 42 0 dB 00 Hz 3 55 kHz 90 45 5 5 PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Stroke 2 UJ L SHELF PEAKING PEAKIN PEAKING 0 5 dB 2 0 dB 224 Hz 6 70 kHz 0 125 L SHELF H SHELF 0 0 dB 4 0 dB 180 Hz 4 25 kHz PEAKING Arpeg 1 Arpeg 2 G PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 20dB 1 0dB 1 5 dB 3 0 dB 90 0Hz 850Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz 2 8 2 0 7 0 G 3 5 dB F 224 He ss _ PEAKING G 2048 F 265 Hz 018 _ PEAKING G 4 5 dB F 140 He 80 _ PEAKING G 2 5 dB F 125 He 80 LSHELF G 5 0 dB F 355 Hz fq ESHELF G 6 0 dB F 315 hz CEE PEAKING c 2 0 dB F 106
183. IEW screen use the popup button in the PATCH field When you press the popup button the PATCH NAME popup window will appear allowing you to select the out put port and specify the channel name and icon For details on the popup window gt p 98 e Making dynamics settings To edit the dynamics for the currently selected channel use the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the DYNAM ICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section NOTE e The DYNAMICS 2 field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and the DYNAMICS 2 encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section are valid only if an input channel is selected The DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen contains the fol lowing items 1 THRESHOLD knob This indicates the setting of the THRESHOLD param eter of a gate or compressor To edit the setting use the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section 2 OVER indicator This will light if the output level of the dynamics reaches the overload point 3 Level meter This displays a bar graph indication of the signal level being input to the dynamics on green off gray and the amount of gain reduction orange The THRESH OLD setting is shown numerically and as a vertical line 4 DYNAMICS ON OFF buttons These buttons turn dynamics processors 1 2 on off 5 Parameter knobs These knobs indicate the values of parame
184. IGN field The faders and ON keys of the Centralogic section will return to their previous function 8 If you want to copy the currently displayed 31 Band GEQ settings to the 31 Band GEQ of another rack or to initialize the settings you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the popup window For details on how to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons p 31 NOTE Only 31 Band GEQ settings that use less than fifteen bands can be copied to a Flex15GEQ GEQ settings can be saved loaded at any time using the ded icated library gt p 31 Using the Flex15GEQ You will use the Centralogic section s faders 1 8 and ON keys to control the Flex ISGEQ 1 As described in Virtual rack operations gt p 158 steps 1 3 mount a Flex15GEQ in a rack A rack in which a Flex I15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units A and B GEQ A 2 GEQ B 3 Rack graphic display area 4 Input output meters This indicates the level of the signals before and after the Flex I5GEQ The levels for two GEQ units and B are shown When you mount a Flex15GEQ two monaural 31 Band GEQ units are placed in a single rack However only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit 2 Press the rack in which you mounted the Flex15GEQ The GEQ EFFECT popup window for GEQ A or B will appear 0 EQ graph This indicates the approximate re
185. L These buttons let you turn on off options related to scene store recall operations You can select the fol lowing options e STORE CONFIRMATION e RECALL CONFIRMATION If these buttons are on a confirma tion message will appear when you perform a Store or Recall operation respectively 198 1 M7CL Owners Manual 2 PATCH These buttons let you turn on off options related to patch operations You can select the following options e PATCH CONFIRMATION If this button is on a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch e STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION If this button is on a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch item that is already patched 3 ERROR MESSAGE Here you can select whether a warning will be dis played when the following problems occur DIGITAL I O ERROR TET This appears if a sync error is detected in the digital input output MIDI I O ERROR e This appears if an error is detected in MIDI transmission reception 4 PANEL OPERATION These buttons let you turn on off options related to panel operations You can select the following options AUTO CHANNEL SELECT INPUT AUTO CHANNEL SELECT OUTPUT These specify whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate a channel s ON key or fader This can be turned on off separately for INPUT CH input channels and OUTPUT CH out put channels
186. LOT s ot em sio Slots 1 3 These slots allow separately sold mini YGDAI I O cards to be installed to expand the input output ports 17 AC IN connector Connect the included power cable to this connector 42 POWER switch This switch turns the internal power supply on off d3 DC POWER INPUT connector You can connect the separately sold PW800W power sup ply here as a backup external power supply If the PW800W is connected the M7CL will continue receiving power from the PW800W even if its own internal power supply shuts down due to a problem N CAUTION If you connect the PW800W you must be sure to first power off both the M7CL and the PW800W Then use the optional power supply cable PSL360 to make the connection Failure to observe this will cause malfunctions or electric shock m gt e If the PW800W is connected the M7CL will operate correctly whether its own internal power supply and the PW800W are both turned on or whether just one of these is turned on e If both power supplies and an abnormality is detected in one of the power supplies the M7CL will automatically switch to the other power supply If this occurs the touch screen will show a message to indicate this Grounding screw In order to ensure safe operation use this screw to connect the M7CL to an electrical ground Making a correct ground connection will effectively eliminate noise such as hum and interference
187. Left Center Right This sends the signal of the input channel as a three chan nel output the MONO C channel and the L R channels to the STEREO bus MONO bus MIX ON OFF MIX send on off This is an on off switch for the signal sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1 16 MIX LEVEL 1 16 MIX send level 1 16 This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1 16 As the position from which the signal 1s sent to the MIX bus you can choose from the following immediately before ATT pre fader or post fader MATRIX ON OFF MATRIX send on off This is an on off switch for the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1 8 MATRIX LEVEL 1 8 MATRIX send levels 1 8 Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1 8 As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus you can choose from the following immediately before ATT pre fader or post fader INSERT INPUT channels only You can patch the desired output input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor As the position of the insert out insert in point you can choose either immediately before ATT or pre fader DIRECT OUT INPUT channels only This can be patched to any output port and the input sig nal sent directly from that output port As the position of the direct output you can choose immediately before HPF immediately
188. MIX buses can be adjusted simultaneously Using the Centralogic section In this method you use the multifunction encoders of the Centralogic section to adjust the send levels to the MIX buses When using this method the signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously Using the faders of the top panel In this method you switch the M7CL to SENDS ON FADER mode and use the faders of the top panel to adjust the send levels to the MIX buses When using this method the signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously Using the SELECTED CHANNEL Section Here s how you can use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels of the signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX buses 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX bus to which you want to send signals and that your monitor system or external effect processor etc is connected to the corresponding output port For details on assigning an output port to a MIX bus refer to p 95 For details on connecting an external device refer to p 39 Use the SEL keys of the top panel to select the input channel that will send sig nals to the MIX buses Press any one of the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will show all the mix parameters of the c
189. MONO bus can be switched on off individually The panning of the signal sent from a monaural MIX channel to the STEREO bus L R is controlled by the TO ST PAN knob The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob The left right volume balance of the signal sent from a stereo MIX channel to the STEREO bus is controlled by the BALANCE knob The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob LCR mode This mode sends the signal of the MIX channel to a total of three buses STEREO L R and MONO C together The signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus will be switched on off as a whole The CSR Center Side Ratio knob specifies the level ratio between the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STE REO L R bus and to the MONO C bus The TO ST PAN knob BALANCE knob specifies the level of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus e If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones etc you should press the MONITOR button in the function access area to select LCR as the monitor source before you continue with the following procedure gt p 142 M7CL Owners Manual Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO bus 1 Use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the MIX channel you want to send to the STEREO MONO bus 172 STEREO MONO field 2 In the STE
190. Modulation source oscillator or input signal OSC FREQ 0 0 5000 0 Hz Oscillator frequency FM FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed FM DEPTH 0 100 Oscillator frequency modulation depth SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 ERE NOTE EE to determine FM FREQ Uo HF De d da d d on 232 M7CL Owners Manual MOD FILTER Two input two output modulation filter FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100906 Modulation depth Left channel modulation and 0 00 354 38 degrees right channel modulation phase difference TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type low pass high pass band pass OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset LEVEL 0 100 Output level SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with 1 NOTE TEMPO to determine FREQ qo ddd ode d 4 d dea DISTORTION One input two output distortion effect OVD2 CRUNCH OVD overdrive AMP SIMULATE One input two output guitar amp simulator AMP TYPE TYPE Guitar amp Guitar amp simulation type Guitar amp simulation type LESS DST2 OVD1 Distortion type DST distortion DOT tere OVD2 CRUNCH OVD tar 100 He 800 KHz EQ peaking type frequency _ 0000 EQ peaking type bandwidth _ 1 STK M1 STK M2 THRASH MIDBST CMB PG CMB VR CMB DX CMB TW MINI FLAT Effects Paramet
191. N Ot Oro 758 a STEREO channel MONO C channel Each of these channels process the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO C bus and send it to the corresponding output port or MATRIX bus If input channels are in LCR mode the STEREO L R channels and the MONO C channel can be used together as a set of three output channels When the M7CL is in the default state the fol lowing output ports are assigned OMNI OUT jacks 15 16 STEREO channel Does OUT DIGITAL jack A M7CL Owners Manual 69 Signal flow for output channels 70 M N MIX 570 MATRIX CUE 12 1516 LR C 1 2 78 LR STEREO L R MONO C To RACKIN PATCH T OUTPUT PACH stereo INSERT OUT LR ps Ue PRE FADER INSERT QUT INSERT INLR MONO 6 i zu E 4BAND PRE EQ POST EQ INSERT OUT 1 2 4 8 LEVEL PAN ON ja MATRIX channels 1 8 EQ OUT METER d D PRE EQ Keyin CUE ON i a a ai MATRIXI 3 7 CON PRE FADER POST ON 19 MATRIX 4 DYNAOUT FADER POSTON METER METER GR METER LEVEL BAL ON STEREO OUT INSERT P A L R MONO C To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT C COMPAND EXPAND PRE FADER INSERT OUT MPRE FADER Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX13 16 OUT ST L R MONO C POST EQ PRE
192. Number channel 1 1 300 5 41 199 T 4 199 2 3 4 42 199 1 2 3 4 8 1 199 6 58 199 7 1 300 0 41 199 0 4 199 0 42 199 0 1 199 0 58 199 0 0 300 5 1 199 1 1 199 2 3 4 1 199 1 2 3 4 8 0 199 6 1 199 7 0 5 0 1 0 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 8 0 6 0 7 0 0 0 0 3 512 MATRIX1 519 MATRIX8 4 1024 STEREO L 1026 MONO C 5 512 will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one 6 O RACK1 7 RACK8 If a is mounted in RACK 1 8 7 O RACKS 3 RACKS If an effect is mounted in RACK 5 8 8 1280 CH 1 1327 CH 48 1328 STIN 1L 1335 STIN 4R Dynamics2 M7CL Owners Manual tx rx EXJITX EX ro tX rx tx tx tx tX tX cx UX TX tX rx EXT EX EX LEX Ex LX Ux Ux tX tX 4 3 Function call library edit 4 3 1 Receive Data will be received when Parameter change Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when Parameter change ECHO is on The corresponding memory library will be changed immediately the data is received Format Parameter change Transmission Parameter Change Message will be sent in reply to Request If Parameter change ECHO is on the message will be sent as it is STATUS ID No SUB STATUS 0O0001nnnn 1n nz0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010001 11 M7 CL DATA
193. O PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL POST cisci D CUEL CUE TAIN RACK2 OUT PRE FADER PFL POST ONJAFL POST ato LON CUE R INPUT OUTPUT DCA A BR RACK3 OUT CH INSERT IN 1 32 48 To CHINSERT IN eee La KEYIN E A D 8 249 KEVIN CUE KEVIN STINILUR SELECT ea MIX INSERT IN 1 16 ee ee E RACK4 OUT 45 e A PME E IL ee m mro wm EUH A L B R STEREO INSERT IN L R MONO C STEREO INSERT IN EFFECT CUE AO ee EFFECT CUE nack amp 80UTL R SELECT I II MATRIX INSERT IN 1 8 e mem cm c m cmm m cmm m mm cm cms c c CUE ON 8 ST INT L R PHONES Y ST IN2 L R Lo PHONES L5 To PHONES OUT zl uiu ILE rg a ee eu ST IN3 L R 4 dd OUTPUTS ST IN4 L R E DELAY PHONES To PHONES OUT MAX 600ms 11 MIX CASCADE OUT 1 16 STEREO OUT L R UGLA STEREO CASCADE OUT L R MONO C PHONES OUT LR STEREO OUT MONO C O MATRIX CASCADE OUT 1 8 STEREO OUT L C R MONO E CUE CASCADE OUT L R ul MONITORL 4 MONITOR L Bl DEA 4 DIRECT OUT 1 32 48 E or 7m IESUS ST 2 L R 99 I METER OUTPUT PATCH MONI
194. ODE ASCII CODE ff ASCII CODE Offfffff ff ASCII CODE OFFfFffrf ff ASCII CODE MODULE NAME Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE DATA EOX Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm 11110111 mh ml ch cl F7 ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE number High number Low channel High channel Low End of exclusive 9 C Q Q lt M7CL Owner s Manual 257 MIDI Data Format 258 4 2 2 Function Name FUNCTION NAME Store Recall Unknown Factor Store Unknown Factor Recall Store Undo only Scene Recall Undo only Scene 4 2 3 Module Name MODULE NAME Scene Input EQ Output EQ Dynamics GEQ Effect Function 2 LibUnStr LibRcl LibUnRcl LibStrUd LibRclUd SCENE INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB SCENE INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB SCENE INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB SCENE INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB SCENE SCENE 1 0 CH1 47 CH48 48 ST IN 1L 55 ST IN 4R 2 256 MIX1 271 MIX16 LibStr DbR _ LibUnStr LibUnRcl LibStrUd LibRclUd SCENE INEQ OUTEQ DYNA GEQ EFFECT
195. P popup window for selecting the channel will appear Operations in this window are the same for both transmission Tx and reception Rx and include the following items MIDI NI M7CL Owners Manual 183 Basic MIDI settings Using program changes to recall scenes and library items D CH field 8 Turn transmission reception on or off for Select CH 1 CH 16 as the channel that will be used to each MIDI message transmit or receive MIDI messages 7 Select the channel e For details on using program changes refer to Using pro Use the 7 4 buttons to select an item Press the OK gram changes to recall scenes and library items below button to confirm the selected channel and close the For details on using control changes refer to Using control MIDI SETUP popup window changes to control parameters p 187 a gt e Alternatively you can select the channel by pressing the desired channel in the field or by turning one of the multifunc tion encoders e When transmitting or received parameter changes the chan nel number you specify here is used as the device number a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit Using program changes to recall scenes and library items The M7CL lets you assign a specific event scene recall or effect library recall to each program change number so that when this event is executed on the M7CL a program change message of the corresponding number wil
196. PORATION OF AMERICA mercury 5 4 2 2 M7CL Owner s Manual 9 6 1 Introduction 9 VIG yOU ge 9 An overview of the M7CL 9 Differences between the M7CL 48 and M7CL 32 11 The M7CL s channel structure 13 About the MIX bus types VARI FIXED 14 ADOUL wrd CIOCK 14 Conventions in this manual 14 About the firmware version 14 2 Panels and controls 15 REE 15 Rear 22 Under the front pad 24 3 Basic operation of the 20 Basic operations in the top panel touch screen 25 Pressing the touch screen 25 Multiple selection specifying a range 25 Special operations for keys 25 Encoder operations 25 Multifunction encoder operations 26 The on screen user interface 26 WAS rT 26 BUWONO MEER 26 Faders 27 LST WING RETE Keyboard window 27 6 c
197. Program Scene Change Change Program Scene Change Effect 002 20008 005 ee 008 009 002 003 004 005 _ 006 m 008 009 No Assign 020 021 022 Scene 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 No Assign ra No Assign 035 036 037 038 039 040 042 __ 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 _ 060 061 062 063 064 242 M7CL Owners Manual Scene Memory Effect Library to Program Change Table Preset Bank Ch 5 Preset Bank Ch 13 Program Change Scene Effect Program Change Scene Effect 001 001 002 002 128 128 Preset Bank Ch 6 Preset Bank Ch 14 001 001 002 002 128 128 B Preset Bank Ch 7 Preset Bank Ch 15 001 001 002 002 128 128 Preset Bank Ch 8 Preset Bank Ch 16 001 001 002 002 128 Preset Bank Ch 9 001 002 003 128 128 Program Change Scene Effect 001 002 003 128 Program Change Scene Effect 001 002 003 128 Appendices im Program Change Scene Effect 001 002 003 128 M7CL Owner s Manual 243 Scene Memory Effect Library to Program Change Table Bank Ch N JOJA IN N oo 00 0
198. Q MIX PROCESSING MIX PROCESSING MIX ALL MUTE ASSIGN WITH MIX SEND ITH MIX SEND WITH MIX SEND ITH MIX SEND MIX to MATRIX ON MIX FADER ON MIX to MATRIX SEND MIX FADER ON Dynamics Mute Assign To Mix ON To Mix LEVEL To Matrix On To Matrix LEVEL M7CL Owners Manual To Matix POINT O MIX PROCESSING Stereo Mono O MIXALL MIX PROCESSING c Mwese 0 o o O Sd Rdetme o soe Except for Key In Source MATRIX Channels RECALL SAFE USER LEVEL NAME MATRIX NAME OUTPUT NAME o 10 nos _ fader 6 VARRO feas o MATRIX ALL MUTE ASSIGN WITH MATRIX WITH MATRIX SEND SEND Insert On Dynamics Mute Assign To Matrix On To Matrix LEVEL WITH MATRIX WITH MATRIX SEND SEND Mute Safe C RecallSae Fade Time O so Except for Key In Source EQ ue C STEREO MONO Channels STEREO MONO NAME ICON STEREO MONO STEREO MONO Esdar STEREO MONO STEREO MONO FADER FADER ON STEREO MONO Pan Balance STEREO MONO ALL FADER ON STEREO MONO EEE STEREO MONO STEREO MONO y DYNA1 PROCESSING 5 Mute Assign STEREO MONO ALL MUTE ASSIGN To Matrix On STEREO MONO to STEREO MONO MATRIX ON FADER ON To Matrix LEVEL To Matrix POINT o o o
199. Q knob is not shown and the GAIN knob will act as an on off switch for the high pass filter ATT HPF EQ popup window 8 ch This shows the input channel or output channel EQ settings in groups of eight channels at a time Use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL sec tion to edit the EQ settings This window lets you con trol the ATT and HPF settings of all eight channels shown 1 Channel select button This indicates the channel number the 1con selected for that channel and the channel name Press these buttons to select the channel you want to copy or paste or to select multiple channels 2 EQ graph This mini graph shows the approximate response of the EQ parameters You can press the EQ graph to switch to the one channel window with that channel selected If the EQ or high pass filter is on the response curve is highlighted 3 EQ ON OFF button Switches the EQ on off 4 ATT knob This knob adjusts the attenuation gain amount before the signal enters the EQ You can press the ATT knob to select it and then use multifunction encoders 1 8 to make adjustments 5 HPF knob HPF ON OFF button input channels only These controls switch the high pass filter on off and adjust its cutoff frequency You can press the HPF knob to select it and then use multifunction encoders 1 8 to make adjustments EQ popup window ALL This window displays all input channels or output channels at once This page i
200. RARY store popup window A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store opera tion 7 execute the Store operation press the OK button The current settings will be stored to the library num ber you selected in step 4 If you decide to cancel the Store operation press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button Even after you ve stored the settings you can edit the title of the settings by pressing the data title in the list to access the LIBRARY TITLE EDIT popup window However you can t edit the title of a read only library item indicated by an R symbol Be aware that if you store settings to a location that already contains data the existing data will be overwritten Read only data cannot be overwritten Erasing settings from a library 1 Open a popup window that provides the tool buttons 2 In the upper part of the popup window press the LIBRARY button to access the library 1 CLEAR button This clears erases the settings that are selected in the list 3 Turn one of the multifunction encoders to select the library item that you want to clear You cannot clear read only data indicated by an R symbol Press the CLEAR button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear opera tion 5 To execute the Clear operation press the OK button The data you selected in step 3 will be cleared If you decide to cancel the Clear operation press the CAN CEL button
201. RE EQ INSERT OUT SLOT21 16 _ VARI PAN INSERT IN LRMONO C P Doc RAMS NIE a DNA QUT PRE FADER posto SLOTS 1k16 l o MATRIX LON gLEVEL 1 3 7 IGEMETER PRE EQ PRE FADER POST 0 2 TH 1 LEVEL BAL RACK1 OUT VARI ON LEVEL 1 2 4 8 COMP ON t A L B R an E o INSERT arr EC COMPAND Oe dis To OUTPUT PATCH 115 A MATRIX PRE EQ FADER POST ON m o3 EXPAND To MONITOR SELECT E a 2 PRETO ROS EO were raen Pu A L B R PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL POST PAN L M ESSE DN CUE L ERE Self PRE Self POST EQ MIX13 16 OUT INSERT OUT RACK4 OUT MEC aim ST L R MONO C POST EQ A L B R PRE FADER PFL POST ONJAFUPOST PAN R gl CUER CUE ON racKsou PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL pu E P MNT NUN RN a nem c A L B R MATRIX1 3 7 LEVEL 2 ON PREFADER BOSTON To MATRIX i A L B R PRE EQ EQOUT DYNAIOUT DYNA2OUT PREFADER POSTON a iael roer E VARI 1 RACK7ouT ie 5579 Qo STL s on Ss A i Wei mm BR a LCR O STEREO AENEA COMP
202. REO MONO field press a knob to select the MIX channel you want to adjust and then press the knob once again to access the TO STEREO MONO popup win dow In the TO STEREO MONO popup window you can control the signal that is sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO MONO bus You can view this popup window as two types 8ch and ALL use the tabs below the window to switch between them These windows include the following items TO STEREO MONO popup window 8 ch Here you can control the on off and pan balance set tings of the signal sent from MIX channels to the STE REO L R bus and MONO C bus in groups of eight channels 1 Channel select button This shows the icon channel number and channel name for the channel When you press this button that channel will be selected for operations and the corre sponding SEL key of the Centralogic section will light 2 MODE button This button selects either ST MONO mode or LCR mode as the way in which the signal will be sent to the STEREO bus or MONO bus This mode can be speci fied individually for each channel The two modes will alternate each time you press the button An indicator ST MONO or LCR immediately above the button will light to indicate the currently selected mode 3 STEREO MONO buttons These buttons are individual on off switches for the signal that is sent from each channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST MONO mode
203. RT ON OFF button Switches the insert on off To make insert settings in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen press the INSERT popup button to access the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window 1 ch and assign an output port and input port to the insert out and insert in p 102 When you ve assigned the ports press the INSERT ON OFF button to turn it on Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section e Making direct output settings INPUT channels only Use the DIRECT OUT field to make direct output related settings for an input channel in the SELECTED CHAN NEL VIEW screen This field includes the following items DIRECT OUT 0 DIRECT OUT popup button When you press this button the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window will appear allowing you to make settings for insert and direct output 2 DIRECT OUT LEVEL indicator This indicates the currently specified DIRECT OUT LEVEL value 8 DIRECT OUT ON OFF button Turns the direct output on off To make direct out settings in the SELECTED CHAN NEL VIEW screen press the DIRECT OUT popup button to access the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window 1 ch and assign an output port to the direct out p 102 Press the DIRECT OUT ON OFF button to turn it on and use the DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob to adjust the output level Setting a channel to Recall Safe Use the RECALL SAFE field to specify Recall Safe for the channel that is currently selected in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen This f
204. RT ON OFF button is turned on for the channel into which you inserted the effect If it is off press the button to turn it on In this state effect insertion is enabled for the corresponding chan nel In the function access area press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window and use the GEQ EFFECT tab to display the GEQ EFFECT field Press the effect rack that you want to insert into the channel the GEQ EFFECT popup window will appear In this popup window you can edit the parameters of the GEQ effect The popup window contains the fol lowing items D INPUT L R buttons These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ EFFECT field 2 OUTPUT L R buttons These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup window The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ EFFECT field 3 Input output meters These indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect Select the effect type and edit the effect parameters For details on editing the effect parameters refer to Editing the internal effect parameters that follows The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input output meters at the upper right of the GEQ EFFECT popup window Adjust the effect send master level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input
205. SETUP MEME 29 SETUP screen 207 Signal flow for input channels 51 Signal flow for output channels 69 Single mode 185 23 ST IN Stereo Input section 16 ST IN channels 1 4 13 51 ST IN jacks 1 4 22 ST MONO mode 57 72 STEREO channel 13 69 STEREO MONO MASTER eje pM 20 127 Storing scene 125 SUBNET MASK 214 T TADS e 26 TalkDACK uctor itio epi soon bite 149 TALKBACK DIMMER 142 TALKBACK GAIN knob 24 TALKBACK jack 24 Tap Tempo function 173 Il POR 28 Time stamp 131 TO STEREO MONO popup window 51 73 MUNDI RENTUR 58 73 Tool buttons 31 TOP DAWG X 15 Touch screen 18 25 Troubleshooting 264 U Under the front pad 24 USB connector 18 USB storage device Formatting media 206 Save load data 202 22 NEN NOU 191 User authentication 191 193 196 User defined keys 20 200 253 USER DEFINED KEYS section 20 User level
206. SSIGN MODE popup window 3 MUTE buttons 1 8 These buttons select the mute group s to which this channel is assigned To assign the channel to a mute group turn on the desired mute button 1 8 multiple selections are allowed To check the channels that are assigned to each mute group press the MUTE popup button to open the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window For details on the popup window gt p 114 Chapter 8 Operations in the Centralogic section This chapter explains how you can use the Centralogic section and the OVERVIEW screen to control up to eight channels at once About the Centralogic section The Centralogic section located below the touch screen lets you recall and simultaneously con trol a set of up to eight input channels output channels or DCA groups Use the navigation keys of the NAVIGATION KEYS section to select the channels that will be controlled SCENE MEMORY PN 1 o 9 r 1 o mi 0 10 STORE RECALL MONITOR LEVEL ww L c OJ c OJ c OJ c OJ c OJ c c USER DEFINED KEYS onum gy 999000 LI soon 0099 Li z 2 2 z z 2 2 10 11 Operations in the Centralogic section
207. TE e n order to send and receive digital audio signals via the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack or slots 1 3 the word clock of both devices must be synchronized gt 208 M7CL Owner s Manual Connections and setup Ca 41 Connections installing an option card Before you install I O cards in slots 1 3 you must check the Yamaha website to determine whether the card is compatible with the M7CL and to verify the total number of Yamaha or third party cards that can be installed in combination with that card Yamaha website http www yamahaproaudio com To install an optional mini YGDAI card proceed as follows 1 Make sure that the power is turned off Use the screws included with the card to fasten the card in place Malfunctions or incorrect operation may occur if the card is not fastened 2 Loosen the screws that hold the slot cover in place and remove the slot cover Keep the removed slot cover in a safe place N CAUTION Before connecting a separately sold mini YGDAI I O card to the M7CL you must turn off the power switch of the M7CL and the PC800W power supply Failure to observe this will cause malfunctions or electric shock 3 Align the edges of the card with the guard rails inside the slot and insert the card into the slot Push the card all the way into the slot so that the con nector at the end of the card is correctly inserted into the connector inside the slot 42 1 M7
208. TOR DELAY MIX OUT 1 16 OUTPUT STIN3LR MONITOR R ae lo De To OUTPUT PATCH DELAY METER SLOT1OUT 2 p STEREO MATRIX OUT 1 8 PATCH MONITOR C MONO C a Em 9 To OUTPUT PATCH 12 MATRIX OUT 1 8 MAX 600ms EEE STEREO OUT MIX B04 Mesa Di MONITOR OUT L R MONO C DELAY L R MAX 8ch 4MONO C A tout t delay b lid b CH INSERT OUT 1 32 48 TALKBACK ON n ou pu por etay ecomes invalid by MAX 600ms STEREO OUT assigning a monitor out to the output port RACK6 OUT gning put p MIX INSERT OUT 1 16 EN MONITOR DIMM ON MONITOR LEVEL A L B R STEREO INSERT OUT L R MONO C MIX OUT1 16 448V ST INL 1 1 ST IN 1L 4R STINR Bl 2 lt 7 GAIN TRIM To CASCADE IN SELECT To MONITOR SELECT SLOTIN SLOTIN SLOTIN 1 et o4 l1 m i i SLOTS3 TEE gt gt Rack 1 METER RACK OUT l 31BandGEQ tee 4 RACK IN A RACK OUT A RACK IN B RACK OUT B MIX OUT ty 1 16 A L B R i 1 hor iamm RACK2 same as RACK1 27 MATRIX OUT L B R i RACK3 IN A A L B R RACK3 same as RACK1 STEREO OUT RACK4 IN
209. This is a D sub 9 pin male connector for remotely control ling an external head amp device e g Yamaha AD8HR that supports a special protocol It can also be used to transmit receive MIDI messages to from an external device 7 WORD CLOCK IN OUT connectors These are BNC connectors used to transmit receive word clock signals to from an external device The WORD CLOCK IN connector is internally terminated by 75 ohms MIDI IN OUT connectors These connectors are used to transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from external MIDI devices The MIDI IN connector receives messages from an external device and the MIDI OUT connector transmits messages from the M7CL These are used mainly to record M7CL param eter operations or scene library selections on an external device or to control M7CL parameters from an external device 9 ETHERNET connector This connector allows the M7CL to be connected via a CAT3 transmission speed up to 10 Mbps or CATS transmission speed up to 100 Mbps Ethernet cable to a Windows computer This is used mainly to control mix parameters or edit scene memories and libraries from the dedicated M7CL Editor application program NOTE e The DME Network Driver required for connection to the Ethernet connector the Studio Manager required for starting up M7CL Edi tor and the M7CL Editor itself can be downloaded from the follow ing Yamaha website http www yamahaproaudio com Rear panel S
210. Use the multifunction encoders corre sponding to the FADE TIME knobs to adjust the fade time The range is 0 0 sec 60 0 sec When you ve finished making settings press the CLOSE button to close the FADE TIME popup win dow The fade time you specify here is used for all channels and DCA groups selected in step 4 6 To enable the Fade function press the FAD ING button The Fade on off setting is made individually for each scene Scenes for which Fade settings are made are shown by a FADING indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window 7 Recall a scene for which the Fade function is turned on The faders will begin to move immediately after Recall occurs and will reach the values of the recalled scene over the course of the specified fade time NOTE e The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link 5 e By stopping a moving fader while you hold down the corre sponding SEL key you can stop the fade operation of the fader at that point f you recall the same scene while faders are moving the fad ers of all channels and DCA groups will move immediately to their target positions 140 ll M7CL Owners Manual Chanter 13 Monitor Cue This chapter explains the M7CLs monitor cue functions About the monitor cue functions The Monitor function lets you audition various outputs through your nearfield monitors or head phones
211. Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTE to determine FREQ LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequenc 1 FPP RGID Bed d d d deos M LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 12 0 to 412 0 dB EQ peaking type gain 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain Us HF ded dad d on 230 1 M7CL Owners Manual FLANGE Two input two output flange effect FREQ 005 4000 He Modulation speed Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off tar 100 H2 8 00 khz FQ peaking type Frequency 100 010 EQ peaking type bandwidth 1 ddd de d 4 d d SYMPHONIC Two input two output symphonic effect FREQ 005 4000 Hz Modulation speed tar 100 Hz 8 00 KHz EQ peaking type Frequency aq 100 010 EQ peaking type bandwidth qo HP IIT ddd de d 4 d d 55 Effects Parameters PHASER Two input two output 16 stage phaser FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation
212. X buses 2 TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from that channel to the MATRIX buses To adjust the send lev els use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a PAN knob for the STEREO channel or a stereo MIX channel the BALANCE knob If the TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF button 3 is off the knob will be dimmed 3 TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF button Functions as an on off switch for the signal sent from that channel to the MATRIX bus An indication of PRE in black characters on a white background is shown above these buttons only if the signal send position is PRE pre fader This indica tion is not shown for POST post fader For details on how to switch between PRE and POST gt p 77 M7CL Owner s Manual Output channel operations 75 Sending signals from MIX channels STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses 76 a gt If PRE is selected as the position from which the signal is sent to a MATRIX bus the signal will be sent from the pre fader position regardless of the setting in the BUS SETUP screen 5 Make sure that the TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF button is turned on for the send desti nation MATRIX bus If this button is off press the button in the screen to turn it on 6 In the SELECTED CHANNEL section use the MIX MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs
213. a button or field for a specific parameter in a screen a window showing detailed parameters or lists will appear This type of window 15 called a popup win dow Tool buttons There are three types of popup window 1 ch windows that show only a specific channel 8 ch windows that show the currently selected group of eight channels and ALL windows that show all channels in a single view You can switch between these using tabs Some popup windows show several buttons called tool buttons at the top of the window You can use these tool buttons to recall libraries or to perform copy paste opera tions Press the X symbol to close the popup window and return to the previous screen Dialog boxes A dialog box like the following will appear when you need to confirm the operation you just performed STORE CORF diu WR Store to MEMORY 00 Y Press the OK button to execute the operation The opera tion will be cancelled if you press the CANCEL button Viewing the touch screen The M7CLs touch screen shows the following information and is broadly divided into two areas Main area Function access area 1 Selected channel This shows the number name and icon of the channel that is currently selected for operation For details on assign ing a name p 30 on selecting an icon p 53 You can also press this field to switch channels Pressing
214. a graph that shows the approximate EQ response for each channel 6 DYNAMICS 1 field 7 DYNAMICS 2 field input channels only For each channel this shows the name of the type selected for Dynamics 1 the input level gain reduction amount and threshold If GATE 1 selected as the dynamics type a three step indicator shows the presence or absence of a signal and the open closed status of the gate TO MIX TO MATRIX field This shows the send level of the signal sent from each channel to the MIX buses MATRIX buses If the send destinations are MATRIX buses an indication of TO MATRIX is shown at the bottom of the field To adjust the send level for each bus press the corre sponding knob to select it and operate multifunction encoders 1 8 a gt If input channels are shown you can use the TO MIX TO MATRIX button in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to change the send destination shown in this field You also assign the SEND ENCODER MODE function to a user defined key and use it to change the send destination in the same Way If MATRIX channels are selected the 8 area will change as follows 9 FROM MIX field This shows the send level of the signals sent from MIX channels 1 16 to each MATRIX bus To adjust the send level for each bus press the corresponding knob to select it and operate multifunction encoders 1 8 TO STEREO MONO field This shows the on off status of the signal
215. a is received STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0O001nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010001 11 M7CL DATA Category cc DATA ee Element no ee Element no 01111111 ii 01111111 ii Index Channel Channel 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 4 1 3 Data category DATA CATEGORY NAME Current Scene Setup Backup User Setup Data 0x01 00000001 4 2 Function call library store recall 4 2 1 Format Parameter change Receive Data will be received when Parameter change Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when Parameter change ECHO is on The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received Transmission Data will be transmitted with the Device Number in Tx CH when Parameter change Tx is on STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0O001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010001 11 M7CL DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA FUNCTION 01001100 L ASCII CODE 01101001 i ASCII CODE 01100010 D ASCII CODE ff ASCII C
216. ack This is the virtual rack in which you can mount a GEQ or effect 3 MODULE SELECT Use these buttons to select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack Each button has the following function BLANK button Removes the GEQ or effect cur rently mounted in the rack the rack will be empty 31 Band GEQ button Mounts a 31 Band GEQ in the rack Flex15GEQ button v Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack EFFECT button Mounts an effect in the rack How ever effects cannot be mounted in racks 1 4 Input output patching will be defeated when you change the item mounted in a rack 4 CANCEL button Cancels the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window and closes the window 5 OK button Applies the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window and closes the window NOTE e Be aware that if you remove a GEQ or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the window all parameter set tings for that GEQ or effect will be discarded If you have not yet closed the window you can recover the parameter set tings by mounting the same GEQ or effect once again e You can also display the RACK MOUNTER popup window by pressing a vacant rack in the GEQ EFFECT field Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select the item you want to mount and press the OK button 5 To select the input source for a rack press the INPUT button for that rack The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will appea
217. ack and the selected INPUT jack will be output to the destination bus MIX 1 16 buttons MTRX 1 8 buttons You also assign talkback on off or an ASSIGN change to a user defined key In this case you can select either latched operation or unlatched operation the function will be on only while you continue holding down the key gt p 200 e When talkback is on you can use the talkback dimmer to lower the monitor levels other than talkback gt p 143 Using the oscillator Using the oscillator Here s how to send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to a desired bus 1 In the function access area press the MON 2 Press the popup button or the ASSIGN field ITOR button to access the MONITOR screen In the MONITOR screen the OSCILLATOR field lets you check the current oscillator settings and turn the oscillator on off If you want to view or edit the oscillator settings in greater detail use the OSCILLATOR popup window described in step 2 and following 1 Popup button Opens the OSCILLATOR popup window 2 LEVEL knob This adjusts the output level of the oscillator If you press the knob to select it you ll be able to operate it using the corresponding multifunction encoder 3 MODE button This selects the type of oscillator signal The type will change each time you press the button 4 ASSIGN field Indicates the bus to which the oscillator signal is sent
218. ain dB Knee Release ms 174 Threshold dB Ratio 1 3 Attack ms COMPRESSOR Out gain dB 2 5 Release ms 261 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 Attack ms COMPRESSOR Out gain dB Knee Release ms 238 Threshold dB 11 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 33 COMPRESSOR Out gain dB 1 5 Release ms 749 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 Attack ms COMPRESSOR Out dB Knee Release ms Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms COMPRESSOR Out gain dB Knee Release ms 186 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 18 COMPRESSOR Out dB 4 0 Knee Release ms 226 Threshold dB 13 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 58 COMPRESSOR Out gain dB 2 0 Knee Release ms 238 M7CL Owner s Manual COMPRESSOR gt v 17 1 0 2 238 18 3 5 N CA 1 5 93 1 5 1 35 S 17 76 2 5 x in in v 9 E Q Q lt 223 DYNAMICS Library List SamplingPerc COMPANDER S UJ e Sampling BD COMPRESSOR UJ Sampling SN COMPRESSOR UJ N COMPANDER S UJ UJ Solo Vocal1 COMPRESSOR Solo Vocal2 COMPRESSOR UJ Chorus COMPRESSOR UJ Click Erase EXPANDER W N Announcer COMPANDER H UJ Limiter1 COMPANDER S T 224 M7CL Owners Manual kim 8 kim 8 out gain 80 Out gain
219. al sent from each channel to the STE REO MONO buses The following items are shown in the TO STEREO MONO field D C PAN BALANCE knob When INPUT channel or monaural chan nel is selected MO The panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus is shown When ST IN channel or a stereo MIX channel is selected The balance of the left right signals sent to the STEREO bus is shown e When a STEREO channel or a stereo MATRIX channel is selected n The balance of the left right output sig nals is shown To adjust the value press the knob to select it and operate multifunction encoders 1 8 If you press the selected knob once again the TO STEREO MONO popup window 8 ch will appear In this popup window you can switch between ST MONO mode and LCR mode and change the on off status of the signal sent to the STEREO MONO bus for up to eight channels at a time For details on the popup window gt 57 2 OVER indicator This indicator will light if any of the level detection points in each channel reach the OVER level 3 ST MONO indicator INPUT ST IN and MIX channels only This indicates the on off status of the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus To switch this on off press the selected knob once again to open the TO STEREO MONO popup window If an INPUT ST IN or MIX channel is set to LCR mode the 3 area will change as follows BL 4 LCR indi
220. alid signals are being input from the USB connector input port Too much data is being received at the USB connector input port Too much data is being transmitted from the USB connector input port The password you input was incorrect The M7CL cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen is not appropriate The current user does not have permission to create a user key M7CL Owner s Manual v 9 C Q Q lt 263 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 264 Power does not turn on panel LEDs and the LCD display do not light Sound is not input Sound is not output Sound is not output from headphones or the MONITOR OUT jacks Sound is not loud enough Sound is distorted Sound is output even though it is not patched to an output channel The volume of a specific channel rises and falls Operating a fader does not control the level as you expect Only the sound of a specific channel is heard from the MONITOR OUT or PHONES jack Noise occurs from an externally connected recorder or other device High frequency range is attenuated An input signal is being input but there s no monitor output Not enough headroom especially when EQ boost is applied Signal is delayed Turning a MIX encoder does not change the send level to the MIX bus Can t save scene memory or library data Can t save to USB storage device Can t transmit receiv
221. an select an item to mount in the rack Each of these buttons corresponds to the rack shown at the right 4 SAFE button This button switches Recall Safe on off for the rack Each of these buttons corresponds to the rack shown at the right 5 INPUT button This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the input source for the rack 6 Virtual rack This area shows eight virtual racks in which GEQ or effects can be mounted Racks 1 4 are only for GEQ and either GEQ or effects can be mounted in racks 5 8 However depending on the effect type some can be mounted only in rack 5 or 7 The popup window that appears when you press a vir tual rack will differ depending on whether a GEQ or effect is already mounted If you press a rack in which a GEQ or effect is already mounted GEQ EFFECT popup window will appear allowing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or effect If you press a rack that is empty The RACK MOUNTER popup win dow will appear allowing you to select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack 7 OUTPUT button This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the output destination of the rack 3 To mount a GEQ or effect in the rack press the RACK MOUNT button for that rack The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear D 1 Rack number This indicates the number of the selected rack 2 Virtual r
222. and Slot settings LOCK BUT NOT SYNC ED yellow A valid clock is being input but is not synchronized with the selected clock source If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector input output cannot occur correctly between that device and the M7CL SRC ON green This is a special status only for SLOT 1 3 indicat ing that the corresponding channel s SRC Sam pling Rate Converter is enabled This means that even if the signal is not synchronized normal input output with the M7CL is occurring UNLOCK red A valid clock is not being input If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector input output cannot occur correctly between that device and the M7CL UNKNOWN black This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device 1s connected or because there is no valid clock input You will be able to select this connector slot but successful syn chronization cannot occur until a valid connection is established If the symbol for the port selected in step 3 has turned light blue and the clock frequency is shown at the upper left of the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field this indicates that the M7CL 1 operating correctly with the new clock m gt verter MY8 AE96S input and output can occur normally with the M7CL even when unsynchronized In this case turn on the SRC button for the slot channel that is receiving the signal NOTE
223. and dynamics Each input channel and output channel of the M7CL provides a four band EQ and dynamics EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels An attenuator is provided immedi ately before the EQ allowing you to adjust the level of the input signal Inout channels also pro vide a high pass filter that is independent of the EQ Input channels provide two dynamics processors Dynamics 1 can be used as a gate ducking compressor or expander while Dynamics 2 can be used as a compressor hard compander soft compander or de esser Output channels provide one dynamics processor which can be used as a compressor expander hard compander or soft compander This section explains the four band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels 1 Use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen for the channel whose EQ you want to control The EQ field shows the response of the EQ In this OVERVIEW screen you can use the EQ encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the param eter settings careo 2 If you want to edit while watching the ATT HPF EQ parameter values press the EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen to access the ATT HPF EQ popup window In the ATT HPF EQ popup window you can edit the EQ and high pass filter parameters and switch them on off There are three variations of this popup window one channel eight channel and ALL These windows include the following items
224. and outputs If an external head amp unit such as the Yamaha AD8HR that supports a special protocol is connected to the REMOTE connector the phantom power and gain settings of the external head amp can also be remotely controlled from the M7CL Differences between the M7CL 48 and M7CL 32 Differences between the M CL 48 and M CL 32 The M7CL is available in two models the M7CL 48 and the M7CL 32 These models differ as fol lows M CL 48 This model provides 48 INPUT jacks and 48 INPUT channels I Introduction INPUT jacks 1 32 are located at the right side of the rear panel and INPUT jacks 33 48 are located at the left side of the rear panel 10000000 000000000000000 0000000 00000 000000000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000 OUT POWER E im OUT E rm 42 42 42 42 42 42 iun amp me BU 14 amp 13 12 amp 11 10 9 25 aX ees uy W W J 1 INPUT jacks 1 32 2 INPUT jacks 33 48 UJ In addition to the channel strip for INPUT channels 1 32 located at the left side of the front pan
225. annels If PHONES LEVEL the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack LINK is ON this will also affect the PHONES OUT jack M7CL Owners Manual 141 Using the Monitor function Using the Monitor function This section explains how to select the desired monitor source and monitor it from the PHONES OUT jack or external monitor speakers 1 Connect your monitor system to the rear panel OMNI OUT jacks 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack or an I O card installed in a slot The monitor signal can be sent to any desired output jack or output channel If you re monitoring through headphones make sure that your headphones are con nected to the PHONES OUT jack under the front pad 2 In the function access area press the MON ITOR button to access the MONITOR screen In the MONITOR screen the MONITOR field lets you check the current monitor settings and turn moni toring on off The MONITOR screen includes the following items D 040006 D Popup button Opens the MONITOR popup window where you can make detailed settings for monitoring 2 SOURCE SELECT field Use the buttons in this field to select the monitor source 3 DIMMER field The Dimmer function which temporarily attenuates the monitor signal can be switched on off here If you press the knob in this field so that it is enclosed by a heavy frame you can use multifunction encoder 4 to adjust the amount of attenuation 4 TALKBACK DIMMER field If Tal
226. ar if the battery runs down If this occurs immediately save your data on a USB storage device and contact your Yamaha dealer POWER SUPPLY ee This indicates the status of the internal power supply INT and external power supply EXT Word Clock and Slot settings Word clock refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal process ing If you connect external equipment such as a DAW system or HDR Hard Disk Recorder to a digital I O card installed slot 1 3 this equipment must be synchronized to the same word clock in order for digital audio signals to be sent and received If digital audio signals are transferred in an unsynchronized state the data will not be transmitted or received correctly and noise may be present in the signal even if the sampling rates are the same opecifically you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the entire system the word clock master and then set the remaining devices the word clock slaves so that they synchronize to the word clock master If you wish to use the M7CL as a word clock slave that is synchronized to the word clock supplied from an external device you must specify the appropriate clock source the port through which the word clock is obtained The following steps show how to select the clock source that the M7CL will use 1 In the function access area press the 2 In the SYSTEM SETUP field at the ce
227. as RACKS RACK7 same as RACKS 4 az RACKS same as RACKS oe sl 2 Graphic EQ and effects or effects MATRIX INSERT OUT 1 8 Figure 1 Figure 2 The M7CL provides a rack for mounting external head amps Yamaha AD8HR as well as the virtual rack for GEQ and effects For details refer to Using an external head amp gt p 177 M7CL Owners Manual 157 About the virtual rack 158 Virtual rack operations This section explains how to mount a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack and patch the input output of the rack 1 In the function access area press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window 1 RACK button 2 GEQ EFFECT tab 2 In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK win dow press the GEQ EFFECT tab to access the GEQ EFFECT field In the VIRTUAL RACK window you can use the tabs to switch between two different fields In this case select the GEQ EFFECT field D 1 GEQ EFFECT field In this field you can mount GEQ or effects in racks 1 8 and edit the input output patching for each rack 2 Field select tabs Use these tabs to switch the field shown in the VIR TUAL RACK window For details on the EXTERNAL HA field refer to Using an external head amp gt p 177 M7CL Owner s Manual 3 RACK MOUNT button This displays the RACK MOUNT popup window where you c
228. ated when the dimmer is on You can use multifunction encoder 4 to control this This operation can also be per formed in the DIMMER field of the MONITOR screen DIMMER ON button mi If this button is on the monitor sig nal level will be attenuated accord ing to the setting of the DIMMER knob This operation can also be performed in the DIMMER field of the MONITOR screen 3 TALKBACK DIMMER field Here you can view and make settings for the Talkback Dimmer TALKBACK DIMMER knob This adjusts the amount by which the monitor signal will be attenuated when talkback is on You can use multifunction encoder 5 to control this This operation can also be per formed in the TALKBACK DIMMER field of the MONITOR screen TALKBACK DIMMER indicator This indicator shows that talkback is on and that the talkback dimmer is operating f the normal dimmer and the talkback are both switched on simultaneously the setting with the greatest amount of atten uation will be applied 4 MONITOR DELAY field This field specifies the monitor delay setting by which the monitor signal is delayed You can use this in large auditoriums where there is a time difference between the monitor signal and the direct sound e MONITOR DELAY knob Adjusts the delay time for the moni tor signal You can use multifunction encoder 6 to control this e MONITOR DELAY ON button If this button is on the monitor sig
229. ates the number of the currently selected scene 3 R symbol READ ONLY symbol Protect symbol Read only scenes are indicated by an R symbol Read only symbol displayed here Write protected scenes are indicated by a Protect symbol 4 Scene title This displays the title of the currently selected scene 5 E symbol EDIT symbol This symbol will appear when you edit the mix param eters of the currently loaded scene This symbol indi cates that you must execute the Store operation if you want to keep the changes you made m gt e f you hold down either of the SCENE MEMORY A VW keys the scene number will change consecutively f you press the SCENE MEMORY A W keys simulta neously the SCENE field indication will return to the number of the currently loaded scene NOTE e You cannot Store to a scene number for which the Protect symbol or R symbol is displayed 3 Press the SCENE MEMORY STORE key The SCENE STORE popup window will appear allowing you to assign a title or comment to the scene 1 SCENE TITLE field Press this field to select it and enter a title for the scene maximum 16 characters M7CL Owners Manual 2 COMMENT field Press this field to select it and enter a comment for the scene You can use this as a memorandum for each scene maximum 32 characters 2 The title and comment can be edited later p 130 Assign a title or comment to the scene a
230. ation you press Multiple selection specifying a range While pressing your finger on the touch panel move it in the left right direction to specify a range within a character string You will use this mainly when assigning a name to a scene or library FILE For the channel select buttons you can select multiple but tons by moving your finger across the touch screen while continue to press Basic operation of the M7CL 5 This makes it easy to select a range of buttons to be turned on off together Special operations for keys Normally you will press a top panel key once but in some cases you can access a special function by rapidly pressing a key twice in succession Encoder operations Normally encoders are turned left right to change the value of the corresponding parameter By pressing an encoder you can recall a specific screen For some param eters you can adjust the value in finer steps greater detail by turning the encoder while pressing it Q Q M7CL Owners Manual 25 Basic operations in the top panel touch screen The on screen user interface 26 Multifunction encoder operations Multifunction encoders 1 8 are used to operate the knobs selected for operation in the touch screen gt p 27 When you press to select a knob that can be controlled by the multifunction encoders a thick line appears around it Normally a knob of this type corresponds t
231. attery or some other reason Please contact your Yamaha dealer Monitor Assignment is Restricted to Max 8 The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be selected but you attempted to Sources assign more than this No Controllable Kaob has been ignored because there is parameter that corresponds to the knob you No Response from External HA No response from an external AD8HR Nothing to Paste Paste cannot be performed because there is no data in the copy buffer Page Bookmarked The current screen or popup has been bookmarked Password Changed The password has been changed The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped If a malfunction has occurred please con Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned tact your Yamaha dealer Processing Aborted Processing was interrupted REMOTE Data Framing Error Invalid signals are being input to the REMOTE connector 262 1 M7CL Owners Manual Message REMOTE Data Overrun REMOTE Rx Buffer Full REMOTE Tx Buffer Full Saving Aborted SLOT x Data Framing Error SLOT x Data Overrun SLOT x Rx Buffer Full SLOT x Tx Buffer Full Storage Full Storage Not Found Storage Not Ready Sync Error xxx Tap Operation Ignored This Operation is Not Allowed Too Many Bands Used Cannot Compare Too Many Bands Used Cannot Paste to Flex15GEQ Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded Unsupported File Format USB Data Framing Error USB Data Ov
232. audio signal WORD CLOCK IN p stor 1 5 M7CL word clock slave Digital MTR or other digital audio device word clock master In either case you must use the following procedure to specify the word clock source that the M7CL will use The procedure below is not necessary if you are using the M7CL as the word clock master or if the M7CL is not digitally connected to an external device M7CL Owner s Manual Connections and setup Ca 43 Setting up to use the M7CL T In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen In the SETUP screen you can make settings that apply to the entire M7CL 1 SYSTEM SETUP field 2 WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP button 2 In the SYSTEM SETUP field at the center of the window press the WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP button to open the WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP popup window C WORD CLOCK SELECT field NOTE When you switch the word clock source noise may occur due to loss of synchronization Be sure to lower the volume of your power amps and monitor system before you continue with the following procedure 44 M7CL Owners Manual 3 In the WORD CLOCK SELECT field select the clock source In the WORD CLOCK SELECT field use the buttons to select the clock source you want to use as the word clock master When using clock data from a digital audio signal as the clock source Press a valid two channel button for the
233. av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini N ringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 RUSSIA Yamaha Music Russia Office 4015 entrance 2 21 5 Kuznetskii Most street Moscow 107996 Russia Tel 495 626 0660 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstrabe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 49 4101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Naka ku Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstrabe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16 513 P O Box 17328 Jubel Ali Dubai United Arab Emirates Tel 97 1 4 881 5868 ASIA THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music amp Electronics China Co Ltd 25 F United Plaza 1468 Nanjing Road West Jingan Shanghai China Tel 021 6247 2211 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd SF Dongsung Bldg 158 9 Samsung Dong Kangnam Gu Seoul Korea Tel 080 004 0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte Ltd 03 11 A Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road Singapore 409015 Te
234. b corresponds to the following channels OUT CH Shows the output channels MIX channels 1 16 MATRIX channels 1 8 STEREO L R channels and MONO C channel MONITOR OUT Shows the MONITOR OUT L R C channels CH 1 32 CH 33 48 M7CL 48 only Shows INPUT channels 1 32 1 48 2 Channel select button Selects the channel to be assigned to the output port you selected in step 3 m gt If you selected CH 1 32 or CH 33 48 M7CL 48 only the input channel you selected will be output directly from the cor responding output port At this time the channel select button in the OUTPUT PORT popup window is shown as DIR CH xx channel number For details on direct output gt p 102 M7CL Owners Manual 1 97 Changing the output patch settings Changing the input patch settings 5 Use the channel select tabs and the chan nel select buttons to select the source channel and press the CLOSE button You will return to the OUTPUT PORT popup window gt If PATCH CONFIRMATION is a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere For details refer to p 198 6 Make settings for delay phase and attenu ator as desired 7 Repeat step 3 6 to assign channels for
235. before ATT or immediately before fader METER This meters the level of the input channel You can switch the position at which the level is detected Specifying the channel and icon Specifying the channel name and icon On the M7CL the name and icon shown in the screen can be specified for each input channel Here we will explain how to specify the channel name and icon 1 Use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen containing the input channel whose channel name icon you want to assign 1 Channel number Channel name field 2 Access the PATCH NAME popup window by pressing the channel number channel name field of the channel whose channel name icon you want to assign 1 The popup window shows the following items 1 Input port button This indicates the currently selected input port If you press this button when selecting an icon or changing the channel name you will return to the input port select screen 2 Icon button This indicates the icon selected for that channel When you press this button a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name 3 Channel name input box This indicates the name assigned to that channel When you press this field a keyboard window allow ing you to assign a name will appear 4 Tabs Use these tabs to switch between items 3 To select the icon for that channel press the icon button Th
236. button is shown only if the OUT button is on However if both the IN button and OUT button are on the parameters corresponding to WITH SEND will automatically be subject to recall Scene memory NO If you want to cancel the restrictions you specified in step 3 so that all parameters will be subject to recall turn the ALL button on When you turn on the ALL button all other buttons for that scene will be turned off Turning on any other but ton will turn off the ALL button 5 Recall a scene for which you ve made Focus settings If buttons other than ALL are turned on for the scene only the parameters whose buttons are on will be D FOCUS field recalled If the ALL button is turned on for the scene In this field you can make settings for the Focus func all parameters will be updated tion The buttons in this field correspond to the scene list shown the left side of the SCENE LIST window Scenes for which Focus settings are made are shown by a FOCUS indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST The CURRENT SETTING field lets you make Focus Window settings that will be used the next time you perform e The Focus function can be used in conjunction with the Recall Scene Store operation Safe function gt p 136 Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled When you recall a scene the
237. buttons In the ATT HPF EQ DYNAMICS 1 2 GEQ and EFFECT popup windows the following tool buttons are shown 0 MILITE 5 m PASTE 1 LIBRARY button This button opens the library associated with the current popup window EQ dynamics GEQ or effect libraries 2 DEFAULT button This button returns the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack effect to its default state 3 COPY button This button copies the settings of the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect The copied content is held in a buffer memory a temporary memory area 4 PASTE button This button pastes the settings from the buffer memory to the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect 5 COMPARE button This button exchanges and compares the settings in the buffer memory with the settings of the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect For some windows the following tool buttons are also shown SET ALL Sets all parameters in the window CLEAR ALL Clears all parameters in the window ALL PRE Specifies PRE as the position from which all signals are sent to the speci fied bus ALL POST Specifies POST as the position from which all signals are sent to the speci fied bus Using libraries This section explains basic operations for libraries Librar ies allow you to store and re
238. call settings for the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect The following libraries are provided Input EQ library Output EQ library Dynamics library GEO library Effect library The method of operation is essentially the same for each library Recalling settings from a library 1 Open a popup window that provides the tool buttons To access each popup window proceed as follows ATT HPF EQ popup window DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window In the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the OVERVIEW screen press the appropriate field for EQ or Dynamics 1 2 D EQ graph field 2 Dynamics 1 2 field M7CL Owner s Manual Basic operation of the M7CL 5 31 Using the tool buttons LEO MILI LII PLI LA ME TTL EE E MI LII E DL LIO B MILI EE EM M 20 0 6 D IE E HL LEE E MIO LJL I FR DLL HE B ILLI 5 2 E ILI ERO E n LM E MIO D EQ graph field 2 Dynamics 1 2 field GEQ EFFECT popup window In the VIRTUAL RACK window that appears when you press the RACK button in the function access area press a rack in which a GEQ effect is already mounted 1 RACK button 2 Racks 321 M7CL Owners Manual 2 Select the channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect for which you want to recall settings The method of selecting a channel or rack will depend on the type of popup window that is displayed ATT HPF EQ popup window 1 ch DYNAMICS 1 2 popup w
239. cated in the TALKBACK IN field M7CL Owner s Manual 4 If you want to use an INPUT jack 1 32 1 48 as supplementary input for talkback proceed as follows 1 Press the INPUT TO TALKBACK field INPUT select button to open the INPUT PORT SELECT popup window 2 Of the 1 32 1 48 buttons press the but ton for the input you want to use for talkback making it light You can select only one input at a time 3 Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window Use the INPUT TO TALKBACK field GAIN knob and level meter to adjust the input level of the con nected mic The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power Press a button in the ASSIGN field to spec ify the bus es to which the talkback signal Will be sent multiple selections are allowed These buttons correspond to the following buses MIX buses 1 16 MATRIX buses 1 8 ST L ST R buttons STEREO bus L R MONO C button MONO bus You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections To enable talkback press the TALKBACK ON button to turn it on The TALKBACK ON button will alternately turn on off each time you press the button Latch operation While talkback is on the signal from the TALKBACK j
240. cator INPUT ST IN MIX channels only The LCR indicator shows the overall on off status of the signals sent from that channel to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus To switch this on off press the selected knob once again to open the TO STEREO MONO popup win dow Operations in the Centralogic section Assigning a channel to a DCA group or Mute group In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the DCA MUTE GROUP field to assign a channel to a DCA group input channels only or mute group This field includes the fol lowing items 2 1 DCA indicator input channels only This indicator shows the DCA group s to which the input channel is assigned The numbers of DCA groups to which this channel belongs are highlighted 2 Mute indicator This indicator shows the mute groups to which the channel is assigned The numbers of mute groups to which this channel belongs are highlighted To assign a channel to a DCA group or Mute group press the DCA MUTE GROUP field to open the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup window For details on the popup window gt p 114 M7CL Owner s Manual Operations in the Centralogic section 93 Fixing the channels or DCA groups of the Centralogic section 94 Fixing the channels or DCA groups of the Centralogic section If desired you can fix the channels or DCA groups controlled by the faders ON keys meters CUE keys and SEL keys of the Centralogic section and swit
241. ce again will return either to the most recently recalled SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the OVERVIEW screen Viewing the touch screen Main area The contents of the main area will change depending on the function that is currently selected Mixing operations will involve mainly the following two types of screen SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen This screen shows all the mix parameters for the currently selected channel To access this screen click one of the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section Basic operation of the M7CL 5 cag md OVERVIEW screen This screen simultaneously shows the main parameters for the up to eight channels currently assigned to the Centr alogic section To access this screen press one of the keys in the NAVIGATION KEYS section or one of the multi function encoders f the METER screen is shown in the meter area the OVERVIEW screen won t appear even you press a key in the NAVIGATION KEYS section To return to the OVERVIEW screen press a multi function encoder or press the highlighted METER field once again M7CL Owners Manual 29 30 Entering names On the M7CL you can assign a name to each input channel output channel and DCA group and assign a title to scene and library data when saving it To assign a name you will use the keyboard window shown in the screen 1 Access the screen for assigning a name The illustration shown below is an e
242. ch between groups of eight chan nels for control in the OVERVIEW screen In this case the multifunction encoders will control a different set of eight channels than the Centralogic section s faders and ON keys T In the NAVIGATION KEYS section press the navigation key for the channels or DCA group you want to fix in the Centralogic section and hold it down for two seconds or longer The LED of the navigation key will blink The blink ing indicates that the corresponding channels or DCA groups are now fixed to the Centralogic section MIX9 16 us 16 ST IN il Lj IN MIX1 8 NIU d UN 2 Press a navigation key other than the DCA key to select the eight channels you want to control in the OVERVIEW screen The LED of the navigation key you selected in step 2 will light The lit status indicates that the correspond ing channels can be controlled in the OVERVIEW screen and by the multifunction encoders NOTE You cannot operate DCA groups the OVERVIEW screen using the multifunction encoders For this rea son pressing the DCA key in step 2 will have no effect M7CL Owner s Manual The following illustration shows the example of when the DCA groups are fixed to the Centralogic section and INPUT channels 1 8 are controlled in the OVER VIEW screen Control INPUT channels 1 8 in the OVERVIEW screen Control DCA groups 1 8 3 As
243. channels M7CL Owners Manual Subsequent operations will differ depending on the parameters you want to adjust Specifying the channel name and icon In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the channel num ber and channel name fields to specify the name and icon for each channel This field includes the following items 1 Channel number The number of that channel or DCA group 2 Channel name 3 Icon These show the name and icon selected for that chan nel or DCA group If you want to change the name or icon press the field to access the PATCH NAME popup window For details on the popup window gt 53 Making HA settings input channels only For input channels to which a rear panel input jack or an external head amp device e g Yamaha AD8HR is patched you can use the HA PHASE field of the OVER VIEW screen to control the head amp The HA PHASE field includes the following items 1 GAIN knob This indicates the gain of the head amp assigned to the channel To adjust the value press the knob to select it and operate multifunction encoders 1 8 2 48V This indicates the phantom power on red or off black status for the head amp assigned to the chan nel 3 Phase This indicates either normal phase black reverse phase orange for the head amp assigned to the chan nel The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB
244. connections 210 Operations on the cascade slave M7CL 210 Operations on the cascade master M7CL 211 Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses 212 Setting the date and time of the internal clock 213 Setting the network address 214 Specifying the brightness of the touch screen LEDs and lamps 215 Initializing the M7CL s internal memory 216 Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen Calibration function 217 Adjusting the faders Calibration function 218 Adjusting the input output gain Calibration function 219 Appendices 221 EQ Library List PS 221 DYNAMICS Library List 222 Dynamics Parameters 225 Effect Type LSU 2 228 Effects Parameters 5 eoe triente renean 229 Effects and tempo synchronization 240 Scene Memory Effect Library to Program Change Table 241 Parameters that can be assigned to control changes 245 Control change parameter assignments 247 NRPN parameter assignments 249 Mixing parameter operation applicability 252 Functions that can be assigned to
245. connector 22 Remotely controlling an external head amp N 178 Restoring the current scene to the default state 43 M7CL Owners Manual SUBEN E coli UNI RUE 29 Clearing miseri bre 133 Copying pasting 132 Cutting 134 0 2 1 4 134 FO CAINING 128 STORING 125 SCENE 126 Scene 125 SCENE MEMORY MONITOR section 19 Scene number 126 Scene title 126 SELECTED CHANNEL section 17 61 66 75 79 Operations 81 SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW SOF GOL uote roo 29 80 sending an input channel signal to STEREO 47 Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses 75 Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO bus 72 Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus 61 Sending the signal from an input channel to the MATRIX buses 66 Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO bus c TT T RS of SENDS ON FADER 29 Settings COD WING 36 Initializing sessssss 35 NET 36
246. correspond ing slot When using word clock data from the WORD CLOCK IN jack as the clock source Press the WORD CLOCK IN button If the M7CL is operating correctly with the new clock the symbol immediately above the corresponding but ton will turn light blue The clock data of the digital audio signal supplied via a digital card in slots 1 3 can be selected in two channel units For details on word clock refer to Word Clock and Slot set tings gt p 208 4 To close the WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP popup window press the x symbol located in the upper right You will return to the SETUP screen 5 To close the SETUP screen press the SETUP button in the function access area Making HA Head Amp gain settings Here s how to adjust the gain of the HA Head Amp for each input channel to which a mic or instrument is con nected On the M7CL channel parameters can be controlled using either the SELECTED CHANNEL section to make set tings for a single channel or using the Centralogic section to make settings for up to eight channels Use the method that s appropriate for your situation Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section settings for one channel With this method you select the input channel whose set tings you want to adjust and use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the settings for that channel 1 Make sure that a mic or instrument is con nected to an INPUT jack
247. corresponding MIX channel in the Centralogic section and press the CUE key for that MIX channel 5 If you want to make detailed settings for MIX sends press the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once again When you press the currently selected TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob once again the MIX SEND popup win dow will appear The window includes the following items 00 0 9 a 1 SEND TO This indicates the number channel name and icon of the MIX bus that is currently selected as the send des tination for signals 2 buttons Use these buttons to switch between send destination buses You can switch consecutively through MIX buses 1 16 and MATRIX buses 1 8 3 Channel select button This indicates the channel number the icon selected for that channel and the channel name When you press this button that channel will be selected for operations and the corresponding SEL key will light Input channel operations M7CL Owners Manual 1 Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus 4 PRE button This button switches the position at which the signal is sent from the input channel to a VARI type MIX bus The signal is sent from the post fader position when this button is off and from the pre fader position when this button is on 5 TO MIX SEND ON OFF button These are on off switches for the signal sent from the input channels to the MIX bus 6 TO MIX SEND LEVEL kn
248. cted ene Here you can switch the on off status of the signals sent from each channel to that MATRIX bus and view the send levels a e 2 HA field input channels only This field shows the input port patched to the input chan nel the head amp gain the phantom power on off status the phase setting and the input level OVER indicator M7CL Owner s Manual 3 PATCH field output channels only For output channels the PATCH field is shown in the 2 area This field indicates the output port that is patched to the output channel If two or more output ports are patched only will be shown as a representative 4 TO ST PAN BALANCE field When an INPUT channel or monaural MIX channel is selected m This functions as an on off switch for the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO MONO bus The panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus is also shown When ST IN channel or a stereo MIX channel is selected Tm This functions as an on off switch for the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO MONO bus This also shows the balance of the left right signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus When a stereo MATRIX channel is selected This shows the balance of the left right signals sent from the MATRIX channel When a STEREO channel is selected This shows the balance of the left right signals sent from the STEREO channel 5
249. ction can be operated just like a module on an analog mixer In the center of the top panel is located the newly devel oped Centralogic section which lets you control eight channels at once You can control fader cue and on off settings for the eight channels or DCA groups recalled to this section by pressing a single key The display is a touch screen You can turn functions on off or select items sim ply by touching buttons or knobs in the screen Mix parameter settings including head amp gain and phantom power for input channels can be stored and recalled as scenes All faders on the panel are motorized moving faders so that when you recall a scene the previ ous fader locations are reproduced immediately Effects and graphic EQ that can be patched into a desired signal path High quality multi effect processors are built in with up to four available simultaneously Effects such as reverb delay multiband compression and various modulation effects can be routed via internal buses or inserted into the desired channel 31 band graphic EQ and a newly devel oped Flex15GEQ are also provided and can be inserted in any channel or output The Flex15GEQ allows you to adjust the gain for any fif teen of the thirty one bands Since two GEQ units can be mounted in the same rack a total of up to sixteen GEQ units can be used simulta neously To use effects or graphic EQ you mount them in the eight virtual racks
250. currently selected TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob once again the MATRIX SEND popup window will appear The window includes the following items D I 0 SEND TO This indicates the number channel name and 1con of the MATRIX bus that is currently selected as the send destination for signals 2 buttons Use these buttons to switch between send destination buses You can switch consecutively through MIX buses 1 16 and MATRIX buses 1 8 3 Channel select button This indicates the channel number the 1con selected for that channel and the channel name When you press this button that channel will be selected for operations and the corresponding SEL key will light 4 PRE button This button selects the location from which the signal of the input channel will be sent to the MATRIX bus The signal will be sent from POST Immediately after the ON key if this button is off The signal will be sent from the PRE EQ Immediately before the attenu ator or PRE FADER Immediately before the fader as specified in the BUS SETUP popup window if this button is on 5 TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF button These are on off switches for the signal sent from the input channels to the MATRIX bus M7CL Owners Manual Sending the signal from an input channel to the MATRIX buses 6 TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob This screen shows the send level of the signal sent from the input channels to the MATRIX bus To adjust the level operate m
251. d and the mix parameters will return to the default state a gt Be aware that when scene number 000 is loaded the input patch output patch internal effect and HA Head Amp set tings will also return to their default state However the word clock master selection is not affected Word clock connections and settings Word clock refers to the clock data that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing If you connect external equipment such as a DAW system or HDR Hard Disk Recorder to a digital I O card installed in slot 1 3 this equipment must be synchronized to the same word clock as the M7CL in order for digital audio signals to be transferred between the M7CL and the external equipment To do so set one device as the word clock master transmitting device and the other devices as the slaves receiving devices so that the slaves will synchronize to the word clock master There are two ways in which the M7CL can operate as a word clock slave that is synchronized to an externally sup plied word clock the M7CL can use the clock data included in the digital audio signal being input from a dig ital I O card or it can use a separate word clock signal supplied to the rear panel WORD CLOCK IN jack Digital audio signal Clock data stor 1 3 device word clock master M7CL word clock slave Clock data Lx data Digital
252. d immedi ately will appear To assign one of these functions to a user defined key so that a scene can be recalled in a single keystroke proceed as follows T the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen Scene memory NO D In the FUNCTION row select SCENE Proceed as follows depending on the function you want to assign To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL Choose INC RECALL or DEC RECALL in the PARAMETER 1 column To assign DIRECT RECALL Choose DIRECT RECALL in the PARAMETER 1 column and choose SCENE xxx is the scene number in the PARAMETER 2 column 2 In the upper left of the screen press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window This window includes several pages which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window 6 When you ve finished making settings press the OK button to close the popup window If desired assign scene recall functions to other user defined keys in the same way F Press the user defined key to which you assigned a recall function The corresponding scene will be recalled M7CL Owners Manual 129 Editing scene memories Editing scene memories This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory edit their titles and copy paste them Sorting and renaming scene memories You can use a dedicated window to
253. d the multifunction encoders and SEL CUE keys will control the up to eight channels shown in the OVER VIEW screen M7CL Owner s Manual The OVERVIEW screen contains the following items 1 Channel number Channel name field This shows the number name and icon for the up to eight channels selected for control in the OVERVIEW screen 2 HA PHASE field input channels only For input channels that have a rear panel input jack or external head amp device e g Yamaha AD8HR patched to them the head amp settings gain setting phantom power on off phase setting are displayed here For input channels that have another input port or rack output internal effect or GEQ patched to them informa tion on the input source port rack name and number card name and effect module name phase setting will be dis played If an output channel is selected the 2 area will change as follows THES 1 MX 1 3 OUTPUT PORT field output channels only This shows the name and number of the output port patched to each channel e f two or more output ports are patched symbol is shown after the name of one of the output ports 4 INSERT DIRECT OUT field When an input channel is selected This displays the insert or direct output on off status of each channel When an output channel is selected ee This displays the insert on off status of each channel 5 EQ field This is
254. destination for the rack For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup win dow refer to step 6 of Virtual rack operations gt p 158 The L input of the ST IN channel used as the effect return channel is now assigned to the L output of the effect If you re using the output of the effect in stereo assign the R input of the same ST IN channel to the R output of the rack in the same way 168 1 M7CL Owners Manual You can select more than one output destination for the effect 4 In the GEQ EFFECT field press the rack in which you mounted the effect The GEQ EFFECT popup window will appear allow ing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or effect D INPUT L R buttons These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ EFFECT field 2 OUTPUT L R buttons These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup window The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ EFFECT field 3 Input output meters These indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect 4 MIX BAL knob This knob adjusts the balance between the original sound and effect sound included in the output signal from the effect If you press this knob to select it you ll be able to adjust it using the corresponding mul tifunction encoder As necessary use the multifunction encoder to adjust the MIX BAL knob The MIX BAL knob adjust
255. details on the procedure gt p 55 Using the Centralogic section settings for eight channels Use the Centralogic section and the OVERVIEW screen to make head amp settings for up to eight channels This method is convenient when you want to adjust the same parameter for multiple channels at once Connect a mic or instrument to an INPUT jack For details on making connections p 39 2 Press a navigation key in the NAVIGATION KEYS section so that the input channels you want to control are assigned to the Centralogic section MATRIX 17 24 25 32 x MIX9 16 1 8 9 16 STIN STEREO 33 40 MIX1 8 46 M7CL Owner s Manual The navigation keys of the NAVIGATION KEYS sec tion select the eight channels or DCA groups that will be controlled by the Centralogic section In this sec tion the following keys correspond to input channels IN 1 8 key IN 9 16 key IN 17 24 key IN 25 32 key These keys select INPUT channels 1 8 9 16 17 24 and 25 32 respectively ST IN key This key selects ST IN channels 1 4 IN 33 40 key M7CL 48 only IN 41 48 key M7CL 48 only These keys select INPUT channels 33 40 and 41 48 respectively When you press a navigation key the OVERVIEW screen will appear in the display and the principal parameters of the up to eight selected channels are shown simultaneously You can use the key
256. detected KEY IN MIX channels 13 16 only You can send the output signals of MIX channels 13 16 to dynamics processors and use them as key in signals to control the dynamics RACK IN PATCH This patches the output signal of a MIX channel to an input of the rack OUTPUT PATCH This assigns an output port to an output channel MONITOR SELECT This selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source Specifying the channel name and icon Specifying the channel name and icon This section explains how to specify the name and icon that will be displayed in the screen for each output channel 1 Use the navigation keys to access the 3 To select the icon for the channel press the OVERVIEW screen that includes the output icon button channel whose channel name and icon you The lower part of the popup window will change as want to specify follows 52225712154 1 Icon select buttons These buttons select the icon used for this channel Output channel operations D Channel number Channel name field 2 Sample name select buttons These buttons select a sample name associated with 2 Access the PATCH NAME popup window by the currently selected icon When you press a button pressing the channel number channel that sample name will be input to the channel name name field of the channel whose channel field name icon wan ign you want to assig 4 Use the icon select bu
257. dia Centralogic section In this section you can control a group of up to eight channels or DCA groups selected in the NAVIGATION KEYS section 0 00000 er rar a a ea SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL E EIE E ETESEMNES Te CUE cci s E R ae C_Jover 2 lt 6 1 lt 6 2 6 1 6 1 6 21 6 1 6 2 2 1 12 2 12 2 12 1 12 C3 12 C3 12 2 18 1 18 2 18 1 18 1 18 1 18 1 18 C3 30 23 30 C3 30 C3 30 C3 30 2 50 1 30 C3 60 60 _ 60 C3 60 _ 60 C3 60 C3 60 N T SCENE MEMORY MONITOR section In this section you can perform operations for scene mem ory and monitoring MEMORY 11 zz MONITOR Top panel 1 Multi function encoders According to the type of screen that is currently selected these encoders control the knobs selected in the touch screen 2 SEL key These keys select the channel to be controlled When you press this key to make the LED light that channel will be selected for control in the SELECTED CHANNEL sec tion and in the touch screen 3 CUE key These keys select the channel to be cue monitored If cue is on the LED will light 4 Meter LEDs These LEDs indicate the input output level of the channel 5 ON key This switches the channel on off If a channel is on the key LED will light 6 Fader This adjusts the input output level of th
258. e bae 7 PHONES LEVEL ek es et ee l ai ST IN1 L R CUE LOGIC PHONES a i M 04 6 TEHONES L To PHONES OUT ST IN4 L R eT n T PHONES To PHONES OUT STEREO OUT L R 7 Im oe 00 17 1 STEREO OUT MONO C 940 STEREO OUT L C R ST IN1 L R n MONITOR L METER MONITOR L ovo DELAY To OUTPUT PATCH oc ST 2 L R cc 1 LL ST IN3 L R MONITOR Lt To OUTPUT PATCH z diis a STEREO MONITOR MONO mono c a a MN niin 27 ON TALKBACK ON An ouput port dala ay becomes ti eh MONITOR DIMM ON 1 MONITOR LEVEL S nng a montor ou fe ot pon MIX OUT1 16 MATRIX OUT1 8 MONITOR SELECT ON On off Selects the monitor source Switches the monitor function on off METER DELAY Monitor delay Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue Delays the monitor signal The Delay function is disabled signal if the Cue signal 1s being output DIMMER PHONES LEVEL Headphone level Attenuates the monitor cue signal by a fixed amount Adjusts the output level of only the PHONES OUT jack MONITOR LEVEL PHONES LEVEL LINK Headphone level link function This affects the output jacks that are assigned to the If this is on the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust MONITOR OUT L R C ch
259. e SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen In this screen you can view the mix parameters for the currently selected channel ES 2 In the upper left of the screen press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window This popup window lets you limit the functionality that can be used by the user and also lets you make system wide settings This window includes several pages which you can switch between using the tabs 1 MUTE field located at the bottom of the window Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page 2 Popup button The USER DEFINED KEYS page lets you assign Press this button to open the DCA MUTE GROUP functions to user defined keys 1 12 ASSIGN MODE popup window For details refer to Selecting the channels assigned to a specific mute group 3 MUTE SAFE indicator This will light if the currently selected channel is set to Mute Safe For more about mute safe refer to Using the Mute Safe function gt p 119 Here you can make mute group settings for the cur 3 rently selected channel Grouping and linking 4 Mute group select buttons 1 8 These select the mute group s to which the currently selected channel will be assigned 3 Use the mute group select buttons to select the mute group s to which the currently selected channel will be assigned multiple selections are allowed User defined keys
260. e MIDI data When you recall a scene some channels parameters are not updated You turn on a CUE button in the EFFECT PARAM screen but it is automatically defeated M7CL Owners Manual O Is the M7CL s POWER switch turned on O If the power still does not turn on contact your Yamaha dealer 15 the optional I O card installed correctly gt p 42 O Is a signal being input from the external device O Is the input port patched to an input channel p 98 O Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level p 44 55 O Is the EQ attenuator raised p 105 O Could insert be turned on even though it has not been specified correctly p 100 O Is the ON key indicator of the input channel lit O Is the fader of the input channel raised O Is the DCA fader assigned to that channel raised Could MUTE be turned on 15 the optional I O card installed correctly gt p 42 O Is the ON key indicator of the STEREO channel lit O Is an output port patched to the output channel p 95 O Could LCR be on and the CSR value be set to 1 0 p 57 O Is the PHONES knob or LEVEL knob set to an appropriate volume Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level gt p 44 55 O Is the fader of the input channel raised O Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely low setting p 105 Could the GATE COMP threshold or ratio be set to
261. e SELECTED CHANNEL section Setting the pan balance To adjust the pan balance of the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO bus use the PAN encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the TO ST PAN BALANCE field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen The TO ST PAN BALANCE field includes the fol lowing items C PAN BALANCE knob The following parameter will change according to the channel that is selected INPUT channel ST IN channel MIX MONOx2 channel MIX STEREO channel MATRIX MONOx2 channel MATRIX STEREO channel STEREO channel MONO channel 2 ST MONO button INPUT ST IN and MIX channels only This switches the on off status of the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section E 3 LCR button INPUT ST IN MIX channels only If an INPUT ST IN or MIX channel is set to LCR mode the LCR button is displayed in location 2 The LCR button is an overall on off switch for the sig nals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus To adjust the pan balance of each channel use the ST MONO button or LCR button to select the send destina tion bus and operate the PAN encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section M7CL Owners Manual 1 83 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Changing the output patching output channels only To change the output patching of an output channel in the SELECTED CHANNEL V
262. e able to use the faders of the Centralogic section to control them The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic sec tion is locked When you turn off the button in the FADER ASSIGN field it will return to the locked state Operate the faders of the Centralogic sec tion For each of a Flex 1 SGEQ s two GEQ units A and B a maximum of fifteen bands can be controlled The remaining number of bands that can be controlled is shown in realtime at the right of AVAILABLE BANDS in the FADER ASSIGN field If you have used all fifteen bands you will have to return one of these bands to the flat position before you can operate any other band Remaining number of bands The ON key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the slightest amount This indicates that the corresponding band is being modified To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position press the corresponding ON key in the Centralogic section to make it go dark M7CL Owner s Manual Graphic EQ and effects A 165 Graphic EQ operations 166 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust up to fifteen bands a gt f you switch the display to a different screen or rack the fader assignments of the Centralogic section will forcibly be defeated However if you once again display the same rack the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders 7 When yo
263. e actual values are shown in the numerical boxes below 3 FADER ASSIGN field In this field you can select the group of bands that will be controlled by the Centralogic section s faders 4 Rack select tabs These tabs switch between racks 1 8 For a rack in which a FlexI5GEQ is mounted the tabs will be split as xA and xB x is the rack number 5 INPUT button This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the input source of the rack Graphic EQ and effects M7CL Owners Manual 163 Graphic EQ operations 6 OUTPUT button This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the output destination of the rack 7 GEQ LINK button This button links adjacent GEQ units In the case of a 31 Band GEQ the GEQ units in adjacent odd num bered even numbered racks will be linked NOTE e GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible FLAT button This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB 9 GEQ ON OFF button Switches the currently selected GEQ on off 3 After you ve set the input source and out put destination correctly press the GEQ ON OFF button to turn on the 31 Band GEQ 4 Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control using the Centralogic sec tion s faders The buttons of the FADER ASSIGN field correspond to the following groups of bands ests naon
264. e channel You can also make internal settings gt 163 so that these faders are used as controllers to adjust the gain of each GEQ band Panels and controls 1 SCENE MEMORY STORE key This key stores the current mix parameter settings into a dedicated scene memory 2 SCENE MEMORY RECALL key This key recalls previously saved settings from a scene memory 3 SCENE MEMORY A V keys Use these keys to select the scene number that you want to store or recall The number of the currently selected scene is Shown in the function access area in the right of the touch screen You press the keys simulta neously to return to the current scene number 4 MONITOR LEVEL knob Adjusts the signal level of the monitor output If the PHONES LEVEL LINK function is turned on in the MONITOR screen this will also adjust the level of the front panel PHONES jack M7CL Owners Manual ll 19 Top panel USER DEFINED KEYS section i These keys execute the functions that have been assigned by the user USER DEFINED KEYS 1 User defined keys 1 12 These keys execute the functions that have been assigned by the user scene changes switching the talkback or internal oscillator on off etc STEREO MONO MASTER section In this section you can control the principal
265. e function access area Pressing the left side will select the preceding channel and pressing the right side will select the next channel 3 Use the encoders of the SELECTED CHAN dogs oll 2 RAIL ce In the NEL section and the buttons in the section SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to edit When you press a knob in the SELECTED CHAN the parameters of the selected channel NEL section the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the currently selected channel will appear If you leave this screen displayed you will always be able to view the settings in the screen while operating an encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section M7CL Owners Manual fJ 81 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 82 Subsequent operations will differ depending on the parameters you want to adjust Adjusting the send level to a MIX bus or MATRIX bus Use the TO MIX TO MATRIX field when you want to send the signal from an INPUT ST IN channel to a MIX bus or from an INPUT ST IN MIX or STEREO channel to a MATRIX bus o a 1 TO MIX TO MATRIX buttons Input channels only These buttons select the buses that will be controlled This field will show the MIX buses if the TO MIX but ton is on or the MATRIX buses if the TO MATRIX button is on 2 TO MIX TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs These knobs indicate the send level of the signal sent from that input channel to each MIX bus or MATRIX bus To adjust the va
266. e lower part of the popup window will change as follows Input channel operations Icon select buttons These buttons select the icon used for this channel 2 Sample name select buttons These buttons select a sample name associated with the currently selected icon When you press a button that sample name will be input to the channel name field Use the icon select buttons to select the icon you want to use for that channel The selected icon is shown in the icon button in the upper part of the window 5 If necessary use the sample name select buttons to select a sample name The sample name you selected will be input to the channel name field in the upper part of the window m gt You can add or edit characters in the channel name field even after you ve entered the sample name If you want to assign consecutively numbered channel names such as Vocal and Vocal2 this can be easily done by entering the sample name and then adding a number M7CL Owners Manual 1 53 Specifying the channel name and icon 54 6 If you want to enter a channel name directly or edit the sample name that was entered press the channel name field in the upper part of the window The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of the window allowing you to enter or edit the charac ters For details on how to use the keyboard window refer to p 30 M7CL Owners Manual 7 Use the SEL keys to swi
267. e of send destination shown in this field p 82 2 TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob This screen shows the send level of the signals sent from the input channels to the MIX bus These knobs are shown only when the send destination MIX bus is a VARI type To adjust the send level press the appropriate knob to select it and operate multifunction encoders 1 8 If the send destination MIX bus is set to stereo the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a PAN knob for a ST IN channel the BALANCE knob If the TO MIX SEND ON OFF button is off the knob will be dimmed 3 TO MIX SEND ON OFF button These are on off switches for the signal sent from the input channels to the MIX bus These buttons are shown only when the send destination MIX bus is a FIXED type Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus 3 Press the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired send destination MIX bus A bold frame will appear around all TO MIX SEND LEVEL knobs for that MIX bus Use multifunction encoders 1 8 to adjust the send level of the signals sent from the up to eight input channels to the selected MIX bus If necessary you can use the navigation keys to switch the input channels that are assigned to the Centralogic section and adjust the send levels from other input channels to the selected MIX bus m gt e If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MIX bus use the navigation keys to access the
268. e position from which the signal is sent from all channels to the MATRIX bus 6 Use the TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF buttons to switch the signals sent from the MIX and STEREO MONO channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus on off 7 If necessary you can use the PRE button to select the location from which the signal is sent from each channel to the MATRIX bus 8 Repeat steps 3 6 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way M7CL Owner s Manual Output channel operations Ca 77 78 1 M7CL Owners Manual Chapter 7 Operations in the SELECTED CHANINEL section This chapter explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to control the selected chan nel About the SELECTED CHANNEL section The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the left of the display corresponds to a mixer mod ule of a conventional analog mixer and allows you to manually adjust all the major parameters of the currently selected channel Operations in this section will affect the channel that was most recently selected by its SEL key For a ST IN channel or STEREO channel either the L or the R channel is selected and the major parameters are linked You can use the encoders on the panel to control mix parameters such as head amp gain HPF EQ settings the threshold setting of the dynamics processors pan balance settings and send levels to the MIX MATRIX buses E amp YAMAHA
269. e ratio fore Reverb densi Reverb and flange balance 0 ME all reverb 100 all flange THRU 21 2 Hz LN 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed Low pass filter cutoff frequency MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time Feedback gain plus values for 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTE QN to determine FREQ AF ROS ddd de d d on DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth REV FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in series Reverb and flanged reverb bal REV BAL 0 100906 ance 096 all flanged reverb 100 all reverb THRU 21 2 Hz LN 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency So SLE Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTE to determine FREQ qo HP IIT de d 4 d d 55 REV SYMPHO One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel p fono
270. e same set tings are shown with the same color in the channel display field 2 CURRENT SCENE This specifies the operations that can be performed on the current scene memory INPUT PATCH NAME Operations for input channel patch ing and names will be restricted OUTPUT PATCH NAME Operations for output channel patching and names will be restricted e BUS SETUP Operations for bus setup will be restricted RACK 1 8 Operations for the racks 1 8 will be restricted However there will be no restriction on operating the MIDI CLK button displayed for delay type and modu lation type effects or the PLAY REC button displayed for the FREEZE effect MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MASTER PUT Operations for mute group assign ment and mute group master will be restricted User Level settings 3 SCENE LIST This specifies the operations that can be performed on scene memories e STORE SORT operations RECALL operations 4 LIBRARY LIST This specifies the operations that can be performed on libraries STORE CLEAR operations RECALL operations 5 FILE LOAD This specifies the types of file that can be loaded from a USB storage device The user authentication key contains the user level user defined keys and prefer ence settings Other data is saved in an ALL file e USER SETUP user defined keys and preference set tings SYSTEM SETUP MONITOR SETUP
271. e screen to turn it on In the SELECTED CHANNEL section use the MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses e If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus use the navigation keys to access the corre sponding MATRIX channel and press the appropriate CUE key in the Centralogic section 7 You can use the top panel SEL keys to switch input channels and control the send level to the MATRIX buses in the same way Using the Centralogic section Here s how you can use the multifunction encoders of the Centralogic section to adjust the send level of the signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MATRIX bus 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals and that your monitor system or external effect etc is connected to the corresponding output port For details on assigning an output port to a MATRIX bus refer to p 95 For details on connecting an exter nal device refer to p 39 Use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel you want to control In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the TO MIX TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the MIX MATRIX bus 1 TO MIX TO MATRIX field In this field you can switch the on off status and adjust the level of the signal sent from the input channel to the MIX buses MATRIX buses Use t
272. e top part of the screen press the channel number channel name field to access the PATCH NAME popup window In the PATCH NAME popup window you can change the channel name icon and output port assigned to each output channel The window includes the follow ing items E Input output patching 5 __ 1 Icon button This indicates the icon selected for that channel When you press this button a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name 2 Channel name input box This indicates the name assigned to that channel When you press this field a keyboard window allow ing you to assign a name will appear 3 Output port button This indicates the currently selected output port If you press this button when selecting an icon or changing the channel name you will return to the output port select screen 4 Output port select tabs These tabs select the output ports shown in the popup window Each tab corresponds to the following output ports OMNI 2TR OUT OMNI OUT jacks 1 16 and the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack will be displayed SLOT 1 SLOT Output channels 1 16 of slots 1 3 will be displayed M7CL Owners Manual 1 95 Changing the output patch settings 96 RACK The input ports of rack 1 8 will be displayed For details on the GEQ refer to p 161 5 Output port select buttons These buttons assign an output port to the currently selected output c
273. ecall Safe does not affect channel link When you recall a scene the link status will always be reproduced T In the function access area press the CH JOB button eum CH LINK button 1 Channel display field When you create a link group the corresponding channels will be highlighted If there are two or more link groups each group is shown in a different color All parameters of ST IN channel L R are always linked 2 LINK PARAMETER field Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to be linked These settings are shared by all link groups 3 SEND PARAMETER field If you have turned on the MIX ON MIX SEND MATRIX ON or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field use the buttons of this field to specify the send destination bus es 2 Press the CH LINK button to open the CH LINK MODE popup window In this popup window you can view the channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be linked The window includes the following items 120 1 M7CL Owners Manual 3 Use the buttons of the LINK PARAMETER field to select the parameter s that will be linked multiple selections are allowed The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field EQbuton EQ settings including ATT HPF DYNAMICS 1 2 button Dynamics 1 and 2 settings MIX ON button On off status of signals sent to MIX buses Send levels of signals sent to MIX
274. ecified in the MIDI SETUP page will be ignored When a program change is received the event assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and pro gram number in the list will be executed When you execute the specified event on the M7CL the program change of the corresponding MIDI chan nel and program number in the list will be transmit ted Single mode when the SINGLE button is on Only program changes of the transmit Tx and receive Rx channels specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be transmitted and received When a program change on the Rx channel is received the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding channel in the list will be exe cuted When you execute the specified event on the M7CL the program change of the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list If an event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel the lowest numbered program number will be transmitted If you turn on the OMNI button BANK button in single mode operation will change as follows When the OMNI button is M Program changes of all MIDI chan nels will be received However regardless of the MIDI channel that is received the event assigned to the corresponding program number of the Rx channel will be executed Turning on the OMNI button will not change the operation for program change transmission When the BANK button is on T
275. ect it and turn the corresponding multifunction encoder M7CL Owners Manual For details on the parameters of each effect type refer to the supplementary material at the end of this manual p 229 5 Edit the settings in the special parameter field as necessary For some effect types parameters such as the follow ing will appear in the special parameter field TEMPO This is shown if a tempo type or modulation type effect is selected 1 MIDI CLK button If you turn this button on the BPM parameter of that effect will be set to match the tempo of the MIDI tim ing clock being input from the MIDI port PLAY REC This is shown if FREEZE is selected as the effect type 1 PLAY button REC button These buttons are used to record sample and play back when using the freeze effect For details on how to use this refer to Using the Freeze effect gt p 175 e SOLO This is shown if M BAND DYNA or M BAND COMP is selected as the effect type 1 HIGH MID LOW buttons These buttons pass only the selected frequency band multiple selections are allowed 2 Gain reduction meters These show the amount of gain reduction for each band 6 If you want to monitor only the output sig nal of the currently displayed effect press the EFFECT CUE button to turn it on Even if the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE mode in which all channels whose CUE keys are on will be mixed for mon
276. ection mixes the signals sent from input channels etc and sends them to the corresponding output ports or output buses There are three types of output channel as follows MIX channels 1 16 These channels process the signals sent from input chan nels to the MIX buses and send them from the output ports These are used mainly to send signals to the monitor system or to external effects The signals of MIX channels 1 16 can also be sent to the STEREO bus MONO bus or MATRIX buses When the M7CL is in the default state the following out put ports are assigned MIX channels 1 12 OMNI OUT jacks 1 12 MIX channels 1 8 Slot 1 output channels 1 8 9 16 MIX channels 9 16 Slot 2 output channels 1 8 9 16 MATRIX channels 1 8 These channels process the signals that are sent from input channels MIX channels STEREO channel and MONO channel to the MATRIX buses and send them from the output ports Using the STEREO and MONO buses dif ferent combinations of signals and mix balances can be sent out from the M7CL When the M7CL is in the default state the following out put ports are assigned MATRIX channels 1 2 OMNI OUT jacks 13 14 MATRIX channels 1 8 Slot 3 output channels 1 8 9 16 STEREO channel MONO channel These channels process the signals that are sent from the input channels or MIX channels and send them to the cor responding output port These channels are used as the main stereo output and monaura
277. ed M7CL Owners Manual J 153 Operations in the METER screen 154 In the METER screen you can view the following information for each channel 1234586078 1 Level meter This is a realtime indication of the input or output level of the corresponding channel The segment will light if any of the level detection points in each channel reach the OVER level The segment level detection points are as follows Input channels PRE HPF PRE FADER POST ON Output channels PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON If X is lit you can switch the metering point to determine the point at which the overload is occurring 2 Fader This is a realtime indication of the top panel fader position for the corresponding channel The fader in the screen cannot be operated 3 Fader level This indicates the current fader value in a range of to 10 M7CL Owner s Manual 2 If necessary you can press a metering point select button to switch the metering point The metering point for the level meter can be specified independently for input channels and output channels You can choose the following metering points Input channels PRE Immediately before the high pass fil ter e PRE FADER Immediately before the fader POST Immediately after the ON key Output channels e PRE E Q Immediately before the attenuator e PRE FADER Immedia
278. ed in the MODE field The knobs shown in the parameter field can be operated using the corresponding multifunction encoders The following table shows the available oscillator types and the parameters displayed for each type Parameters LEVEL LEVEL HPF LPF LEVEL HPF LPF WIDTH INTERVAL Oscillator type SINE WAVE 1CH PINK NOISE BURST NOISE e The LEVEL parameter can also be adjusted using the LEVEL knob in the MONITOR screen Details of each parameter are shown in the following table Parameters Details LEVEL Oscillator output level Frequency of the sine wave output from FREQ the oscillator High pass filter on off switch cutoff fre HPF quency Low pass filter on off switch cutoff fre LPF quency WIDTH Length of noise Length of silence between intervals of INTERVAL noise Level INTERVAL Pink noise output gt a WIDTH Time The BURST NOISE button is on D Press a button in the ASSIGN field to spec ify the bus es to which the oscillator signal will be sent multiple selections are allowed These buttons correspond to the following buses MIX 1 16 buttons MIX buses 1 16 MTRX 1 8 buttons MATRIX buses 1 8 ST L ST R buttons STEREO bus L R MONO C button MONO bus You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections M7CL Owner s Manual 6 To enable the oscillator press the OUTPUT button to turn it
279. eer z TT Ty STEREO CASCADEOUTLRMONO C output parc SLOT 2 1 16 H 4 H JGDUTRUTPITCH CASCADE IL HI TTE TIT T SLOT 3 1 16 To OUTPUT PATCH IN i SELECT To OUTPUT PATCH Bam 0 tt Toourpur parce SUECASCADEQUTLR gt ROMS SS SS SS To OUTPUT PATCH TALKBACK B D D S D E S HE HE T A ee eee IH j MIX 1 16 KK To RACKIN PATCH ro oUTPUTPATCH Te OUTPUT PATCH I FADER INSERT OUT INSERT OUT 1 16 lt 8 EQ INSERT OUT MIX INPUT INSERTIN 1 16 BREED EQOUT DYNAOUT PREEADER POST ON INPUT LEVEL 1 32 48 13 16 _ B INSERITI arr 4 BAND INSERT 3 MIX OUTI 16 TRACK PATCH CH 1 32 48 EQ EXPAND i ToOUTPUT PATCH To RACKIN PATCH INSERT POINT PRE FADER To MONITOR SELECT To OUTPUT PATCH POSTEQ PRE FADER 07 INSERT OUT 1 24 PRE EQ SERT QUT PRE HPF PRE EQ PRE FADER Keyin INSERT OUT SERT OUT 1 32 48 1 PRE EQ CH PAN POST PAN L INSERT OUT x ger HOSTED EQ MIX18 16 OUT INSERT IN 1 32 48 F PRE EQ EQOUT DYNAIOUT DYNA2OUT PRE FADER POSTON CUE ON 1 8 9 16 LRMONOS TO MONQJOST 205 sth PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL C QO T_T 11 il 2
280. el there is a channel strip for INPUT channels 33 48 located at the right side of the front panel YAMAHA 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 Channel strip for INPUT channels 1 32 2 Channel strip for INPUT channels 33 48 8 11 e M7CL Owners Manual 11 Differences between the M7CL
281. elay balance 0 all early reflected delay 100 all delay THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency S Hall L Hall Ran dom Revers Plate Type of early reflection simulation Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteris tics 0 dead 10 live OFF ON to determine left channel DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY GE HIS RIS Fe 4 4 4 d dss Maximum value depends on the tempo setting FB GAIN 99 to 99 RATIO 0 1 1 0 DLY BAL 0 100 LIVENESS 0 10 INI DLY DENSITY SYNC NOTE L NOTER NOTE FB DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in parallel Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY HI 101 10 Delay high frequency feedback ratio Delay and reverb balance 0 DEGREV all delay 100 all reverb THRU 21 2 Hz LN 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz wk NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTER 1 to determine right channel DELAY R Used in conjunction with TEMPO MONETE UN to determine FB DLY 1 GE HIS RIS Fe h 4
282. eld by pressing it e If you press a field to highlight the selected item you can turn any of the multifunction encoders to select the event or scene library number 10 Assign events to other program numbers in the same way With these settings executing the specified event on the M7CL will cause the corresponding program change or bank select program change message to be transmitted to the external device When an external device transmits a program change or bank select program change message on the appropriate channel the event assigned to that pro gram number of the corresponding MIDI channel or bank number will be executed You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to program numbers The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all program number assignments to their default state Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system rather than for individual scenes e In Single mode if the same event is assigned to more than one program number on a Tx channel only the lowest pro gram number will be transmitted If the BANK button is on only the program number of the lowest bank number will be transmitted e In Multi mode if the same event is assigned to more than one MIDI channel and more than one program number only the lowest program number on each MIDI channel will be trans mitted Using control changes to control parameters Using control c
283. end level of the signal sent from the MIX or STEREO MONO channel to the MATRIX buses To adjust the send level press the appropriate knob to select it and operate multifunction encoders 1 8 If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a PAN knob for stereo MIX channels or for the STE REO channel the BALANCE knob 3 Press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired send destination MATRIX bus A bold frame will appear around all TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs for that MATRIX bus Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses Use multifunction encoders 1 8 to adjust the send level of the signals sent from up to eight MIX channels or the STEREO MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus If necessary you can use the navigation keys and the SEL keys of the Centralogic section to switch the send destination channel m gt e If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus use the navigation keys to access the corre sponding MATRIX channel in the Centralogic section and press the CUE key for that MATRIX channel 5 If you want to make detailed settings for MATRIX sends press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once again When you press the currently selected TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob once again the MATRIX SEND popup window will appear The window includes the following items
284. ending unit the cascade slave to the input ports of the receiving unit the cascade master The following illustration shows an example in which three eight channel digital I O cards for each unit are installed in the cascade slave M7CL and in the cascade master M7CL and the DIGITAL OUT jacks of the send ing unit connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiv ing unit Audio signals Audio signals of A B of unit A E DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL M7CLA Cascade master Cascade slave Digital VO card In this example up to twenty four buses chosen from MIX bus 1 16 MATRIX bus 1 8 STEREO bus L R MONO C bus and CUE bus L R can be shared and the mixed signals transmitted from the cascade master M7CL If you use sixteen channel digital I O cards you ll be able to share all buses You do not need to make settings on each M7CL to spec ify the slot channel to which each bus is assigned The procedure below is given separately for the cascade slave and the cascade master a gt e If youre cascade connecting the M7CL with the PM5D you can use the M7CL as the cascade slave if you set the PM5D s CAS CADE IN PORT SELECT to a slot However only the audio sig nals will be cascaded and the control signals cannot be linked e You can also use an AD DA card to make cascade connections with an analog mixer There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade con nected but the
285. entered match the Administrator password will be set 1 In the function access area press the For details on entering a password refer to Entering SETUP button to access the SETUP screen names gt p 30 PASSWORD CHANGE button 2 Press the PASSWORD CHANGE button A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter a password 192 1 M7CL Owners Manual Creating a user authentication key Here s how to create a user authentication key and save it on a USB storage device A user authentication key can be created only by an Administrator or Power User The user level can be specified when the authentication key 15 cre ated but the user defined key settings and preference set tings will be carried over from the user who is currently logged in Connect a USB storage device to the USB connector 2 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen CREATE USER KEY button 3 Press the CREATE USER KEY button The CREATE USER KEY popup window will appear E rumes 1 USER Here you can specify or view user name of up to eight characters Press this to access a keyboard win dow where you can enter the user name 2 COMMENT Here you can specify or view a comment of up to thirty two characters about the user Press this to access a keyboard window where you can enter the comment 3 PASSWORD Specify a password of up to eight charact
286. er of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when Parameter change ECHO is on STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010001 00000000 01000011 01101000 01101100 01010000 01101001 01110010 01000011 01110000 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Osssssss FO 43 1n 3E TL 00 Cr 1 p Inm Inm SS System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Digital mixer M7CL OTHER DATA ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE Source Channel Number H 1 MIDI Data Format 4 9 Level Meter Data 4 9 1 Format Parameter change When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter the corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds If metering information is expected to be continuously sent Request is needed to be sent in at least every 10 seconds Receive The data will be echoed when Parameter change ECHO is ON Transmission When transmission is enabled by receiving Request the corresponding metering data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time The interval and time will vary depending on devices When rebooted or p
287. ere s how to cut one or more scenes When you cut a scene the scenes of subsequent numbers will move for ward If you cut a single scene you ll be able to paste or insert it at the desired location Press the SCENE field in the function access area The SCENE LIST window will appear 2 Turn any one of the multifunction encoders to select the scene number that you want to cut and press the CUT button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Cut opera tion NOTE You may select multiple scenes to be cut If you cut multiple scenes the scenes of the selected region will be cut and the subsequent scenes will move forward by the corresponding number f you intend to paste or insert a scene you must select only one scene to cut e The CUT button cannot be used if the scene list is sorted in any other way than by the NO column 3 To execute the Cut operation press the OK button The scene s you selected in step 2 will be cut and the scenes of subsequent numbers will be moved forward At this time the scene that was cut will be held in the buffer memory unless two or more scenes were cut NOTE Read only scenes or write protected scenes cannot be cut 4 If desired you can paste gt p 132 or insert the cut scene that was held in the buffer memory Be aware that if you copy or cut a different scene before you paste or insert the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite t
288. errun USB Rx Buffer Full USB Tx Buffer Full Wrong Password Wrong Word Clock You Cannot Create User Key Meaning Invalid signals are being input to the REMOTE connector Too much data is being received at the REMOTE connector Too much data is being sent from the REMOTE connector Saving to the USB storage device has been interrupted Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port Too much data is being sent from the SLOT x output port Warning Error Messages The file could not be saved because there is not enough space on the USB storage device The USB storage device could not be recognized Access is not possible because the USB storage device is not ready The M7CL is not synchronized with the xxx signal Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission More than 15 bands are used when trying to copy 31band GEQ and then compare with 15 More than 15 bands are used when trying to copy 31band GEQ and then paste to Flex15GEQ The I O cards installed in the slots exceed the rated power capacity The file you attempted to load from the USB storage device is of an unsupported format Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port Inv
289. ers DYNA FILTER Two input two output dynamically controlled filter Control source input signal or DOUG MIDI Note On SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity oro UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY A ss Filter frequency change decay 1 6 0 ms 46 0 5 fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz DYNA FLANGE Two input two output dynamically controlled flanger Control source input signal or SOURCE INPS MIDI MIDI Note On ETT RR SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity ra UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change OFFSET 0 100 Delay time offset Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback 700 H800 khz EQ peaking type requency 10000 tQ peaking type bandwidth 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz M7CL Owner s Manual v 9 C Q Q lt 233 Effects Parameters 234 DYNA PHASER Two input two output dynamically controlled phaser Control source input signal or SOURCE ENPU T MIDI MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity rog UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback STAGE AU Sd Ty Number of phase shift stages 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5
290. ers Press this to access a keyboard window where you can enter the password User Level settings 4 POWER USER Specifies whether Power User privileges will be granted to this user 5 ACCESS PERMISSION These settings specify the range of operations that the user can perform For details on each item refer to p 196 4 When you have specified the user name comment password power user privileges on off and user rights press the CREATE button If you are logged in as the Administrator the user authentication key will be saved on the USB storage device If you are logged in as a Power User a dialog box will ask you to confirm the store destination USB storage device If you want to save the user authentication key on a different USB storage device connect the desired USB storage device and then press OK The user authentication key will be saved and the logged in user will automatically switch to the newly created user Logging in In order to operate the M7CL you must log in as the Administrator Guest or a User User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the console itself but in order to log in as a User you must connect a USB storage device on which a user authentica tion key has been saved If you disconnect the USB stor age device after logging in your access privileges will forcibly revert to Guest NOTE f the M7CL S power is turned off and then on again it will gener
291. et correctly p 95 O Is the MIX SEND key turned on O Is the MIX ON key turned on Is the MIX bus set to VARI type gt p 212 O If the send point is set to POST could the fader have been lowered O Are you attempting to save the data to a read only scene library or a protected scene p 125 O Is the USB storage device protected O Does the USB storage device have enough free capacity to save the data O When formatting the USB storage device format it in FAT32 or FAT16 format O Is the MIDI PORT selected correctly p 182 O Are the mode and channel selected correctly on the transmitting and receiving devices p 182 Has an event been assigned for the program change gt 184 O Could that channel or parameter be set to Recall Safe Could Focus be turned off in the scene you recalled Could user level restrictions have been specified p 135 136 196 O This is defeated automatically when you switch screens in the display gt p 171 Troubleshooting General Specifications When you recall a scene it takes a certain amount of time for the faders to O Could you have specified a fade time p 139 stop The panel LEDs or LCD display are too dark too bright O This can be adjusted in the SETUP screen gt p 215 O Could the EQ gain be turned down excessively Signal level of a specific frequency is O Routing a signal through a GEQ or effect will delay it relative to other signals I
292. eter will be auto matically re linked the next time it is operated The Recall Safe function can be used in conjunction with the Focus function gt p 136 Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled e f you perform a Recall operation while holding down a SEL key the Recall Safe settings of that channel will temporarily be abled for that Recall operation Using the Fade function Using the Fade function Fade is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels and DCA groups to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene The settings of the Fade function are made independently for each scene 1 Press the SCENE field in the function 2 SET buttons access area These buttons display the FADE TIME popup win dow The SCENE LIST window will appear where you can perform various operations for scene memory 8 FADING buttons These buttons switch the Fade function on off for each scene 4 Fade time These indicate the fade time the time over which the fader will reach the new value D 3 Press the SET button to access the FADE TIME popup window D SCENE field In this popup window you can select the channel to 2 FADE TIME tab which Fade will be applied and adjust the fade time 2 Press the FADE TIME tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window You can use tabs to switch the right half of the S
293. ettings for talkback 0 TALKBACK IN field 48V button This is an on off switch for the phan tom power 48V supplied to the TALKBACK jack TALKBACK jack level IO This indicates the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack 2 INPUT TO TALKBACK field Input select button Opens the INPUT PORT SELECT popup window where you can select the INPUT jack used for talk back CM This is an on off switch for the phan tom power 48V supplied to the INPUT jack used for talkback GAIN knob Adjusts the input sensitivity of the INPUT jack used for talkback Use the corresponding multifunction encoder to make this adjustment You can also use the MONITOR screen GAIN knob to adjust this Input level Indicates the input level of the mic connected to the INPUT jack used for talkback 3 TALKBACK ON button Switches talkback on off This operation can also be performed using the MONITOR screen TALKBACK ON button 4 ASSIGN field Selects the bus es to which the talkback signal will be sent You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections 3 Connect a mic to the front panel TALKBACK jack and turn the TALKBACK GAIN knob to adjust the input sensitivity of the mic The meter in the TALKBACK IN field indicates the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack If you want phantom power 48V to be sup plied to the TALKBACK jack turn on the 48V but ton lo
294. ever if the DELAY or FREQ were changed the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall the M7CL does not update the DELAY or FREQ value when an effect is recalled even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values daa 1 48 AM 1 24 1 16 ddd 1 12 Fa 3 32 J 1 8 ddd 1 6 3 16 d 1 4 J 3 8 d 1 2 4 3 4 m 1 1 2 1 M7CL Owner s Manual Scene Memory Effect Library to Program Change Table Scene Memory Effect Library to Program Change Table Preset Bank Ch 1 Preset Bank Ch 2 Program Scene Program Scene 00 oos 006 007 008 009 0200 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 d oe 035 036 _ 037 038 039 040 04 042 043 044 045 046 _ 047 048 049 050 051 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 M7CL Owners Manual 241 Program Scene Appendices Scene Memory Effect Library to Program Change Table Preset Bank Ch 3 Preset Bank Ch 4 Program Scene
295. evice number included in the transmitted parameter change does not match the device number of the receiving M7CL console the message will be ignored If parameter change and control change transmission recep tion are turned on at the same time a large amount of data Will flood the MIDI port and cause overflows or other prob lems so you should avoid this D Use the Tx button and Rx button of the PARAMETER CHANGE field to turn on parameter change transmission reception In this state when you operate specific parameters on the M7CL the corresponding parameter change mes sages will be transmitted If valid parameter change messages are transmitted from an external device the parameters assigned to those parameter changes will be controlled MIDI M7CL Owners Manual 189 190 1 M7CL Owners Manual Chanter 18 User settings Security This chapter explains the User Level settings that allow restrictions on the parameters that can be operated by each user the Console Lock function that temporarily disables operation of the console the Preferences settings that allow the operating environment to be customized and Save Load oper ations using USB storage devices User Level settings User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that be operated by each user or to change the settings of user defined keys and preference settings for each user Settings for each user can be stored as a user authenticat
296. f a specific input channel can be moved to a different input channel When you execute a Move opera tion the numbering of the channels between the move source and move destination will move forward or back ward by one Move 115121314 gt Move by one You can move settings between the following combina tions of channels Between INPUT channels Between ST IN channels T In the function access area press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB menu 9 MOVE button 2 Press the MOVE button to access the CH MOVE MODE popup window This popup window lets you move channel settings Copying moving or initializing a channel 1 SOURCE field This indicates the move source channel You can press this field to cancel the channel that is shown 2 DESTINATION CH field This indicates the move destination channel You can press this field to cancel the channel that is shown 8 MOVE Executes the move To select the move source channel press the corresponding SEL key to make it light The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window When you select the move source channel the DES TINATION CH field will automatically be embold ened allowing you to select the move destination If you want to re select the move source channel press the SOURCE CH field NOTE Settings for the Move operation can be made only in the order of move source gt mo
297. f the send destination MIX bus is assigned as stereo the left knob of the two adjacent TO MIX SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MIX PAN knob for a ST IN channel it will operate as the TO MIX BALANCE knob M7CL Owners Manual LEUEL For an INPUT channel the right knob will adjust the common send level to the two MIX buses and the left knob will adjust the panning between the two MIX buses Turning the left TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob toward the left will increase the amount of signal sent to the odd numbered MIX bus and turning it toward the right will increase the amount sent to the even numbered MIX bus For a ST IN channel the right knob adjusts the com mon send level for the two MIX buses and the left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right signals sent to the two MIX buses Turning the left TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob toward the left will increase the amount of signal sent from the L channel to the odd numbered MIX bus and turning it toward the right will increase the amount sent from the R channel to the even numbered MIX bus e If necessary the TO MIX PAN TO MIX BALANCE knob set ting can be linked with operations of the TO ST PAN TO ST BALANCE knob shown in the STEREO MONO field of the OVERVIEW screen gt p 212 Make sure that the TO MIX SEND ON OFF button is turned on for the send destination MIX bus If this button is off press the button in the screen to turn it on In the SELECTED CH
298. f the window when an effect is shown in the GEQ EFFECT popup win dow LIBRARY button For details on using the library refer to Using libraries gt 31 e Library items using the or FREEZE effect types can be recalled only into rack 5 or 7 They cannot be recalled into rack 6 or 8 You can also use MIDI messages program changes to recall effect settings from the library gt p 184 Using an external head amp Using an external head amp If you connect an external head amp that supports remote control via a dedicated protocol Yamaha AD8HR to the M7CLs REMOTE connector you will be able to remotely control param eters such as the phantom power 48V gain and HPF of each channel from the M7CL Alternatively you can use daisy chain connection to External head amp connections remotely control multiple ADSHR units simultaneously Here we will give the example of connecting the Yamaha To do this connect the ADSHR s HA REMOTE 2 connec ADSHR tor to the second AD8HR s HA REMOTE 1 connector If you use three Yamaha MY 16 AE units you can connect In order to remotely control the ADSHR from the M7CL up to six ADSHR units use an RS422 D sub9 pin cable to connect the REMOTE connector located on the M7CL s rear panel to the ADS8HR s HA REMOTE 1 connector This connection Audio signals allows the M7CL to remotely control the ADSHR Remote signals
299. f this signal is mixed with low the signal via a different signal path a comb filtering effect will cause the level of a specific frequency to be decreased O Is the external head amp connected to the REMOTE connector Is the audio output signal of the external head amp being input via an I O card to SLOT 1 3 conio am external nead amp O Is the input port of the external head amp set correctly ADEHR O Could there be a problem with the cable that connects the M7CL and external head amp Are you using a D sub 9 pin cross cable Can t control the M7CL by M7CL Refer to M7CL Editor installation guide on our web site Editor http www yamahaproaudio com In the LCD display there are some black points unlit or white points O Unfortunately this is a common characteristic of TFT LCDs and not a malfunction always lit General Specifications Sampling Frequency no 44 1 kHz 48 kHz xternal 44 1 kHz 10 to 48 kHz 6 Signal Delay Less than 2 5 ms INPUT to OMNI OUT Fs 48 kHz Fader 100mm motorized x62 46 Fader Resolution 10 to 138 dB 1024 steps 100 mm Maximum Voltage Gain 86 dB INPUT1 48 to OMNI OUT Crosstalk 1kHz 80 dB Adjacent Input Channels INPUT1 48 ST IN 1 4 L GAIN min to OMNI OUT 1 16 M7CL 48 1274 x 286 x 701 mm W xH xD M7CL 32 1060 x 286 x 701 mm W x H x D M7CL 48 50kg M7CL 32 42 kg M7CL 48 300 W 110 240 V 50 60 Hz M7CL 32 250 W 110 240 V 50 60 Hz Operatio
300. fic MATRIX bus first select the send destination MATRIX channel and then access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen If you have selected a MATRIX channel the FROM MIX field is shown at the left edge of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen This field includes the following items T e a e a a a 1 MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs These adjust the send level of the signal sent from each MIX channel to the selected MATRIX bus 2 TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF buttons These are on off switches for the signal sent from each MIX channel to the MATRIX bus To adjust the send level to a MATRIX bus turn the corre sponding MIX MATRIX encoder in the SELECTED CHANNEL section they are color coded as in the screen If desired you can use the TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF buttons to switch the signal sent from each MIX channel to the MATRIX bus on off Above each of these buttons is shown the position from which the signal is sent from the MIX channel For details on changing the send position gt p TT e Making HA settings input channels only To control the head amp HA assigned to an INPUT ST IN channel you will use the HA encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the HA field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen The HA field includes the following items 1 GAIN knob This indicates the gain of the head amp assigned to the channel To adjust the value use the HA encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section 2
301. for Insert or Direct Output press the INSERT DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window 8 ch For details on the popup window gt p 100 e Making ATT HPF EQ settings In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the EQ graph field to make settings for the ATT attenuation HPF high pass filter and EQ of each channel When you press the EQ graph field the ATT HPF EQ popup window 1 ch will appear In this window you can use the on screen buttons and the multifunction encoders to control all of the ATT HPF EQ parameters For details on the popup window gt p 105 Operations in the Centralogic section e Making Dynamics 1 2 settings In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 fields to make Dynamics 1 2 settings for each channel These fields include the following items CD Input level meter This green bar graph shows the level of the signal after it has passed through dynamics processing 2 GR meter This orange bar graph indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the dynamics processor 3 Threshold The vertical line indicates the currently specified threshold value and its approximate position in the GR meter Only if GATE is selected as the type the 2 3 areas will change as follows Yellow Hed 4 GR meter This indicator shows the operating status of the gate The following segments will light according to the presence or absence of signal
302. g to paste channel settings of a different type Cannot Recall to Different Parameter Type You attempted to recall a library of a different type Cannot Recall Failed to recall a scene memory or library Cannot Select This Channel You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason Cannot Store Failed to store a scene memory or library Cannot Undo You pressed the UNDO button when Undo was not available Channel Copied Channel settings have been copied Channel Initialized Channel settings have been initialized Channel Moved Channel settings have been moved Couldn t Access File File on the USB storage device could not be accessed for some reason Couldn t Write File File could not be saved from the USB storage device Current User Changed xxx Current user was changed to xxx Directory Not Empty You attempted to delete a directory but failed because there were files remaining in the directory EFFECT CUE Turned Off CUE was defeated because you switched from the EFFECT popup window to a different screen External HA connection conflict External HA connection status is different so that External HA data cannot be recalled The PW800W power supply connected to the M7CL has stopped operating Alternatively some other i External Power Supp YIS problem has occurred If a malfunction has occurred please contact your Yamaha dealer The following operation has
303. ge ECHO is on the message will be sent as it is STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011 n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010001 11 M CL DATA 00100001 21 REMOTE LEVEL METER CATEGORY DATA Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL ch Count H cl CountL EOX 11110111 F7 End ofexclusive v 9 Q Q lt 261 M7CL Owner s Manual Warning Error Messages Warning Error Messages Message Meaning No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall or the data has been damaged so that l Scene xxx is Empty it cannot be recalled Scene xxx is Protected You attempted to overwrite store a protected scene Scene xxx is Read Only You attempted to overwrite store a read only scene xxx Parameters Copied Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer xxx Parameters Initialized Parameter xxx was initialized xxx Parameters Pasted Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy Buffer Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer Cannot Assign You attempted to assign an output channel to DCA Cannot Bookmark This Popup This popup window cannot be bookmarked Cannot Paste to Different Parameter Type Paste cannot be performed because you are attemptin
304. gnal gt p 55 2 Use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel you want to send to the STEREO MONO bus CD STEREO MONO field 3 In the STEREO MONO field press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust and then press the knob once again to access the TO STEREO MONO popup window In the TO STEREO MONO popup window you can control the signal that is sent from the input channel to the STEREO MONO bus You can view this popup window as two types 8ch and ALL use the tabs below the window to switch between them These windows include the following items TO STEREO MONO popup window 8 ch Here you can control the on off and pan balance set tings of the signal sent from input channels to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus in groups of eight channels M7CL Owners Manual 57 1 Channel select button This shows the 1con channel number and channel name for the channel When you press this button that channel will be selected for operations and the corre sponding SEL key will light 2 MODE button This button selects either ST MONO mode or LCR mode as the way in which the signal will be sent to the STEREO bus or MONO bus This mode can be speci fied individually for each channel The two modes will alternate each time you press the button An indicator ST MONO or LCR immediately above the button will light to indicate the currently selected mode
305. gnal assigned to the output port between normal phase black and reverse phase orange ATT knob Adjusts the amount of attenuation for the signal assigned to the output port To adjust this value press the knob in the screen to select it and operate multi function encoders 1 8 You can adjust the setting in 0 1 dB steps over a range of 96 to 24 dB The cur rent value is shown immediately below the knob 9 Level meter This meter indicates the level of the signal assigned to the output port Output port select tabs These tabs switch the output ports controlled in the popup window in groups of up to eight ports Use the output port select tabs at the bot tom of the popup window to select the out put port you want to control Each tab corresponds to the following output ports Changing the output patch settings OMNI 1 8 9 16 These control OMNI OUT jacks 1 8 and 9 16 respectively SLOT1 1 8 9 16 2 1 8 9 16 1 8 9 16 These control output channels 1 8 9 16 of slots 1 3 respectively e 2TR OUT Control the L R channels of the 2TR OUT DIGI TAL jack 4 To assign a channel to an output port press the channel select popup window for that port The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear The popup window includes the following items Input output patching 1 Channel select tabs These select the type of channel shown in the popup window Each ta
306. hanges to control parameters You can use MIDI control change messages to control specified events fader encoder opera tions ON key on off operations etc on the M7CL This capability can be used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device and play back this data later You can use control changes to control events in either of the following two ways Using control changes This method uses typical control changes control numbers 1 31 33 95 102 119 You can freely assign an event to each control number Using NRPN Non Registered Parameter Number This method uses a special type of control change messages called NRPN NRPN uses control change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB Most Significant Byte and LSB Least Significant Byte of the parameter number and subsequently transmitted control change messages of control change number 6 or 6 and 38 to specify the value of that parameter The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre defined and cannot be changed For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages refer to the appendix gt p 249 Connect the M7CL to your external device 2 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen In the center of the screen press the MIDI button to access the MIDI popup window 4 Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page and select the port and MIDI channel on
307. hannel 6 Tabs Use these tabs to switch between items Use the output port select tabs and the out put port select buttons to specify the out put port that will be assigned to that channel If the output port select buttons are not shown at the bottom of the window press the PATCH tab Use the navigation keys and the SEL keys to switch the output channels being con trolled and specify their output ports in the same way When you have finished making settings press the x symbol located in the upper right to close the window You will return to the OVERVIEW screen M7CL Owners Manual Selecting the output channel for each output port Here s how you can select the output channel that will be the output source for each output port 1 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen OUTPORT SETUP button 2 In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the screen press the OUTPORT SETUP button to open the OUTPUT PORT popup window In the OUTPUT PORT popup window you can assign the source channel for each output port The popup window includes the following items 1 Slot number Card type If an output channel of slot 1 3 is selected for opera tions this shows the slot number and the type of I O card installed in that slot 2 DELAY SCALE field Here you can select the units for the delay time shown below the delay time knob 5 METER
308. hannel Hack 5 EFFECT Output of the output channel Input of the input channel OUTPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH EFFECT Alternatively you can assign the input and output of the internal effect to the insert out in of a desired channel except for a ST IN channel so that the effect is inserted into that channel Insert out of a Insert in of a EFFECT desired channel Except for a ST IN channel desired channel The internal effects fall into two categories STEREO type 2 in 2 out effects that process the L R channel input signals independently and MIX type 1 in 2 out effects that mix the two channels before processing them If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect the way in which the L R channels are processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is selected as follows STEREO type effects INPUTL 4 EFFECTL L RETURN INPUT R 94 EFFECTR R RETURN MIX type effects INPUT L L RETURN EFFECT INPUT R RETURN If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two input effect it will be processed as mono in stereo out regard less of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected L RETURN INPUT EFFECT LorR R RETURN Graphic EQ and effects M7CL Owners Manual 167 About the internal effects Using an internal effect via send return Here we will explai
309. hannel L R and MONO channel Operating the corresponding fader will change the value in realtime NOTE p 4 INPUT channels 1 32 11 48 If the CUE meter is shown the METER field pressing the Thi indicasse disce CUE meter will forcibly defeat the cue that is currently turned hdd c E on the INPUT channels Operating the corresponding fader will change the value in realtime METER field Meters A Cn If the CUE meter is not shown in the METER field pressing the CUE meter will switch to the METEH screen B ST IN channels 1 4 This area indicates the input levels and fader values of METER screen the ST IN channels Operating the corresponding fader will change the value in realtime 6 Centralogic fader levels This area indicates the fader values of the channel DCA group assigned to the Centralogic section Oper ating the corresponding fader will change the value in realtime 7 Metering point select buttons for output channels Use these three buttons to select the metering point for output channels SESE Metering point select buttons for input channels Use these three buttons to select the metering point for input channels 9 PEAK HOLD button If this button is on the peak level of the meters will be held When you turn this button off the peak level indication that had been held will be clear
310. hannels to eight groups so that the Centralogic section faders 1 8 be used to control the level of all channels in each group A single DCA fader will control the level of all input channels belonging to the same DCA group while maintaining the level difference between the channels This provides a convenient way in which drum mics etc can be grouped Mute groups allow you to use user defined keys 1 12 to mute unmute multiple channels in a single operation You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously Mute groups 1 8 can be used with both input channels and output channels Both types of channel can exist in the same group Using DCA groups This section explains how to assign input channels to the eight DCA groups and use the faders of the Centralogic section to control them Grouping and linking IM Selecting the channels that will belong Assigning channels to a DCA iod specific DCA Group group T In the function access area press the CH To assign a channel to a DCA group you can either select JOB button a specific DCA group first and then specify the channels The CH JOB button lets you perform grouping link to be assigned to the group or you can select a specific ing and copying operations between channels When channel and then specify the DCA group to which it you press this button the function access area will should be assigned change as follows NOTE e
311. he CH indication in the list will change to BANK bank number and bank select control change 0 32 program change messages can be transmitted and received This is convenient when you want to control more than 128 events on a single MIDI channel When bank select and then program change messages in that order are received on the Rx channel the event assigned to that bank number and program num ber in the list will be executed When you execute a specific event on the M7CL bank select program change messages for the bank num ber and program number assigned to that event will be transmitted on the Tx channel If the same event is assigned more than once in the list the lowest num bered bank number and program number will be trans mitted NOTE The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored Multi mode e If the BANK button is on and only a program change on an applicable MIDI channel is received the last selected bank number will be used If the BANK button is on the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time In this case bank select program change messages of all MIDI channels will be received M7CL Owner s Manual Using program changes to recall scenes and library items MIDI N 185 Using program changes to recall scenes and library items 186 7 Use the buttons of the PROGRAM CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception on off and make settings for echo
312. he TO MIX TO MATRIX buttons of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to switch the type of send destination shown in this field p 82 2 TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob This screen shows the send level of the signal sent from the input channels to the MATRIX bus To adjust the send level press the appropriate knob to select it and operate multifunction encoders 1 8 If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo the left one of the two adjacent knobs will be linked as the TO MATRIX PAN knob Press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired send destination MATRIX bus A bold frame will appear around all TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs for that MATRIX bus M7CL Owner s Manual Input channel operations 67 Use multifunction encoders 1 8 to adjust the send level of the signals sent from the up to eight input channels to the selected MATRIX bus If necessary you can use the navigation keys to switch the input channels that are assigned to the Centralogic section and adjust the send levels from other input channels to the selected MATRIX bus a gt e If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus use the navigation keys to access the corre sponding MATRIX channel in the Centralogic section and press the CUE key for that MATRIX channel If you want to make detailed settings for MATRIX sends press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once again When you press the
313. he device to excessive dust or vibrations or extreme cold or heat screw to a confirmed ground point before plugging the device into the mains such as in direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to prevent Improper grounding can result in electrical shock the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components 5 4 1 2 M7CL Owners Manual Handling caution e When turning on the AC power in your audio system always turn on the power amplifier LAST to avoid speaker damage When turning the power off the power amplifier should be turned off FIRST for the same reason e Do not insert your fingers or hands in any gaps or openings on the device vents e Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects paper plastic metal etc into any gaps or openings on the device vents If this happens turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel e Do not use the device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level since this can cause permanent hearing loss If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a physician e Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it and avoid use excessive force on the buttons switches or connectors e Do not apply oil grease or contact cleaner to the faders Doing so may cause problems with electrical
314. he encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen In this screen you can view all mix parameters for the currently selected channel D DCA field Here you can make DCA group settings for the cur rently selected channel 2 Popup button Press this button to open the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window For details refer to Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific DCA group gt 113 3 DCA group select buttons 1 8 These select the DCA group s to which the currently selected channel will be assigned 3 Use the DCA group select buttons to select the DCA group s to which the currently selected channel will be assigned multiple selections are allowed Select the DCA group s for other channels in the same way Using DCA groups Controlling DCA groups Use the faders of the Centralogic section to control DCA groups 1 Assign input channels to DCA groups 2 Using the faders of the top panel INPUT section or ST IN section adjust the relative balance between the input channels belonging to the DCA group you want to use 3 In the NAVIGATION KEYS section press the DCA key to make it light so that the Centr alogic section will be controlling the DCA groups 4 Operate the Centralogic section fader cor responding to the DCA group you want to use The level of the channels assigned to that DCA group will change while preserving the level
315. he scene in the buffer memory M7CL Owners Manual Inserting a scere Here s how a scene held in the buffer memory can be inserted at the desired scene number location Press the SCENE field in the function access area The SCENE LIST window will appear 2 Perform the Copy operation p 132 or Cut operation so that the scene you want to insert is placed in the buffer memory NOTE You cannot copy or cut multiple scenes as the source 3 Turn any one of the multifunction encoders to select the insert destination scene num ber and then press the INSERT button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Insert opera tion m gt e If you select multiple scenes as the insert destination the same scene will be inserted for the selected number of time e The INSERT button cannot be used if the scene list is sorted in any other way than by the NO column If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory the INSERT button is not available The INSERT button cannot be used if the Insert operation would cause the number of stored scenes to exceed 300 4 To execute the Insert operation press the OK button The scene stored in the buffer memory will be insert at the scene number you selected in step 3 If you selected multiple scenes as the insert destination the same scene will be inserted multiple times starting at the scene number you selected Scenes that were stored in subseque
316. he touch screen press any of the encoders The SELECTED CHANNEL section provides focused control of the currently selected channel 1 the channel whose SEL key is lit Setting up to use the M7CL SELECTED CHANNEL section a DYNAMICS 1 THRESHOLD PA DYNAMICS 2 THRESHOLD HPF Q FREQUENCY HIGH Q dE GAIN IX 5 e a 2 FREQUENCY s GAIN FREQUENCY 2 Q GAIN FREQUENCY ES Q GAIN OO 000000 OOOO 000 0 FREQUENCY Connections and setup co 1 HA encoder When you press one of the encoders in this section the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will appear in the touch screen SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 2 4 3 8 i 0 1 1 HA field The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen shows most of the parameters of the channel currently selected by its SEL key gt In actuality you use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to operate the channel selected by its SEL key even without displaying the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen In this case a popup window will appear to show the value of the parameter you re operating M7CL Owners Manual 45 Setting up to use the M7CL 4 While performing on the mic or instrument turn the HA encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the gain of the currently selected channel
317. hether the position from which the sig 2 nal is sent from an input channel to the stereo bus will be linked with the INPUT TO ST PAN setting 4 MIX BUS SETUP MATRIX BUS SETUP tabs These tabs switch the type of buses MIX buses or MATRIX buses shown in the screen e PRE FADER The signal is sent from immediately before the input channel fader 212 M7CL Owners Manual Setting the date and time of the internal clock 6 As desired turn the buttons of the PAN LINK field on off In the PAN LINK field you can specify whether the panning of the signal sent from an input channel to the stereo bus will be linked with operations of the INPUT TO ST PAN knob If the PAN LINK button is on If the send destination bus is stereo the PAN knob that appears in the location of the SEND LEVEL knob of the input channel s SELECTED CHAN NEL VIEW screen or OVERVIEW screen will be linked with the INPUT TO ST PAN knob If the PAN LINK button is off The PAN knob that appears in the location of the SEND LEVEL knob in the input channel s SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or OVER VIEW screen can be operated independently of the INPUT TO ST PAN knob This parameter can be enabled only if the SIGNAL TYPE of the corresponding bus is STEREO and for a MIX bus the BUS TYPE must also be VARI 7 To return to the SETUP screen press the symbol setting the date and time of the internal clock This section explain
318. hows the dynamics on off status and the amount of gain reduction OFORO DYNAMICS 1 field In the OVERVIEW screen press the DYNAMICS 1 2 field to access the DYNAM ICS 1 2 popup window In the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window you can edit the dynamics settings and turn the processor on off There are three variations of this popup window one channel eight channel and ALL These windows include the following items DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window 1ch This window shows only the currently selected chan nel All dynamics parameters can be viewed and edited This is convenient when you want to make detailed dynamics settings for a specific channel 1 Dynamics type buttons Use these buttons to select one of the following four types of dynamics Input channels DYNAMICS 1 GATE DUCKING COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER S Soft compander DE ESSER M7CL Owners Manual DYNAMICS 2 COMPRESSOR COMPANDER H Hard compander DYNAMICS 1 COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER H Hard compander COMPANDER S Soft compander For details on the dynamics parameters refer to the supple mentary material at the end of this manual gt p 225 2 Dynamics graph This graph displays the approximate response of the dynamics processor 3 Level meter These meters show the amount of gain reduction GR and the peak levels before the gate IN and after the gate OUT If the signal clips the OVER segment
319. ield and OUTPUT field to spec ify the output position and output level for each Cue group Refer to the explanation for each item in step 2 and make the desired settings Press the CUE key of a desired channel or DCA group to turn it on The Cue signal of the corresponding channel will be sent to the monitor signal output destination The background of the Cue meter in the function access area will turn blue indicating the Cue output level An abbreviation of the currently on Cue group or button is shown above the Cue meter The abbreviations displayed for the Cue meter have the following meaning IN INPUT CUE group DCA DCA CUE group OUT OUTPUT CUE group EFFECT CUE button in the EFFECT popup window Other cue group KEY IN CUE button of the DYNAMICS 1 popup KEY IN window Other cue group Monitor Cue CO When using the MIX bus select buttons in the SENDS FADER popup window you can press the selected button once again to turn on Cue for the corresponding MIX channel gt p 64 e f you want Cue operations and channel select operations to be linked open the USER SETUP popup window choose the PREFERENCE tab and turn CUE gt SEL on gt p 198 6 To adjust the Cue signal level use the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE MEMORY MONITOR section of the top panel If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON you can use both the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the Cue
320. ield includes the follow ing items RECALL SAFE PRRT IRL D RECALL SAFE popup button This opens the RECALL SAFE MODE popup win dow where you can make settings related to Recall safe 2 PARTIAL indicator This will light if only some of the parameters of that channel are set to Recall Safe 3 RECALL SAFE ON OFF button Switches the Recall Safe status on off for the channel To set the channel to Recall Safe mode press the RECALL SAFE ON OFF button to turn it on If you want to specify Recall Safe only for specific parameters press the RECALL SAFE popup window to open the RECALL SAFE MODE popup window and then select the parame ters for which you want to specify Recall Safe For details on the popup window gt p 136 M7CL Owner s Manual Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section E Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Turning a channel on off Use the FADER field to switch the channel on off in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen This field includes the following items FADER e 2 0 FADER This indicates the input output level of the channel This is linked with the fader on the top panel 2 X CLIP indicator This indicator will light if an overload occurs at even one of the level detection points in that channel 3 Input output level This indicates the current setting of fader 4 CH ON OFF button This button switches the channel on off This 1s linked with the ON butto
321. if the 48V button of each channel is on 9 BUS SETUP button Use this button to access the BUS SETUP popup window where you can make settings for bus operation and switch between mono stereo gt p 212 CONSOLE LOCK button Use this button to enable the Console Lock function which temporarily disables panel operations gt p 201 17 DATE TIME button Use this button to access the DATE TIME popup window where you can set the internal clock gt p 213 12 NETWORK button Use this button to access the NETWORK popup window where you can make Ethernet settings p 214 3 Version Power Supply field This area shows the current firmware version and infor mation about the power supply e CPUM CPUP The firmware version is shown sepa rately for each CPU CPUM main CPU and display control CPU M7CL Owner s Manual Other functions MO 207 About the SETUP screen Word Clock and Slot settings 208 BATTERY This indicates the voltage of the internal BRIGHTNESS field backup battery This will indicate OK if Here you can control the brightness of the screen panel operation is normal or LOW or NO if the and lamps The corresponding multifunction encoder can voltage is low be used to operate the knobs that control the brightness You can also use the BANK A B buttons to save two dif ferent sets of brightness settings gt p 215 e The LOW or NO indication will appe
322. ify the brightness of the touch screen top panel LEDs and lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP connectors 1 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 In the BRIGHTNESS field located in the right of the bottom row in the SETUP screen press the BANK A or BANK B but ton You can save two different brightness settings in bank A and B and switch between them rapidly when desired BRIGHTME SS LE Wr t 1 6 6 2 Use multifunction encoders 6 8 to set the following parameters SCREEN Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen PANEL Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs If the optional MBM7CL meter bridge is installed this will also affect the LEDs of the meter bridge NOTE e If the AD8HR is connected the brightness of the AD8HR s LEDs will also change LAMP Adjusts the brightness of the lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP jacks 4 If desired switch between banks and make settings for the other bank in the same way Now you can switch between the BANK A and BANK B buttons of the BRIGHTNESS field to switch the brightness of the touch screen LCD and lamps in a single operation You can also assign the BRIGHT NESS parameter to a user defined key and press that key to switch between banks A and B M7CL Owner s Manual Other functions MO 215 216 Initializing the M7CL s internal memory
323. ighlighted in green You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit SEL key once again to make it go dark Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute a mute group to which that channel belongs Mute Safe settings are not saved in the scene They will remain valid until you cancel the settings Using mute groups M7CL Owners Manual Grouping and linking 119 The Channel Link function The Channel Link function Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between input channels The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices e Head amp settings EQ settings e Dynamics 1 and 2 settings On off status of signals sent to MIX buses e Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses e On off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses e Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses e Fader operations e ON key operations Two or more input channels that are linked are called a link group There is no limit on the num ber of link groups you can create or on the number and combinations of input channels that can be included in these link groups However the types of parameters that are linked will be the same for all link groups Linking the desired input chan nels Here s how to link specific parameters of input channels gt Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene R
324. igital recorder so that a live recording can be made without being affected by mixing operations within the M7CL 1 As desired connect your external equip ment to an OMNI OUT jack or to an I O card in slots 1 3 DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL IN digital recorder digital I O e If you install a digital I O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device you ll need to synchronize the word clock between the M7CL and your external device p 208 2 Use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen for the input channel that you want to directly output 3 Press the INSERT DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window There are two variations of this popup window one channel and eight channel These windows include the following items INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window 1ch 1 Icon Channel number Channel name This indicates the 1con selected for that channel the channel number and the channel name 2 DIRECT OUT field Here you can make settings for direct output Press a field to select PRE HPF before the HPF PRE EQ before the attenuator or PRE FADER before the fader as the position for direct output M7CL Owners Manual 3 DIRECT OUT popup button This indicates the output port used for direct output Press this button to open a popup window where you can select the output port 4 DIRECT OUT ON OFF button Turns the direct output on off
325. ignal can be monitored from external speakers connected to the STE REO channel The following procedure lets you check whether the connections from the mic or instrument to the main speakers are appropriate In this case as well you can either use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to make settings for one channel at a time or use the Centralogic section to make settings for up to eight channels at a time ea Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section settings for one channel Connections and setup 1 Press the SEL key of the input channel you want to control 2 Press one of the encoders in the SELECTED CHANNEL section The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the selected channel will appear 1 i 1 TO ST PAN BALANCE field 3 In the To ST PAN BALANCE field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen make sure that the ST button is on white charac ters on a pink background In the TO ST PAN BALANCE field you can use the ST MONO button to switch the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO MONO buses on off The knob in this field indicates the pan balance of the signal sent to the STEREO bus If the ST button is off black characters on blue back ground press the button to switch it on 4 Verify that in the top panel the ON of the corresponding input channel is on The ON turns the corresponding channel on or off If the ON key is off LED dark press the key to turn it on LED lit M7CL O
326. ill not be asked for the Administrator password the next time gt p 196 Editing a user authentication key 7 Enter the password and press the OK but ton For details on entering a password refer to Entering names p 30 If the password was incorrect a message of WRONG PASSWORD will appear in the bottom of the screen Changing the password Here s how to change the password of the logged in user A change in the Administrator password is updated imme diately A change in a User password will be discarded if the user simply logs out it must be applied to the user authentication key before the user logs out The Guest account does not have a password T In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen PASSWORD CHANGE button 2 Press the PASSWORD CHANGE button A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter a password User Level settings 3 Enter the current password and press the OK button For details on entering a password refer to Entering names p 30 When you enter the correct password a keyboard win dow will appear allowing you to enter the new pass word Enter the new password in the NEW PASS WORD field then enter the same password in the RE ENTER PASSWORD field for veri fication and finally press the OK button If the two passwords that were entered match the new password will be set User settings Security
327. in the upper right In this state the bus signals of the cascade slave will be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade master and the combined signals of both buses will be output from the cascade master M7CL Owners Manual Other functions MO 211 Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses This section explains how to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses such as switching between stereo and monaural and selecting the position from which the signal is sent from an input channel The settings you make in the following procedure are saved as part of the scene 1 In the function access area press the 3 Use the MIX BUS SETUP MATRIX BUS SETUP button to access the SETUP screen SETUP tabs to view either the MIX buses or the MATRIX buses 2 In the center right of the SETUP screen press the BUS SETUP button to open the 4 Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE field to BUS SETUP popup window specify whether each bus will function as In the BUS SETUP popup window you can make vari STEREO main parameters will be linked for ous settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses two adjacent odd numbered even num bered buses or MONOx2 use as two mon aural channels A D Use the buttons of the BUS TYPE SEND POINT field to select the position from which the signal of the input channel will be sent In
328. indow Press the SCENE field in the function access area The SCENE LIST window will appear where you can perform various operations for scene memory M7CL Owners Manual 1 Scene list This list shows the scenes that are stored in scene memory The row highlighted in blue indicates that this scene number is selected for operations 2 RECALL button This recalls the scene that is currently selected in the scene list 3 RECALL UNDO button This button cancels Undo or re executes Redo the most recently performed scene Recall operation 4 Scene select knob This knob lets you rapidly select the desired scene number You can use any of the multifunction encoders to operate this knob 2 Turn one of the multifunction encoders to select the recall source scene number You can also use the SCENE MEMORY A keys to select scene numbers 3 Press the RECALL button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall opera tion 4 To execute the Recall operation press the OK button The scene you selected in step 2 will be recalled If you decide to cancel the Recall operation press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button 5 If you want to cancel the scene Recall press the RECALL UNDO button A dialog box asking you to confirm the Undo opera tion will appear press the OK button if you want to execute the operation After undoing you can press the STORE UNDO button once again to Redo re exe
329. indow 1 ch Use the panel SEL keys or the channel select button in the function access area to select a channel Channel select button 7 2 1 1 A 24 ATT HPF EQ popup window 8 ch ALL DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window 8 ch ALL In addition to using the panel SEL keys or the chan nel select button in the function access area you can also select a channel by pressing the channel number channel name buttons in the popup window Channel number Channel name buttons If you use the channel number channel name buttons in the 8 ch ALL popup window you can select multi ple channels by selecting a region In this case the same library data will be recalled to all of the selected channels Selected region GEQ EFFECT popup window Use the rack select tabs at the bottom of the popup window to select a rack cos Rack select tabs NOTE e You can t select a rack select tab of a rack in which no GEQ or effect is mounted 3 Press the LIBRARY tool button to open the corresponding library window Library windows contain the following items Using the tool buttons 1 List This shows the data saved in the library A highlighted line indicates that it is selected for operations Read only data is indicated by an R symbol gt The right side of the list shows information such as the dynamics type or effect type used about the corresponding data The dynamics libra
330. input channel This indication is not shown for POST post fader For details on how to switch between PRE and POST p 64 gt e If PRE is selected as the send position to a MIX bus you will further be able to select either PRE EQ immediately before the attenuator or PRE FADER immediately before the fader for each MIX bus gt p 212 In the TO MIX TO MATRIX field in the screen make sure that the TO MIX button is turned on When the TO MIX button is on the TO MIX TO MATRIX field shows the knobs and buttons for MIX buses 1 16 If this button is off press the button to turn it on MIX buses can be either a FIXED type whose send level is fixed or a VARI type whose send level is vari able You can switch between FIXED and VARI types for each two adjacent odd numbered even numbered MIX buses for the procedure p 212 If the send destination MIX bus is a FIXED type a O symbol is displayed instead of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob In this case you won t be able to adjust the send level If the send destination MIX bus is a VARI type the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob is displayed in the same color as the corresponding encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section In this case you can use the cor responding encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level If necessary you can specify two adjacent odd num bered even numbered MIX buses as a stereo bus and link the main parameters p 212 I
331. instead of the OK button Using the tool buttons Initializing settings Heres how you can return the EQ dynamics settings of the currently selected channel or the effect settings of a rack to their default state A GEQ can be initialized by the FLAT button in the screen 1 Open a popup window that provides the tool buttons 2 Select the channel EQ dynamics or rack effect whose settings you want to initial ize 3 Press the DEFAULT button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the initialization operation 4 To execute the initialization press the OK button The EQ dynamics of the channel or the effect settings of the rack you selected in step 2 will be initialized If you decide to cancel the initialization press the CAN CEL button instead of the OK button e In the case of EQ dynamics you can use the channel number channel name buttons in the 8 ch ALL popup window to select a range of channels and initialize them in a single oper ation M7CL Owners Manual Basic operation of the M7CL 5 35 Using the tool buttons Copying pasting settings Here s how the EQ dynamics settings of the currently selected channel or the GEQ effect settings of a rack can be copied to a buffer memory and pasted to another chan nel or rack Copy paste operations are restricted to the following com binations Between input channel EQ settings Between output channel EQ settings Between dynamics process
332. ion key on a USB storage device allowing users to be switched easily simply by connecting this storage device to a USB connector This is convenient in the following situa tions Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented e The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer guest engineer can be limited e In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other output settings etc can be locked to prevent unintended operations Preferences of each operator can easily be switched _ There are three types of user as follows In order to operate the M7CL you must log in as a user Administrator This is the administrator of the M7CL and can use all of its functionality Only one set of Administrator settings is maintained inside the M7CL The Administrator can create user authentication keys for other users GUES cc The Guest can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator Only one set of Guest settings is maintained inside the M7CL A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator User settings are saved on a USB storage device as a user authentication key Multiple sets of User set tings can be saved with different user names A User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user authentication keys with a specified user level When a user logs on the user settings for that user are ap
333. is field a keyboard window allow ing you to assign a name will appear 4 Input port select tabs These tabs select the input ports shown in the popup window Each tab corresponds to the following input ports CH IN 1 32 CH IN 33 48 M7CL 48 only muss INPUT jacks 1 32 or 33 48 M7CL 48 only will be displayed ST IN L R channels of ST IN jacks 1 4 will be displayed e SLOT 1 SLOT 3 Input channels 1 16 of slots 1 3 will be displayed RACK The output ports of rack 1 8 will be displayed 5 Input port select buttons These buttons assign an input port to the currently selected input channel 6 Tabs Use these tabs to switch between thems 3 Access the input port selection screen of the PATCH NAME popup window and use the input port select tabs and input port select buttons to select an input port m gt e If PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere For details refer to p 198 4 When you have finished making settings press the x symbol located in the upper right to close the window You will return to the OVERVIEW screen a gt In the PATCH NAME popup window you can select the icon for a channel or assign a name to it gt
334. itor ing only the output signal of the effect will be monitored when you turn on the EFFECT CUE button The CUE keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily defeated 7 If you want to bypass the currently dis played effect press the BYPASS button to turn it on 8 If you want to copy the currently displayed effect settings to the effect of another rack or to initialize the settings you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the popup window For details on how to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons p 31 Effect settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the effect library gt p 31 About the internal effects Using the Tap Tempo function tempo is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modu lation effect by striking a key at the desired interval To use the Tap function you must first assign Tap Tempo to a user defined key and then operate that user defined key T In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 In the upper left of the screen press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window This window includes several pages which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window 3 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page The USER DEFINED KEYS page lets you
335. joy years of trouble free use please read this manual before you begin using the product After you have read the manual keep it in a safe place An overview of the M7CL The M7CL is a digital mixing console with the following features B A mixing system that delivers both cutting edge digital technology and analog style operation The M7CL is a full digital mixing console containing the latest digital technology designed for installed systems or SR applications 24 bit linear AD DA converters are used to deliver up to 108 dB of dynamic range and amazing sound quality As input channels it provides 32 M7CL 32 model or 48 M7CL 48 model monaural INPUT channels and four stereo ST IN channels As output channels it provides 16 MIX channels eight MATRIX channels a STEREO channel and MONO channel L C R three channel output using the STEREO MONO channels is also supported The user interface has been completely redesigned for simple and intuitive operation A dedicated channel strip with fader cue and on off con trol is provided for all frequently used input channels and the STEREO MONO channels This mixer can be com fortably operated even by users who are new to digital consoles The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the left of the display lets you use the knobs to control the main parameters gain EQ dynamics threshold bus send lev els etc for the particular channel on which you re focus ing This se
336. kback is enabled this will indicate the on off sta tus of the Talkback Dimmer function which automati cally attenuates the monitor signal Here you can also specify the amount of attenuation applied by the talk back dimmer 5 Meter field This indicates the level of the monitor signal This meter shows the level immediately before the dimmer The MONITOR popup window will appear if you press this field allowing you to make detailed settings for monitoring M7CL Owner s Manual 6 OUTPUT button Turns the monitor output on off 7 PHONES LEVEL LINK button If this is on the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack MONO MONITOR button This button allows monaural monitoring If this button is on the signal sent from the PHONES OUT jack and the MONITOR OUT L R channels will be monaural Press the popup button or the meter field to open the MONITOR popup window In the MONITOR popup window you can make detailed settings for monitoring The popup window includes the following items 4 SOURCE SELECT field Use the buttons in this field to select the monitor source This operation can also be performed using the SOURCE SELECT field in the MONITOR screen 2 DIMMER field Here you can make settings for the Dimmer function which temporarily attenuates the monitor signal DIMMER knob This adjusts the amount by which the monitor signal will be attenu
337. king type frequency 190 010 EQ peaking type bandwidth H3 FF Channel 2 level plus values 3 3 2 i 5 F Ed d E ee LEVEL 2 100 to 100 for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PITCH L63 to R63 Channel 2 pan One input two output high quality pitch shifter wise Channel 2 feedback plus values for normal phase feed GZ 24198992 back minus values for reverse phase feedback SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with NOTE 1 TEMPO to determine Channel 1 delay Channel 1 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feed FB G 220 422 back minus values for reverse phase feedback HNE S0 050cents Pitch shiftfine Feedback gain plus values for _ 6 normal phase feedback minus d ld values for reverse phase feed ith back Used in conjunction wit NOTE 2 1 TEMPO to determine Channel SYNC OFF ON 2s on off BERGER OR h HG hj de d de NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with Maximum value depends on the tempo setting TEMPO to determine DELAY 1 PAP A Be dE Ml d d da E ROTARY Maximum value depends on the tempo setting One input two output rotary speaker simulator ROTATE STOP START Rotation stop start SPEED SLOW FAST Rotation speed see SLOW and FAST parameters SLOW 0 05 10 00 Hz SLOW rotation speed Two input two output ring modulator SOURCE OSC SELF
338. l 747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 3F 6 Sec 2 Nan Jing E Rd Taipei Taiwan 104 R O C Tel 02 2511 8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 891 1 Siam Motors Building 15 16 floor Rama 1 road Wangmai Pathumwan Bangkok 10330 Thailand Tel 02 215 2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Naka ku Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 8 1 53 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd Level 1 99 Queensbridge Street Southbank Victoria 3006 Australia Tel 3 9693 5111 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Naka ku Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 8 1 53 460 2313 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Naka ku Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2441 YAMAHA Yamaha Pro Audio global web site http www yamahaproaudio com Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual U R G Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Yamaha Corporation 2005 Yamaha Corporation WF02260 801POCP1 3 07E0 This document is printed on chlorine free ECF paper with soy ink Printed in Japan
339. l be transmitted to an external device Conversely the corre sponding event can be executed when a program change message is received from an external device 1 Connect the M7CL to your external device 3 In the center of the screen press the MIDI The following illustration shows an example of using button to access the MIDI popup window the MIDI IN OUT connectors to transmit and receive MIDI meesaqses 4 Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page and select the port and MIDI channel on which program changes will be transmitted and received as described in Basic MIDI settings gt external p 182 device D Press the PROGRAM CHANGE tab to access the PROGRAM CHANGE page In the PROGRAM CHANGE page you can specify how program changes will be transmitted and received and choose the event scene recall or effect 2 In the function access area press the library recall that will be assigned to each program SETUP button to access the SETUP screen Sumber This page includes the following items MIDI button 184 1 M7CL Owners Manual 1 PROGRAM CHANGE field Here you can switch program change transmission reception on off and specify whether program changes will be echoed out This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE field of the MIDI SETUP page 2 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field Here you can select the program change transmit receive mode This setting is linked with the PRO GRAM CHANGE MOD
340. l device at the same mix balance as the STEREO MONO effect buses About word clock Word clock refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal process ing Normally one device transmits a reference word clock signal and the other devices receive this word clock signal and synchronize to it In order to transmit or receive digital audio signals to or from an external device via a digital I O card installed in a slot of the M7CL the word clock must be synchronized between the devices Be aware that if the word clock is not synchronized the signal will not be sent correctly or there may be unpleasant noise For details on synchronizing the M7CL s word clock with an external device p 208 Conventions in this manual In this manual switch type controls on the panel are called keys Of the control knobs on the panel those that turn from a minimum value to a maximum value are called knobs while those that turn endlessly are called encoders Controls located on the panel are enclosed in square Whenever there is a difference between the M7CL 32 brackets e g CUE key in order to distinguish them model and the M7CL 48 model specifications that apply from the virtual buttons and knobs displayed in the screen only to the M7CL 48 model are enclosed in curly brackets For some controls the name of the section is given before e g INPUT jacks 1 32 1 48 the e g
341. l output The STEREO channel and MONO channel can be used either to output independent signals or for three channel L C R playback When the M7CL is in the default state the following out put ports are assigned STEREO channel L OMNI OUT jack 15 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack L STEREO channel R OMNI OUT jack 16 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack R Signal assignments to the output channels can be changed as desired M7CL Owner s Manual Introduction 13 About the MIX bus types VARI FIXED About word clock Conventions in this manuale About the firmware version About the MIX bus types VARI FIXED 14 The sixteen MIX buses provided on the M7CL can be assigned either as VAHI or FIXED types in pairs of adjacent odd numbered even numbered buses gt p 212 Each type has the following characteristics VARI FIXED This type allows the send level of the signal sent from the With this type the send level of the signal sent from the input channels to the MIX bus to be varied The point at input channels to the MIX bus is fixed The signal sent which the signal is sent from the input channel to a VARI from an input channel to a FIXED type MIX bus is taken type MIX bus can be chosen from before the EQ before from immediately after the ON key This type is used the fader or after the ON key This type is used mainly mainly when you want to distribute signals to an external for sending the signal to a monitor system or externa
342. lace for future reference A WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other hazards These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord e Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device The required voltage is e o not expose the device to rain use it near water or in damp or wet conditions printed on the name plate of the device or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings e Use only the specified power supply PW800W if you use an external power e Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands supply Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators and If you notice any abnormality do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy objects on it or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over roll anything the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the device or if any unusual smells or smoke over it should appear to be caused by it immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the electric plug from the outlet and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel e f this device power supply should be dropped or damaged immediately turn off the powe
343. le 128 Control value Low 3 2 When only Low data is received rxValue curValue amp 2097024 Control value Low 3 3 When only Middle data is received rxValue curValue amp 2080895 Control value Middle 128 3 4 When only High data is received rxValue curValue amp 16383 Control value High 16384 3 5 When only Middle and Low data is received rxValue curValue amp 2080768 Control value Middle 128 Control value Low 3 6 When only High and Low data is received rxValue curValue amp 16256 Control value High 16384 Control value Low 3 7 When only High and Middle data is received rxValue curValue amp 127 Control value High 16384 Control value Middle 128 if rxValue gt paramWidth rxValue paramWidth param rxValue mod 2 add If NRPN is selected STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 01100010 62 NRPN LSB Ovvvvvvv vv Parameter number LSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 01100011 63 NRPN MSB Ovvvvwvww vv Parameter number MSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 00000110 06 Data entry MSB Ovvvvvvv ww Parameter data MSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 00100110 26 Data entry LSB Ovvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not be added during transmission Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is omitted v 9 Q Q
344. le input jacks for inputting analog audio signals from line level devices or microphones Nominal input level is 62 dBu to 10 dBu Male XLR plug 1 ground 3 cold 1116 2 hot 3 LAMP connector This is a four pin female XLR output jack that supplies power to a separately sold gooseneck lamp such as the Yamaha LA5000 The M7CL 48 has these connectors at two locations M7CL Owner s Manual M7CL 48 OMNI OUT 4dBu 5 4 7 6 3 2 1 8 D ERG BUR oL oL oL ol 4 OMNI OUT jacks 1 16 These are XLR 3 32 male output jacks that output analog audio signals These are used mainly to output the signals of MIX channels or MATRIX channels Nominal output level is 4 dBu Female XLR plug 2 hot 3 cold 1 ground NOTE e Although OMNI OUT jacks 1 16 have a nominal input output level of 4 dBu maximum level 24 dBu an internal switch allows this to be changed to 2 dBu maximum level 18 dBu if necessary A fee will be charged for this procedure For details contact to your Yamaha dealer TR OUT DIGITAL OUT IN TERMINATED D 6 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack This is an AES EBU XLR 3 32 male jack that outputs the digital audio signal of a desired channel in AES EBU format This is used mainly to output the signal of the STEREO MONO channel 6 REMOTE connector
345. les produits veuillez vous adresser a Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3R1 Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de M xico S A de C V Calz Javier Rojo G mez 1149 Col Guadalupe del Moral 09300 M xico M xico Tel 55 5804 0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda Rua Joaquim Floriano 913 4 andar Itaim Bibi CEP 04534 013 Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL Tel 011 3704 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America S A Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 4371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panam Panam Tel 4 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstrabe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 SWITZERLAND LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94 8008 Ziirich Switzerland Tel 01 383 3990
346. ll change You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to control numbers The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all control number assignments to their default state Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system rather than for individual scenes Using parameter changes to control parameters Using parameter changes to control parameters On the M7CL you can use a type of system exclusive messages called parameter changes to control specific events fader encoder operations ON key on off operations etc as an alterna tive to using control changes or NRPN messages For details on the parameter changes that can be transmitted and received refer to MIDI data format in the appendix Connect the M7CL to your external device 2 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen In the center of the screen press the MIDI button to access the MIDI popup window 4 Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page and select the port and MIDI channel on which parameter changes will be transmitted and received as described in Basic MIDI settings gt p 182 NOTE e Parameter changes include a device number that specifies the transmitting or receiving device The transmit Tx channel and receive Hx channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page are used as the device number e Please be aware that if the d
347. lt M7CL Owner s Manual 255 MIDI Data Format 256 1 4 PROGRAM CHANGE Reception If Program Change ECHO is ON bank select messages will also be echoed from MIDI OUT If SINGLE CH is selected these messages are received if Program Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches However if OMNI is ON these messages are received regardless of the channel When these messages are received scene memory and effect library are recalled according to the settings of the Program Change Table Transmission If Program Change TX is ON these messages are transmitted according to the Program Change Table settings when scene memory and effect library are recalled If SINGLE CH is selected these messages are transmitted on the Tx CH channel If the recalled scene memory and effect library has been assigned to more than one program number the lowest numbered program number for each MIDI channel will be transmitted Program Change messages are not used for transmission to M7CL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match Parameter Change messages are always used You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH If SINGLE is selected You can choose the RX CH OMNI CH and TX CH You can choose whether a bank select message will be added A bank of up to 16 can be specified If MULTI is selected The RX and TX channels will be the same The assignment table will use the setting
348. lues use the corresponding MIX MATRIX encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section If the send destination MIX bus MATRIX bus is set to stereo the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a PAN knob For a ST IN channel a stereo MIX channel or STEREO channel it will operate as the BALANCE knob When you press this knob the corresponding MIX MATRIX SEND popup window will appear f the send destination MIX bus is a FIXED type this knob will not appear only the TO MIX SEND ON OFF button 3 will be shown 3 TO MIX TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF button These are on off switches for the signal sent from the channel to each MIX bus MATRIX bus M7CL Owners Manual To adjust the send level to MIX buses or MATRIX buses first use the TO MIX TO MATRIX buttons to select the buses to which you want to send the signal only for input channels Next use the corresponding MIX MATRIX encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section color coded in the screen to adjust the send levels of the signal sent to each bus If desired you can use the TO MIX TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF buttons to switch the signal sent to each bus on off Above each of these buttons is shown the position from which the signal is sent from the current channel For details on changing the send position gt 64 Adjusting the send level from the MIX channels to a specific MATRIX bus To adjust the send level from the MIX channels to a spe ci
349. ly or edit the sample name that was entered press the channel name field in the upper part of the window The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of the window allowing you to enter or edit the charac ters For details on how to use the keyboard window refer to p 30 7 Use the SEL keys of the Centralogic sec tion to switch output channels and specify the icon or channel name for other chan nels in the same way When the PATCH NAME popup window is shown you can use the SEL keys of the Centralogic section to switch channels within the currently selected eight channels If you want to operate output channels other than those in the currently selected eight channels use the navi gation keys gt Centralogic section SEL keys to select the desired channel When you re finished with your input press the x symbol in the upper right of the win dow Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO bus This section explains how to send the signal of a MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus There are two ways to send signals from a MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus ST MONO mode and LCR mode You can select the mode individually for each channel These modes differ in the following ways ST MONO mode This mode sends the signal from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently The signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the
350. match Parameter Change messages are always used Control Change numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 00 Control number 00 Ovvvvvvv vv Control Value 0 127 STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 20 Control number 32 Ovvvvvvv vv Control Value 0 127 If TABLE is selected STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA Onnnnnnn nn Control number 1 5 7 31 33 37 38 95 102 119 Ovvvvvvv ww Control Value 0 127 Numbers 0 32 and 96 101 cannot be used Control number 6 38 can be used Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data paramSteps paramMax paramMin 1 add paramWidth paramSteps mod paramWidth add paramSteps curValue paramSteps add mod 2 1 If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps paramWidth 128 rxValue Control value 2 If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16 384 steps paramWidth 16384 2 1 When High and Low data is received rxValue Control value High 128 Control value Low 2 2 When only Low data is received rxValue curValue amp 16256 Control value Low 2 3 When only High data is received rxValue Control value High 128 curValue amp 127 3 If the assigned parameter has 16 384 or more but less than 2 097 152 steps paramWidth 2097152 3 1 When High Middle and Low data is received rxValue Control value High 16384 Control value Midd
351. may scratch the screen and render the touch screen inoperable M7CL Owners Manual YAMAHA DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE 7 lt 1 2 2 USB connector You can connect a USB storage device here to save load internal data USER KEY data that determines the user level can be saved on a USB storage device to limit the functionality that can be operated by each user NOTE You can connect a USB storage device to the USB connector However operation is guaranteed only with USB flash memory USB storage device formats Storage media with capacities 2GB or less format ted in FAT12 FAT16 or FAT32 are supported If your storage device is formatted otherwise please re format it in the SAVE LOAD screen Prevention of accidental erasure Some USB storage devices have a write protect setting that lets you prevent data from being erased accidentally If your storage device contains impor tant data it s a good idea to use the write protect setting to prevent accidental erasure On the other hand you ll need to make sure that your USB storage device s write protect setting is turned off before you save data N CAUTION An ACCESS indicator is shown in the function access area while data is being accessed saved loaded or deleted Do not disconnect the USB connector or power off the M7CL while this indicator is shown Doing so may damage your stor age media or may damage the data in the M7CL or on your me
352. ms 1 96 s fs 48 kHz 2 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz EARLY REF One input two output early reflections S Hall L Hall Random Type of early reflection sim TYPE Revers Plate Spring ulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing Early reflections decay char LIVENESS 0 10 acteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins 0 10 Reflection diffusion left right reflection spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reflection density FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio LN THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff fre quency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff fre quency Effects Parameters Effects Parameters GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE One input two output early reflections with gate and early reflections with reverse gate TYPE Type A Type B Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteris tics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins Reflection diffusion left right 0 10 reflection spread DENSITY 0 100 Reflection density HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio ER NUM Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain THRU 21 2 Hz LN 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency a ae Low pass filter cutoff frequency E MONO DELAY One input
353. muted chan nels will blink You can turn on more than one user defined key to mute multiple mute groups 10 To defeat muting of a mute group press the user defined key that you lit in step 9 Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group it will not be affected by operations of the user defined key if the ON key of that channel is already turned off to begin with e If you cancel the assignment of the user defined key that mute group will be forcibly set to the unmuted state If after synchronizing with M7CL Editor the system goes offline mute groups not assigned to user defined keys will forcibly be un muted Using the Mute Safe function If necessary specific channels belonging to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations Mute Safe T In the function access area press the CH JOB button 2 Press the MUTE GROUP button to access the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window 1 Channel display field When the MUTE SAFE button 1s on channels that are temporarily excluded from the mute group are high lighted in this field 2 MUTE SAFE button This lets you select the channels that will be set to Mute Safe status Press the MUTE SAFE button OW 4 Press a SEL key to select the channel s you want to exclude from mute groups multiple selections are allowed The SEL key will light and the corresponding chan nel in the channel display field of the window will be h
354. n free air Temperature Range 10 C to 35 C Dimensions Net Weight Power Requirements Storage Temperature Range 20 C to 60 C Owner s Manual Dust cover mini YGDAI cards Gooseneck Lamp LA5000 Power Supply PW800W Power Supply Link Cable PSL360 Included Accessories Optional Accessories v 9 C Q Q lt M7CL Owner s Manual 265 Input output characteristics 266 Input output characteristics Analog Input Characteristics Actual Load For Use With Input Terminals fapedance NOST Senstity i Nomina Mies Connector ip 62 dB 82 dBu 62 dBu 42 dBu INPUT 1 48 lt M7CL 48 gt 325 50 600 9 Mics 616V 0 616 616mV XLR 3 31 type INPUT 1 32 lt M7CL 32 gt m 600 Lines 10 dBu 10 dBu 30 dBu Balanced 245 mV 2 45 V 24 5 V _62 dB 82dBu 62 dBu 42 dBu dip a Mics 61 6 uV 0 616 mV 6 16 mV XLR 3 31 type 600 Lines 10 dBu 10 dBu 30 Balanced 245 mV 2 45 V 24 5 V 60 dB 70 dBu 60 dBu 40 dBu H ics 0 245 mV 0 775 mV 7 75 MV XLR 3 31 type TALKBACK 3 kQ amp pu 600 Lines 26 dBu 16 dBu 4 Balanced 38 8 mV 0 123 V 1 23 V 1 Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of 4 dBu 1 23 V or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain all fad ers and level controls are maximum position 2 XLR 3 31 type connectors
355. n how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channel as an effect return channel so that the effect can be used in a send return configura tion a gt e If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus select VARI as the bus type This will allow you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel e If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo it is conve nient to assign the send source MIX bus to stereo For details on bus assignments gt 212 1 As described in Virtual rack operations gt p 158 steps 1 3 mount an effect in a rack The rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect the number of inputs and outputs and the levels before and following the effect 1 Racks 2 INPUT button 3 OUTPUT button 2 Press the INPUT L button to open the OUT PUT CH SELECT popup window and select a MIX channel as the input source for the rack For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup win dow refer to step 5 of Virtual rack operations gt p 158 The output of the MIX channel you re using as the effect send is now assigned to the L input of the effect If you re using a stereo source assign the L R signals of the stereo MIX channels to the L R inputs of the rack 3 Press the OUTPUT L button to open the INPUT CH SELECT popup window and select the L input of the desired ST IN chan nel as the output
356. n of the top panel When you press the CH ON OFF button in the FADER field that channel will be switched on off and the top panel ON key will operate in tandem with this Assigning a channel to a DCA group input channels only Use the DCA field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to assign a channel to a DCA group This field includes the following items D DCA popup button This accesses the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window where you can select the chan nels that will be assigned to each DCA group or mute group 2 DCA buttons 1 8 These buttons select the DCA group s to which this channel is assigned 861 M7CL Owners Manual To assign the channel to a DCA group turn on the desired DCA button 1 8 multiple selections are allowed To check the channels that are assigned to each DCA group press the DCA popup button to open the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window For details on the popup window gt p 114 Assigning a channel to a mute group Use the MUTE field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to assign a channel to a mute group This field includes the following items 2 1 MUTE popup button This accesses the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window where you can select the chan nels that will be assigned to each DCA group or mute group 2 MUTE SAFE indicator This will light if this channel is set to Mute Safe You can make Mute Safe settings in the DCA MUTE GROUP A
357. n on off switch for the signal sent from the MIX channels STEREO L R channel or MONO C channel to each MATRIX bus 1 8 MATRIX 1 8 MATRIX send levels 1 8 This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the MIX channels STEREO L R channel or MONO C channel to each MATRIX bus 1 8 As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus you can choose either immediately before the four band EQ immediately before the fader or immediately after the ON key M7CL Owner s Manual EQ OUT METER DYNA OU GR METER COMP COMPAND EXPAND PRE FADER METER LEVEL INSERT POST ON MATRIX OUT 1 8 TPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT E FADER Kevin INSERT GU MPRE FADER Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX13 16 OUT MATRIX1 8 POST EQ PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo you can use the PAN knob to adjust the panning between the two MATRIX buses If the send source is a stereo MIX channel or the STEREO channel use the BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left and right channels sent to the two MATRIX buses INSERT You can patch the desired output input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor You can switch the insert out and insert in locations METER This meters the level of the output channel You can switch the position at which the level is
358. n the output of the GEQ multiple selections are allowed The insert in will be assigned to the output of the GEQ For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup window gt p 158 If an insert in is selected as the output destination the input source of the rack will automatically be set to the insert out of the same channel In the GEQ EFFECT field press the rack in which you mounted the GEQ The GEQ EFFECT popup window will appear allow ing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or effect m gt The popup windows for the 31 Band GEQ and the Flex15GEQ are nearly identical However the Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units A and B mounted in a single rack 1 Rack select tabs These tabs switch between racks 1 8 For a rack in which a Flex 15GEQ is mounted the tabs will be split as and xB x is the rack number 2 INPUT button This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the input source of the rack The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ EFFECT field 3 OUTPUT button This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the output destination of the rack The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ EFFECT field M7CL Owners Manual 4 GEQ LINK button This button links adjacent GEQ units In the case of a 3 Band GEQ the GEQ units in adjacent odd num bered even
359. ncoder 17 HA encoder 17 HPF encoder 17 IN 1 8 21 IN 9 16 21 IN 17 24 21 IN 25 32 21 IN 33 40 21 WEEE 21 MATRIX 21 MIX 1 8 Key 21 9 16 key 21 MIX MATRIX encoder 17 PAN encoder 17 ST IN 21 STEREO 21 Numerics 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack 22 31 Band 157 161 163 A AC IN connector 23 Adjusting Detection point of the touch screen Calibration function 217 218 Input output gain 219 PROMI SU alor 191 Analog input connections ag Analog output connections 40 Assigning channels to a o PR 113 Assigning channels to mute groups 116 ATT HPF EQ popup window jb m 105 fe NEMPE PUTES 106 M7CL Owners Manual B Banks 215 BRIGHTNESS 215 Brightness of the touch screen LEDs and lamps
360. nction access area The SCENE LIST window will appear where you can perform various scene related operations The window includes the following items 1 Scene list This list shows the scenes that are stored in scene memory The row highlighted in blue indicates that this scene number is selected for operations A read only scene is indicated by the R symbol and a write protected scene is indicated by the protect symbol 2 STORE button This stores the current mix settings into the location currently selected in the scene list 3 STORE UNDO button This button cancels Undo or re executes Redo the most recently performed scene Store operation This button is valid only immediately after you ve per formed an overwrite store 4 Scene select knob This knob lets you rapidly select the desired scene number You can use any of the multifunction encoders to operate this knob In addition you can select multi ple scenes by pressing the multifunction encoder while you turn it 5 MULTI SELECT button You can select multiple scenes by switching this but ton on and turning the multifunction encoder This is the same result as pressing the scene select knob while turning it Turn one of the multifunction encoders to select the store destination scene number Using scene memories m gt You can select multiple scene numbers as the store destina tion To do so turn the MULTI SELECT button on and turn a
361. nd level of other input channels in the same way If you press the selected knob once again the MIX SEND popup window 8 ch for the send destination MIX bus will appear This popup window contains on off switches for the signals sent from each channel to the corresponding bus and lets you select the send point PRE or POST p 64 NOTE e At this time you must be sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you selected in step 3 to the corresponding MIX bus is set to O If you raise this send level the output of the effect will be returned to the input of the same effect possibly causing oscillation Graphic EQ and effects A 9 To adjust the master level of the effect send call up the MIX channel you specified as the input source of the rack in step 2 to the Centralogic section and adjust the cor responding fader Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post effect signal to reach the overload point M7CL Owners Manual 169 About the internal effects Inserting an internal effect Into a channel Here we will explain how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input output of the internal effect to the input output of the desired channel except for a ST IN channel 1 As described in Virtual rack operations gt 158 steps 1 3 mount an effect in a rack The rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect the number
362. nd linking gt p 113 During this time the function access area of the touch screen will change to a screen allowing you to select the function you want to operate 7 RACK When you press this button the VIRTUAL RACK screen will appear in the main area allowing you to edit the GEQ or effect settings p 158 MONITOR When you press this button the MONITOR screen will appear in the main area allowing you to edit the monitor or oscillator settings gt p 142 9 METERS These are level meters that monitor the level of the STE REO bus L R MONO bus M and cue signal CUE When you press this field the METER screen will appear in the main area displaying the meters and fader status for all channels at once p 153 SETUP When you press this button the SYSTEM screen will appear in the main area allowing you to make basic sys tem settings and user specific settings p 207 17 SCENE This indicates the number and name of the scene that was last stored or recalled A lock icon is displayed for read only scenes If you edit the parameters from their last stored or recalled state an symbol will appear in the lower right When you press this field the SCENE LIST screen will appear in the main area allowing you to store or recall scenes p 125 When you press a button 7 through 11 to access the cor responding screen the button will be highlighted In this state pressing the button on
363. ned to the ST IN channels In order to use the signals connected here as inputs you will need to make patch settings M7CL Owners Manual 39 Connections 40 Analog output connections Monitor speakers foldback 00000000 LE RPORAI SLOT 6 6 amp amp 1 DE ELECTRIQUE PAS OUVRIR MIDI WORD CLOCK REMOTE R a OUT IN OUT IN pm 5 5 ae ocu mum amp Em EN B 6 5 4 3 2 1 A OA 20 o o o o oo 6 i SERRE HODES m 6 09 000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000 N 100000000000000000000000000 16 15 L 14 te fete Power cable Monitor speakers Main speakers To the OMNI OUT jacks 1 16 you can patch the output signals from output channels MIX MATRIX STEREO L R MONO monitor signals MONITOR OUT L R C channel and the direct out signals of INPUT channels 1 32 1 48 When the M7CL is in the default state the signals of the following channels are patched to each output port You are free to change this patching as desired OMNI OUT jacks 1 12 MIX channels 1 12 OMNI OUT jacks 13 14 MATRIX channels 1 2 OMNI OUT jacks 15 16 STEREO channel L R Below the M7CL s front pad there is a PHONES OUT jack for monitoring and thi
364. nge the direction forward or backward in which the list is sorted The operation that occurs when you press the SCENE MEM ORY 4 9 keys whether the number will move up down or Editing scene memories D If you want to edit the title or comment of a scene press the TITLE field or COMMENT field of the scene to access the SCENE TITLE EDIT or SCENE COMMENT EDIT popup window For details on entering text refer to Entering names gt p 30 1 SCENE TITLE field You can press this field to select it and enter a title for the scene maximum 16 characters 2 COMMENT field You can press this field to select it and enter a com ment for the scene The maximum is 32 characters You cannot edit the or comment of a read only scene or a write protected scene 6 To enable disable the protect setting press the protect symbol A protect symbol is displayed for write protected scenes these scenes cannot be overwritten NOTE e The symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled 7 Use the tool buttons to edit the scene mem ory For details refer to the section Scene memory edit ing that follows M7CL Owner s Manual Scene memory NO 131 Editing scene memories 132 Scene memory editing The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied pasted to other scene numbers or cleared erased Press the SCENE field in the function access area The SCENE LIST
365. nges to control parameters 187 Using parameter changes to control parameters 189 18 User settings Security 191 User Level settings 191 User types and user authentication keys 191 Setting the Administrator password 192 Creating a user authentication key 193 EOG DE 193 Changing the password 195 Editing a user authentication key 196 Changing the user level 196 198 User defined keys 200 M7CL Owner s Manual 7 8 COM SOS TOGKR ai 201 Locking the 201 Unlocking the console 201 Using a USB storage device to save load data 202 Saving the M7CL s internal data on a USB storage device 202 Loading a file from a USB storage device 203 Editing the files saved on a USB storage device 203 Formatting media on a USB storage device 206 19 Other functions 207 About the SETUP screen 207 Word Clock and Slot settings 208 Using cascade
366. no password is set the console will be unlocked 2 Press the CONSOLE LOCK button If you are logged in as a user for whom a password is set a keyboard window will appear allowing you to If 1 d i for wh ssword is you are logged in as a user for whom a pa enter the password set a keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the password For details on entering a password refer to Entering names p 30 User settings Security 2 Enter the password for the logged in user and press the OK button The console will be unlocked you will return to the 3 Enter the password for the logged in user SETUP screen and the controls will be operable once again and press the OK button The CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear the Con sole Lock function will be enabled and all controls You may disconnect the USB storage device while the con except MONITOR LEVEL knob will become inopera DM EU M7CL Owners Manual 201 Using a USB storage device to save load data Using a USB storage device to save load data This section explains how you can connect a commercially available USB storage device to the USB connector located at the right side of the display and use it to save or load internal settings of the M7CL or user authentication keys NOTE The M7CL can handle FAT32 FAT16 or FAT12 file systems but if you format the storage device from the M7CL it will be formatted as FAT16 L
367. not been performed yet because the USB storage device is being File Access is Busy accessed The USB storage device already contains a file directory with the same name as the one you are x File Already Exists attempting to save rename or create File Error xx Internal file access error File Protected Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB storage device is write protected Illegal Address The IP address or Gateway address setting is invalid Communication via the Ethernet connector is not possible because the MAC address setting has been damaged for some reason Please contact your Yamaha dealer Illegal Storage Format The USB storage device could not be accessed because its format is invalid or unsupported The internal power supply has stopped operating Alternatively some other problem has occurred If a i nterna PON EP SUPP YAS Cut Oi malfunction has occurred please contact your Yamaha dealer Internal Power Supply is Turned On The internal power supply has started up normally KEY IN CUE Turned Off KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window to a differ ent screen Loading Aborted Loading from USB storage device was aborted Low Battery The backup battery voltage is low All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup memory has been lost due to failure i Memory Erron AU initialized of the backup b
368. nput Level Time Time M7CL Owner s Manual 225 Dynamics Parameters COMPRESSOR The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter which with a RATIO of e 1 reduces the level to the threshold This means that the limiter s output level never actually exceeds the threshold THRESHOLD dB 54 to 0 55 points This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor O i zu E ig 20 This determines the amount of compression that is the change in output signal A level relative to change in input signal level 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 0 1 16 points 9 9 ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points 2 how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has AA Tia Gk 46 0 ene This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB OUT GAIN dB 0 0 to 418 0 181 points This sets the compressor s output signal level This determines how compression is applied at the threshold For higher knee set Hard 1 5 6 points tings compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold creating a more natural sound RELEASE ms O Characteristics e Time Series Analysis RATIO 1 KNEE hard OUT GAIN 0 0dB Input
369. ns This chapter explains other functionality of the not covered elsewhere About the SETUP screen In the SETUP screen you can make various settings that apply to the entire M7CL To access the SETUP screen press the SETUP button in the function access area The screen contains the following items 2 1 USER SETUP button Use this button to access the USER SETUP popup win dow where you can restrict the functionality available to each user and make system settings 2 LOGIN field Here you can switch users and change passwords gt 195 3 STORAGE field Here you can save load user settings on a USB storage device or create a user key p 202 4 WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP button Use this button to access the WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP popup window where you can make settings for word clock and for I O cards installed in slots 1 3 gt p 208 5 CASCADE button Use this button to access the CASCADE popup window where you can make settings for cascade connections gt p 210 6 OUTPORT SETUP button Use this button to access the OUTPUT PORT popup win dow where you can make output port settings p 96 7 MIDI button Use this button to access the MIDI popup window where you can make MIDI related settings gt 182 48V MASTER ON OFF button This button switches the master phantom power on off NOTE e If this button is off phantom power will not be supplied even
370. nt numbers following that location will be moved backward by the number of scenes that were inserted Using the Focus function Using the Focus function Focus is a function that lets you specify the parameters that will be updated when you recall scene For example it is convenient to use this if you want to recall only the input channel set tings of a certain scene e As a function similar to Focus there is also a Recall Safe function that lets you select channels and parameters to be excluded from recall operations p 136 However while the Focus function is specified for each scene Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes 1 Press the SCENE field in the function 3 Use the buttons other than ALL to select access area the parameters that will be subject to recall The SCENE LIST window will appear where you can for each scene perform various operations for scene memory These buttons correspond to the following parameters multiple selections are allowed W amp 2 Input channel parameters including DCA D SCENE field group settings 2 FOCUS tab our o Output channel parameters On off status and send level settings for signals WITH SEND sent from input channels to MIX buses and 2 Press the FOCUS tab at the bottom of the MATRIX bus shown only if the OUT button is on SCENE LIST window The FOCUS field will appear in the right half of the SCENE LIST window e The WITH SEND
371. nt to assign a function The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window will appear In this window you can select a function to assign to the user defined key and select option parameters USER SETUP button Make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a yellow frame and then use the buttons in the lower part of the field or the multifunction encoders of the panel to select the function you want to assign If the selected function has additional parameters the parameters are shown in the PARAMETER 1 72 field For details on the assignable functions and their parameters refer to Functions that can be assigned to user defined keys p 253 2 Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window 6 If the selected function has parameters press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move the yellow frame and select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way USERDEFINED USER DEFINED KEYS KEYS tab for GUEST tab 7 Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window 3 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page Assign the desired functions to other user If you are logged in as the Administrator you can also defined keys in the same way select the USER DEFINED KEYS for GUEST page to 9 To execute an assigned function press the make user defined 0 settings for the Guest account corresponding USER DEFINED 1 12 key The twelve buttons in the screen corresponds to user
372. nter of SETUP button to access the SETUP screen the screen press the WORD CLOCK SLOT In the SETUP screen you can make settings that apply SETUP button to open the WORD CLOCK to the entire M7CL SLOT SETUP popup window This popup window contains the following items 12 MASTER CLOCK SELECT field SYSTEM SETUP field Use the buttons to select the clock source you want to use as the word clock master The frequency of the 2 WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP button clock on which the M7CL is currently operating is shown in the upper left of this field This will indicate UNLOCKED if synchronization is not achieved such as immediately after the master clock has been switched M7CL Owners Manual 2 Slot number Card type This area shows the type of digital I O card installed in slots 1 3 3 CHANNEL This area shows the channel numbers of the digital I O card s installed in slots 1 3 4 FREQUENCY Clock frequency This indicates the clock frequency of the signal being input to each channel of the digital I O card in sets of two channels 5 SRC Sampling Rate Converter These buttons are on off switches in two groups of two channels for the sampling rate converters that automatically convert an external clock frequency to match the M7CL This is available only for slots in which a digital I O card with a built in sampling rate converter is installed 6 EMPHASIS STATUS This indicates whether emphasis is
373. nual 253 Functions that can be assigned to user defined keys CH1 16 17 32 33 48 ST IN MATRIX ST MONO DCA SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS LIBRARY INPUT EQ LIBRARY LIBRARY OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY EFFECT LIBRARY GEQ LIBRARY INPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH M7CL EDITOR CONTROL PATCH EDITOR INPUT INSERT PATCH OUTPUT Access the M7CL EDITOR screen INSERT PATCH DIRECT OUT PATCH PATCH LIST RACK EDITOR RACK RACK1 8 METER INPUT METER OUTPUT METER DCA GROUP MUTE GROUP ona CHANNEL LINK SCENE MEMORY RECALL SAFE PESE FADE TIME 254 4 M7CL Owners Manual MIDI Data Format MIDI Data Format This section explains the format of the data that the M7CL is able to understand send and receive 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE 1 1 NOTE OFF 8n Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if OTHER ECHO is ON They are received if Rx CH matches and used to control effects STATUS 1000nnnn 8n Note off message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note number Ovvvvwvww vv Velocity ignored 1 2 NOTE ON 9n Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if OTHER ECHO is ON They are received if Rx CH matches and used to control effects STATUS 1001nnnn 9n Note on message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note number Ovvvvvww vv Velocity 1 127 0 off 1 3 CONTROL CHANGE Bn Two types of control change can be transmitted and received NRPN Non Registered Parameter Numbers and freely assigned TABLE 1CH x 110 messages Select
374. numbered racks will be linked In the case of a Flex I5GEQ the GEQ A GEQ B within the same rack will be linked NOTE e The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible 5 FLAT button This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB 69 GEQ ON OFF button Switches the currently selected GEQ on off If you re using a stereo source link the two GEQ units You will be able to use the GEQ LINK button if you have selected a 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ for adja cent odd numbered even numbered racks When you turn this button on the following popup window will appear To enable linking press any button other than CANCEL The popup window contains the following items ie LINE r4 Link CD GEQ xy button x and are the rack number or the rack number and the alphabetical characters A or B The parameters of x will be copied to and then linked 2 GEQ yx button The parameters of will be copied to x and then linked 3 RESET BOTH button The parameters of both will be initialized and then linked 4 CANCEL button Cancels the link and closes the popup window When you link GEQ units a symbol will appear in the GEQ EFFECT field to indicate the linked status Indicate the linked status 6 In the function access area press a RACK button to open the VIRTUAL RACK window and use the GEQ EFFECT tabs to select the GEQ EFFECT field
375. o all MATRIX buses can be adjusted simulta neously Using the Centralogic section In this method you use the multifunction encoders of the Centralogic section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses When using this method the signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section Here s how you can use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels of the signals sent from a specific input channel to all MATRIX buses 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals and that your external device is connected to the corresponding output port For details on assigning an output port to a MATRIX bus refer to p 95 For details on connecting an exter nal device refer to p 39 2 Use the SEL keys of the top panel to select the input channel that will send sig nals to the MATRIX buses 3 Press any one of the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen Adjustments of send levels from the input channel to the MIX buses MATRIX buses 15 done in the TO MIX TO MATRIX field of this screen M7CL Owners Manual 1 TO MIX TO MATRIX field In this field you can switch the on off status and adjust the level of the signal sent from the input channel to the MIX buses MATRIX buses 2 TO MIX TO MATRIX buttons
376. o select the copy source channel press the corresponding SEL key to make it light The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window When you choose the copy source channel the DES TINATION CHs field is automatically emboldened allowing you to select the copy destination If you want to re select the copy source channel press the SOURCE CH field NOTE Copy settings can be made only in the order of copy source copy destination 4 To select the copy destination channel s press the corresponding SEL key to make it light multiple selections are allowed The corresponding channel s is are highlighted in the DESTINATION CHs field of the window The chan nels that can be selected will depend on the channel you selected in step 3 If you want to defeat all of the selected copy destina tion channels press the DESTINATION CHs field D If you selected MIX MATRIX channel as the copy source use the buttons of the COPY TARGET field to select the parame ters you want to copy 6 To execute the copy press the COPY but ton The copy will be executed and the settings will over write the parameters of the copy destination chan nel s After the copy has been executed the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CHs field will return to an unset state 7 close the CH COPY MODE popup win dow press the CLOSE button Moving the parameters of a channel The settings o
377. o the multi function encoder located immediately below that knob allowing you to control up to eight parameters simulta neously While a knob is selected turning the multifunc tion encoder located immediately below that knob will change the value of the corresponding parameter In the SCENE LIST screen you can make a multiple selection by turning a multifunction encoder while press ing it Press the touch screen to select the knob you want to operate ay Using the multi function encod ers to control parameters 52 The on screen user interface Operations such as mixing and adjusting the sound of each channel are performed using the top panel faders keys and encoders However to make more detailed settings you will need to access the appropriate function and edit the parameter values in the touch screen The section below explains the various user interface components shown in the touch screen and how to use them Tabs Some screens shown in the display consist of multiple pages In screens of this type the page name is shown at the top and bottom The area of the display showing a page name is called a tab Tabs are used to switch between pages within the same screen 18 GAIN M7CL Owner s Manual Buttons Buttons in the display are used to execute specific func tions to switch parameters on off or to select one of mul tiple choices Button
378. ob This screen shows the send level of the signal sent from the input channels to the MIX bus To adjust the level operate multifunction encoders 1 8 If the send destination MIX bus is set to stereo the TO MIX PAN knob for a ST IN channel the TO MIX BALANCE knob and TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob are shown in this location 7 ALL PRE button This button selects PRE as the position from which signals are sent from all input channels to VARI type MIX buses ALL POST button This button selects POST as the position from which signals are sent from all input channels to VARI type MIX buses 6 Use the TO MIX SEND ON OFF buttons to switch the signals sent from the input chan nels to the currently selected MIX bus on off 7 f necessary use the PRE buttons to select the location of the signal that is sent from each input channel to a VARI type MIX bus a gt ately before the attenuator or PRE FADER immediately before the fader for each MIX bus This setting is made in the BUS SETUP popup window gt p 212 e The PRE button is not shown for FIXED type MIX buses 8 Repeat steps 3 6 to adjust the send level for other MIX buses in the same way 64 1 M7CL Owners Manual f the PRE button is on you can also select PRE EQ immedi Using the faders SENDS ON FADER mode Here s how you can use the faders of the top panel to adjust the signal that is sent from all input channels to a specific MIX bus
379. oder 8 Press the SEL key of another input chan nel and adjust the pan balance in the same way When you press a SEL key to select another channel the channel shown in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will change accordingly Using the Centralogic section settings for eight channels Here s how to use the Centralogic section and OVER VIEW screen to adjust the input level and pan balance sent to the STEREO bus for up to eight signals at a time Press a navigation key in the NAVIGATION KEYS section so that the input channels you want to control are assigned to the Centralogic section The selected eight channels are shown in the OVER VIEW screen a o b b GST c TO STEREO MONO field 2 Make sure that in the TO STEREO MONO field of the screen the ST symbol of each channel is on white characters on pink background The ST MONO symbol in the OVERVIEW screen indicates the on off status of the signal sent from that input channel to the STEREO MONO buses If the ST symbol is off gray characters on a black background use the TO ST PAN BALANCE field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW page to switch it on gt p 47 3 4 6 In the Centralogic section verify that the ON of the corresponding input channel is on In the STEREO MONO MASTER section make sure that the ON key of the STEREO channel is on and raise the STEREO chan nel fader to 0 dB In the Centralogic section raise the fader
380. oduce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to dis tribute this type of product If you can not locate the appro priate retailer please contact Yamaha Corporation of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products dis tributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiar ies class B IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN and YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED This applies only to products distributed by FCC DoC YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA This applies only to products distributed by 3 wires Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd
381. of the corresponding input channel to an appropriate volume In this state you should now hear sound from the speaker system that is patched to the STEREO chan nel You can also adjust the input level using the faders of the INPUT section or ST IN section instead of the faders of the Centralogic section If you don t hear sound check whether the LR meters are moving in the METER field of the function access area If the LR meters are moving It may be that the STEREO channel is not correctly patched to the output jacks that are connected to your speaker system Check the output port patching gt p 95 if the LR meters not moving It may be that the INPUT channel ON key is off Check the status of the ON key p 16 e The signal being output from the STEREO channel can also be monitored using headphones connected to the PHONES OUT jack located below the front pad gt 142 To adjust the pan balance of the signal sent from each input channel to the STEREO bus press a knob in the TO STEREO MONO field of the screen to select it and turn the multifunction encoders of the Centralogic section When you turn a multifunction encoder the knob in the TO STEREO MONO field of the OVERVIEW screen will also turn 7 Use the navigation keys to switch the eight channels controlled by the Centralogic sec tion and make adjustments for other input channels in the same way Setting up to use the M7CL
382. off and the HPF knob adjusts the cutoff frequency wm gt Output channels do not have a high pass filter that is inde pendent of the EQ However you can turn on the high pass button in the popup window to use the LOW band EQ as a high pass filter For both input channels and output channels you can turn on the low pass filter button to use the HIGH band EQ as a low pass filter 5 If you want to copy EQ settings to another channel or initialize the EQ settings use the tool buttons of the ATT HPF EQ popup window For details on how to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons p 31 m gt EQ settings can be saved loaded at any time using the dedi cated library gt p 31 Presets suitable for a variety of instru ments or situations are also provided e You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ and high pass filter p 81 e Even when the ATT HPF EQ popup window is displayed you can use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control the EQ M7CL Owner s Manual EQ and Dynamics Co 107 Using dynamics Using dynamics Input channels provide two dynamics processors and output channels provide one dynamics processor 1 Use the navigation keys to access the Output channels 108 OVERVIEW screen for the channel whose dynamics you want to control The DYNAMICS 1 2 field s
383. ol all of the parameters for a specific channel 1 Use a SEL key to select the channel you want to control The SELECTED CHANNEL section controls the channel that was last selected by its SEL key To select an INPUT ST IN STEREO or MONO channel press the appropriate SEL key in the INPUT section ST IN section or STEREO MONO MASTER mr section of the top panel E n addition you can make settings the PREFERENCE To select a MIX or MATRIX channel use the Naviga screen so that you can access detailed parameters that can tion keys to recall the desired channel to the Central not be edited in the SELECTED CHANNEL section For ogic section and then press the SEL key for the details refer to p 198 desired channel Even 1f a different screen is selected the knobs of the Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section E The number and name of the currently selected chan SELECTED CHANNEL section always affect the cur nel is shown in the channel select field located in the rently selected channel In this case a window indicat function access area of the touch screen ing the value of that parameter will appear in the screen when you operate a knob Channel number Channel name gt In the case of ST IN channels or STEREO channels you switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same SEL key You can also switch channels by pressing the channel select field located in th
384. on This turns the dynamics processor on off DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window ALL This window displays the dynamics settings of all input channels or output channels at once This page is only for display and does not allow the parameters to be edited It is useful when you need to quickly check the dynamics settings for all channels or when you want to copy paste dynamics settings between dis tant channels LB A Mur ar io Prem his a D ITI 1 mt 2 EIL E EIL E I LH qudm nul mes ey 2 E eee cae ce Ewe Ewe uw 2 uuum am 1 Channel select button This indicates the channel number the icon selected for that channel and the channel name You can press these buttons to select a channel or a range of chan nels 2 GR meter This indicates the amount of gain reduction The level display is the same as for the eight channel window You can press the GR meter to switch to the one chan nel popup window with that channel selected Access the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window 1 ch and press the DYNAMICS ON button to enable the dynamics processor If you access the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window 1 ch you ll be able to edit all parameters M7CL Owner s Manual EQ and Dynamics Co
385. on The oscillator signal will be sent to the bus you selected in step 5 When you press the button again the oscillator will turn off You can also assign oscillator on off or an ASSIGN change to a user defined key gt p 200 Chanter 15 Meters This chapter explains the METER screen that shows the input output level meters for all channels and operations relating to the optional MBM7CL meter bridge Operations in the METER screen By accessing the METER screen you can view the input output levels of all channels in the screen or switch the level meter s metering points the points in the signal route at which the level is detected 1 In the function access area press the 1 MIX channels 1 16 METER field to access the METER screen This area indicates the output levels and fader values The METER screen will appear and the background of the MIX channels If the corresponding MIX chan of the METER field will turn white nels are assigned to the Centralogic section operating the faders of the Centralogic section will change these values in realtime 2 MATRIX channels 1 8 This area indicates the output levels and fader values of the MATRIX channels If the MATRIX channels are assigned to the Centralogic section operating the faders of the Centralogic section will change these val ues in realtime CUE meter 8 STEREO channel L R MONO channel This area indicates the output levels and fader values of the STEREO c
386. on MATRIX bus is assigned as stereo the left knob of the two adjacent TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MATRIX PAN knob for a ST IN channel it will operate as the TO MATRIX BALANCE knob TO MATRIX LEUEL e For an INPUT channel the right knob will adjust the common send level to the two MATRIX buses and the left knob will adjust the panning between the two MATRIX buses Turning the left TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob toward the left will increase the amount of signal sent to the odd numbered MATRIX bus and turning it toward the right will increase the amount sent to the even numbered MATRIX bus For a ST IN channel the right knob adjusts the com mon send level for the two MATRIX buses and the left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right signals sent to the two MATRIX buses Turning the left TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob toward the left will increase the amount of signal sent from the L channel to the odd numbered MATRIX bus and turn ing it toward the right will increase the amount sent from the R channel to the even numbered MATRIX bus gt e If necessary the TO MATRIX PAN TO MATRIX BALANCE knob setting can be linked with operations of the TO ST PAN TO ST BALANCE knob shown in the STEREO MONO field of the OVERVIEW screen gt 212 Make sure that the TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF button is turned on for the send desti nation MATRIX bus If this button is off press the button in th
387. on key saved on a USB storage device You may also log in using a user authentication key created on a different M7CL console 1 Connect a USB storage device to the USB connector 2 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 3 Press the log in button to open the LOGIN window 4 Press the LOAD button for EXTERNAL USER KEY The SAVE LOAD popup window will appear and the files and directories saved on the USB storage device will be displayed User authentication keys have a file name of User name M7U 5 Turn multifunction encoder 1 to select the user authentication key for the user as whom you want to log in For details on loading from a USB storage device refer to Loading a file from a USB storage device gt p 203 6 Press the LOAD button If no password has been set you will simply be logged in If a password has been set a keyboard win dow will appear allowing you to enter the password e If you select a user authentication key that was created on a different M7CL console a keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the M7CL that you will be using If the Administrator passwords are identical this window will not appear When you enter the correct Administrator password another keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the password for the selected user e If you re save the user authentication key you w
388. on the panel defined keys 1 12 on the panel and the function or parameter assigned to each one is shown below the corresponding button If nothing is assigned to the but ton an indication of is shown 200 1 M7CL Owners Manual Console lock Console lock You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation This set ting completely disables operations of the panel and touch screen so that controls cannot be operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break If a password is set for the currently logged in user that password will be used for the Console Lock function If you power cycle the console while it is locked you will be asked to enter the password if you had been logged in as a user for whom a password is assigned If you had been logged in as the Guest the console will start up normally NOTE f you have forgotten the password refer to Initializing the 7 internal memory p 216 The Guest cannot set a password Even while the console is locked control from an external device via MIDI or M7CL Editor will still operate as usual Locking the console T the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen Unlocking the console T In the CONSOLE LOCK screen press the UNLOCK button CONSOLE LOCK button If you are logged in as a user for whom
389. ong file names are not supported Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash memory that is no larger than 2 GB N CAUTION An ACCESS indicator is shown in the function access area while data is being accessed saved loaded or deleted Do not disconnect the USB connector or power off the M7CL while this indicator is shown Doing so may damage the data on the storage media Saving the M7ZGI s internal data 3 If necessary press the directory icon and T change the directory USB storage device To move to the next higher level press the arrow but Here s how all of the M7CL s internal data except for the ton in the PATH field data included in a user authentication key can be saved on the USB storage device as a file The saved file will have 4 Press the SAVE button ME A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter a file name and comment T In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen SAVE LOAD button 5 Enter a file name of up to eight characters a comment of up to 32 characters and press the SAVE button When the file has finished being saved the popup window showing the save progress indication and the type of data will close 2 Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window 202 1 M7CL Owners Manual Loading a file from a USB storage device Here s how to load a M7CL setting file M7C from the USB st
390. opup window ALL This window shows the head amp settings of all input channels Here you can also adjust the head amp gain in groups of the selected eight channels TO ir B ol LI LJ 3 M7CL Owners Manual 1 Channel select button This indicates the channel number the 1con selected for that channel and the channel name When you press this button that channel will be selected for operations and the corresponding SEL key will light 2 GAIN knob This indicates the gain of the head amp assigned to the channel To adjust the value press the knob to select it and operate multifunction encoders 1 8 The indicator located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the presence or absence of a signal for the corresponding port 3 48V This indicates the phantom power on red or off black status for the head amp assigned to the chan nel 4 Phase This indicates either normal phase black or reverse phase orange for the head amp assigned to the chan nel 4 Access either the 1 ch or 8 ch HA PATCH 5 popup window Use the on screen buttons or the multifunc tion encoders to edit the head amp gain phase and phantom power on off settings e The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between 14 dB and 13 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold out
391. or each chan nel 6 In the STEREO MONO MASTER section of the top panel make sure that the ON key of the STEREO channel MONO channel is turned on and raise the fader to an appro priate position Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO buses 7 In the INPUT section or ST IN section of the top panel make sure that the ON key is turned on for the input channel you want to control and raise the fader to an appropri ate position The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 5 Channels for which mode is selected 8 In the TO STEREO MONO popup window use the STEREO MONO button to turn the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus on or off For a channel that is set to ST MONO mode the sig nals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on off individually In the TO STEREO MONO popup window use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus Channels for which LCR mode is selected 8 In the TO STEREO MONO popup window use the LCR button to turn the signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus on or off together For a channel that is set to LCR mode the signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus are switched on off together 9 In the TO STEREO MONO popup window use the
392. orage device on which it was saved T In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen SAVE LOAD button 2 Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window File list LOAD button 3 To select the file you want to load press the desired file in the file list or turn multifunc tion encoder 1 on the panel The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations Using a USB storage device to save load data 4 Press the LOAD button and a confirmation dialog box will appear 5 Press the OK button to begin loading the file When the file has finished being loaded the popup window showing the progress indication and the type of data will close Even if you cancel during this pro cedure the data up to that point will have been loaded The type of file that can be loaded will depend on the User Level setting at the time you load the file Editing the files saved on a USB storage device Here s how you can perform editing operations such as sorting the files and directories on a USB storage device editing the file names or comments copying or pasting File editing T In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen SAVE LOAD button 2 Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window The list will show the files and sub directories that have been saved M7CL Owner s Man
393. orresponding input channel Adjustments of send levels to the MIX MATRIX buses is done in the TO MIX TO MATRIX field of this screen 1 TO MIX TO MATRIX field In this field you can switch the on off status and adjust the level of the signal sent from the input channel to the MIX buses MATRIX buses 2 TO MIX TO MATRIX buttons These buttons select the send destination that is con trolled by the TO MIX TO MATRIX field If the TO MIX button is on you are controlling the signals sent to the MIX buses 3 TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MIX bus To adjust the send levels use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section If the send destination MIX bus is set to stereo the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a PAN knob for a ST IN channel the BALANCE knob If the TO MIX SEND ON OFF button 4 is off the knob will be dimmed M7CL Owner s Manual Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus Input channel operations 61 Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus 4 TO MIX SEND ON OFF button This is an on off switch for the signal sent from the input channel to MIX bus An indication of PRE in black characters on a white background is shown above these buttons only if PRE pre fader is selected as the position from which the signal is sent from the
394. ors for which the paste destionation has the same type GATE DUCKING COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER H COMPANDER S or DE ESSER as the copy source Between effects mounted in a rack e Only 31 Band GEQ settings that use less than fifteen bands can be copied to a Flex15GEQ 1 Open a popup window that provides the tool buttons 2 Select the channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect whose settings you want to copy 3 Press the COPY button The current settings will be saved in the buffer mem Ory NOTE Be aware that if you copy other settings before you paste the buffer memory will be overwritten You can select only one channel or rack as the copy source If multiple channels are selected in the 8 ch ALL popup window you won t be able to press the COPY button 4 Select the paste destination channel or rack a gt If you re pasting EQ dynamics settings you can use the 8 ch ALL popup window to select multiple channels as the paste destination In this case the same content will be pasted to all selected channels 5 Press the PASTE button The settings of the channel EQ dynamics or the rack GEQ effect you selected in step 2 will be pasted NOTE Be aware that when you paste the settings will overwrite the paste destination e f nothing has been stored in the buffer memory the PASTE button cannot be pressed e Of the two types of GEQ using the tool buttons in a rack
395. ort setting is changed the transmission will be disabled When Parameter change ECHO is on the message will be sent as it is STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0O0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010001 11 M7CL DATA 00100001 21 REMOTE LEVEL METER CATEGORY DATA Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL Oddddddd dd Datal EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 4 9 2 Format Parameter request Receive Source Channel Number L 1 Destination Channel Number H 1 Osssssss ss Oddddddd dd Data will be received when Parameter change Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when Parameter change ECHO is on the corresponding metering data will be sent EOX 11110111 4 8 2 Module MODULE NAME dd F7 Destination Channel Number L 1 End of exclusive Pair On with Copy PAIRONCP Pair On with Reset Both PAIRONRS Pair Off PAIROFF 1 0 1 47 48 256 MIX 1 271 MIX 16 512 1 519 8 via Rx CH in constant interval for a given period of time The interval and time will vary depending on devices When Address UL 0x7F is received all metering data transmission will be immediately stopped disabled Transmission When Parameter chan
396. other electronic devices Compliance with FCC This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE Hesponsible Party Yamaha Corporation of America Address 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 Telephone 714 522 9011 Type of Equipment DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE Model Name M7CL 48 M7CL 32 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation See user manual instructions if interference to radio recep tion is suspected regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of interference which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to co axial type cable If these corrective measures do not pr
397. parameters of the STEREO MONO channels STEREO MONO mp o SEL SEL Ho CUE CUE STEREO MONO 20 1 M7CL Owners Manual 1 SEL key This key selects the channel to be controlled When you press this key to make the LED light that channel will be selected for control in the SELECTED CHANNEL sec tion and in the touch screen For the STEREO channel the selected object of control will alternate between the L and R channels each time you press the SEL key 2 CUE key This key selects the channel to be cue monitored If cue is on the LED will light 3 ON key This key switches the channel on off If a channel is on the key LED will light 4 Fader This adjusts the output level of the channel E NAVIGATION KEYS section In this section you can select the channels that will be con trolled by the Centralogic section and in the touch screen NOTE e If you press and hold a navigation key for two seconds or longer that key will blink At this time only the object of control for the Centralogic section will be changed to the corresponding channels and fixed If you press a different navigation key while the first key is blinking only the object of control in the touch screen will be changed S ll 17 32 in IN 16 1 p 33 40 IN 1 8 key 2 IN 9 16 key 3 IN 17 24 key 4 IN 25 32 key The
398. phic EQ The M7CL lets you mount a GEQ in racks 1 8 and patch it to the insert out in of a channel The gain of each band can be adjusted using the Centralogic section s faders and ON keys The following two types of GEQ are provided e 31 Band GEQ This is a monaural 31 GEQ Each band is 1 3 octave wide the adjustable gain range is 15 dB and the gain of all thirty one bands can be adjusted If a 31 Band GEQ is mounted in a rack one channel of input and output can be used for that rack INPUT Rack OUTPUT e Flex15GEQ T This is a monaural 15 band GEQ Each band is 1 3 octave wide and the adjust able gain range is 15 dB The Flex15GEQ lets you adjust the gain for any fifteen of the same bands as the thirty one bands of the 31 Band GEQ Once you ve used up fifteen bands of adjustment you won t be able to adjust the gain of another band until you reset a previously adjusted band to the flat setting A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two Flex15GEQ units shown as A and B respectively mounted in that rack and will allow two channels of input and output If you mount a Flex15GEQ in each rack you ll be able to use up to sixteen GEQ units simultaneously INPUT OUTPUT Hack Flex15GEQ A Flex15GEQ B Graphic EQ operations Graphic EQ operations Inserting a GEQ in a channel The M7CL s GEQ units can be patched to the insert in out of any channel except the ST
399. plied User settings include the following information Password except for Guest User level except for Administrator User settings Security CO e Preferences User defined keys M7CL Owners Manual 191 User Level settings Privileges for each user are as follows User authentication key Logged in user keys ano User Level setting Password Comment USB storage device setting editing Create new new Overwrite save Available Edad cannot edit since Administrator Administrator can edit Administrator set Available Available tings and Guest settings can always perform all operations Guest settings can be edited preferences editing Available Available Available Available Available Available Normal user Available user without Available N A Available Available only settings other Power User viewing only than User Level privileges TN Setting the Administrator password 3 Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field then enter the same password in the With the factory settings the Administrator password 1 RE ENTER PASSWORD field for verifica not set meaning that anyone can log in with Administrator tion and finally press the OK button privileges and perform all operations If you want to restrict the operations of other users you must specify an Administrator password The password can be up to eight characters If the two passwords that were
400. popup window e Ifa rack in which a GEQ is mounted is specified as the insert Inserting an external device into a channel 6 Press the INSERT IN popup button The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the input port used for insert in 7 Specify the input port you will use for insert in and press the CLOSE button Press the INSERT ON OFF button to turn it ON In this state insert out in is enabled Adjust the input output levels of your external device as necessary e Even if the INSERT ON OFF button is OFF the signal selected for insert out will continue to be sent 9 If you want to change the insert out in posi tion access the one channel INSERT DIRECT OUT popup button and press one of the two INSERT fields The INSERT field you pressed will be enabled and the other INSERT field will be disabled 1 When you have finished making all set tings click the x symbol located in the upper right to close the window You will return to the OVERVIEW screen 11 As desired make insert settings for other channels as well M7CL Owner s Manual Input output patching 101 Directly outputting an INPUT channel Directly outputting an INPUT channel The signal of an INPUT channel can be directly output from a desired OMNI OUT jack or from an output channel of the desired slot For example signals can be sent via a digital I O card installed in a slot to an external d
401. popup buttons 4 Select the mute group s for other channels 4 Press the popup button for the user defined in the same way key to which you want to assign the mute on off function The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear M7CL Owners Manual 117 Using mute groups 118 5 Choose MUTE MASTER in the FUNCTION column and choose MUTE GROUP x where x is the mute group number in the PARAMETER 1 column Then press the OK button To select an item in each column use 1 1 buttons or the multifunction encoders When you press the OK button the Mute On Off function for the specified mute group will be assigned to the user defined key you selected in step 4 and you will return to the USER DEFINED KEYS page For more about user defined keys refer to User defined keys p 200 6 In the same way assign the Mute On Off function for another mute group to a differ ent user defined key M7CL Owners Manual 7 When you have finished assigning func tions to user defined keys press the x symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page 8 In the function access area press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen 9 To mute a mute group press the user defined key 1 12 that s assigned to the desired mute group The LED of the user defined key will light and all channels belonging to the selected mute group will be muted At this time the ON key of the
402. put impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power The GAIN knob 48V button and e button are valid only for channels whose assigned input port is an INPUT jack ST IN Jack or a slot that is connected to an external head amp device e g Yamaha AD8HR For details on connecting external head amp devices p 177 Perform the same operations for other input channels as desired If you are viewing the 1 ch HA PATCH popup win dow you can also use the SEL keys to switch the channel for editing If you are viewing the 8 ch HA PATCH popup win dow you can use the navigation keys to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight channels 7 When you re finished editing press the x symbol in the upper right of the window Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO buses Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO buses This section explains how to send the signal of an input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus The STEREO bus and MONO bus are used mainly to send signals to the main speakers There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus ST MONO mode and LCR mode You can select the mode individually for each channel These modes differ in the following ways ST MONO mode This mode sends the signal from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently The signal sent from
403. r panel 1 MIX meters These indicate the level of MIX channels 1 16 2 MATRIX meters These indicate the level of MATRIX channels 1 8 IIO lt lt m 2 METER BRIDGE MBM7CL FOR M7CL 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 Panels and controls 3 PAN encoder When an input channel is selected This adjusts the panning of the signal that is sent from the selected channel to the L R channels or L C R channels of the STEREO bus When a ST IN channel is selected This adjusts the left right balance of the signals that are sent from the selected two channels to the STE REO bus When a MIX channel MONO x 2 is selected This adjusts the panning of the signal that is sent from the selected channel to the L R channels of the STE REO bus When a MIX channel STEREO is selected This adjusts the left right balance of the signals that are sent from the selected two channels to the STE REO bus When a MATRIX channel STEREO is selected This adjusts the left right balance of the signals that are sent from the selected two channels to the STE REO bus When a STEREO channel is selected This adjusts the left right balance of the signals that are output from the L R channels of the STEREO bus 4 DYNAMICS 1
404. r allowing you to select the input source for the rack Switch the tabs as necessary and select the input source that you want to use When you select an input source in the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window a dialog box will ask you for confirmation To confirm the operation press the OK button m gt You have the option of making settings so that the confirma tion dialog box does not appear gt p 198 Normally can specify two channels of input for each rack However if you have selected 31 Band GEQ only one chan nel can be used About the virtual rack 1 Channel select buttons Use these buttons to select the input source Use the four tabs to switch between groups of input sources shown in the window 2 CLOSE button Closes the popup window The following input sources can be selected in this popup window Baton ame mputsouree MIX 1 16 MIX channel 1 16 outputs MATRIX 1 8 MATRIX channel 1 8 outputs STEREO STEREO L R channel and STEREO R MONO C MONO C channel outputs CH 1 32 INPUT channel 1 32 Insert INSERT our 179 Outs ieee oun INPUT channel 33 48 Insert Outs M7CL 48 only MIX 1 16 MIX channel 1 16 Insert Outs MATRIX 1 8 MATRIX channel 1 8 Insert Outs STEREO L STEREO L R channel and STEREO R MONO C channel Insert MONO C Outs OUT CH 1 CH 33 48 OUT CH INSERT OUT 1 Cannot be selected for 31 Band GEQ o
405. r EQ the OVER segment will light If the corresponding chan nel is stereo a ST IN channel a MIX MATRIX chan nel set to stereo or the STEREO channel level meters for two channels are displayed EQ graph This graph shows the approximate response of the EQ parameters A pointer is shown at the peak of each band The response curve will change when you edit the Q FREQUENCY or GAIN knobs of each band If the EQ or high pass filter is on the response curve is highlighted 9 ATT knob This knob adjusts the amount of attenuation gain immediately before input to the EQ in a range of 96 dB to 24 dB Use this to compensate for level changes produced by the EQ You can use multifunc tion encoder to control this HPF knob HPF ON OFF button input channels only Here you can switch on off the high pass filter located after attenuation and before EQ and adjust its cutoff frequency You can use multifunction encoder 2 to adjust the cutoff frequency in a range of 20 600 Hz 17 Q FREQUENCY GAIN knobs These knobs adjust the Q FREQUENCY center fre quency and GAIN amount of boost cut for each band LOW LOW MID HIGH MID and HIGH Press a knob to select the band you want to control and use multifunction encoders 3 8 to make adjust ments M7CL Owner s Manual 2 High pass filter button output channels only If this button is on the LOW band EQ will function as a high pass filter In this case the LOW band
406. r Flex15GEQ wm gt e f you select Insert Out as the input source for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ the Insert In of the same channel will auto matically be selected as the output destination for that rack When you defeat an insert out the insert in will be defeated automatically For details on Insert Out In refer to Inserting an external device into a channel p 100 6 To select the output source for a rack press the OUTPUT button for that rack The INPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the output destination for the rack Switch the tabs as necessary and select the out put destination that you want to use When you select an output destination in the INPUT CH SELECT popup window a dialog box will ask you to confirm the change To confirm the change press the OK button M7CL Owner s Manual Graphic EQ and effects 159 About the virtual rack 160 a gt You have the option of making settings so that the confirma tion dialog box does not appear gt p 198 You can specify multiple output destinations for a rack Normally you will be able to specify two channels of output for a rack but if the 31 Band GEQ is selected only one channel can be used 1 Channel select buttons Use these buttons to select the output destination Use the six tabs to switch between groups of output desti nations shown in the window 2 CLOSE button Closes the pop
407. r memory the PASTE button is not available 5 To execute the paste operation press the OK button The scene stored in the buffer memory will be pasted to the scene number you selected in step 4 If you decide to cancel the Paste operation press the CAN CEL button instead of the OK button NOTE 7 Be aware that when you paste to a scene number in which scene has already been stored the existing scene will be overwritten Read only scenes or write protected scenes cannot be pasted Editing scene memories Clearing a scene Here s how to clear a specified scene 1 Press the SCENE field in the function access area The SCENE LIST window will appear Turn any one of the multifunction encoders to select the scene number that you want to clear and press the CLEAR button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear opera tion You may select multiple scenes to be cleared To do so turn the MULTI SELECT button on and turn a multifunction encoder or press the multifunction encoder while you turn it To execute the Clear operation press the OK button The scene number s you selected in step 2 will be cleared If you decide to cancel the Clear operation press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button NOTE Read only scenes or write protected scenes cannot be cleared M7CL Owners Manual Scene memory NO 133 Editing scene memories Cutting a scene H
408. r switch disconnect the electric plug from the outlet and have the Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel them in any way The device contains no user serviceable parts If it should appear to be malfunctioning discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel e Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding connection Improper grounding can result in electrical shock N CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others or damage to the device or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord e Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for extended periods of time or during electrical storms Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall OVer Do not block the vents This device has ventilation holes at the rear to prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high In particular do not place the device on its side or upside down Inadequate ventilation can result in overheating possibly causing damage to the device s or even fire Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV radio stereo equipment mobile phone or other electric devices Doing so may result in noi
409. r the desired channels or DCA groups and choose the parameters that will be excluded from Recall operations The channel or DCA group you selected by pressing its SEL key will be shown in this field as the target of your operations If you press any of the SEL keys of the DCA groups the parameters for DCA groups 1 8 will be shown simultaneously 5 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button If these buttons are on when you operate the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT buttons the changes will apply to all input or output channels This is conve nient when you want to make settings for all channels together e The RECALL SAFE MODE popup window can also be accessed from the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen s RECALL SAFE field gt p 85 3 To select the channel or DCA group whose Recall Safe settings you want to edit press the corresponding SEL key The corresponding channel or DCA group will be enclosed by a white frame in the CH RECALL SAFE field However this white frame does not mean that the Recall Safe setting is now enabled The selected channel DCA groups 1 8 will be recalled to the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field If the CH RECALL SAFE field s SET BY SEL button is Recall Safe will be enabled when you press the SEL key and the corresponding channel or DCA group will be high lighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field You can select param eters as described in step 4 even after turning Recall Safe
410. ray 176 GLOBAL RECALL SAFE 136 Graphic EQ 157 161 Grounding screw 23 191 H HA Head Amp gain settings 44 HA Head Amp settings 55 HA PATCH popup window e ener eee n 55 56 56 al M S 29 ING 129 Initialize the internal memory 216 E RN 35 124 INPUT channels 1 32 1 48 13 51 INPUT CUE 145 INPUT jacks 1 32 1 48 22 Input patch settings 98 INPUT section 16 Input output characteristics 266 INSERT DIRECT OUT popup win dow o ATE E 100 102 PE E 100 102 Inserting a scene 134 Installing an option card 42 Internal 213 Internal effect parameters 171 Internal effects 167 Inserting an internal effect into a CHANING MIROR RN 170 Internal memory 216 IP ADDRESS eee 214 K Keyboard window 27 Keys Special operations 25 AMOD 27 L LAMP connector 22 LCR
411. rder of the devices connected to the REMOTE connector from 1 to six This area also shows the on off status of the master phantom power M7CL Owners Manual must specify the appropriate input port manually If this is set incorrectly the external HA will not be detected correctly when you patch input ports to input channels Using an external head amp 6 To remotely control an external HA press 7 To remotely control the external HA from an the rack in which the external HA you want input channel of the M7CL use the naviga to control is mounted tion keys to access the OVERVIEW screen The EXTERNAL HA popup window will appear that includes the channel whose HA you Here you can remotely control the external HA by want to control using the knobs and buttons in the M7CL s display or the encoders of the top panel HA PHASE field 8i amas 1 48V MASTER If an external HA 1s connected to the REMOTE con nector the on off status of the master phantom power is shown here Switching this on off is performed on 8 Press the HA PHASE field of the channel the external HA itself whose external HA you want to adjust the 5 48V buttons HA PATCH popup window will appear These switch phantom power on off for each channel 3 GAIN knobs These indicate the gain of the external HA To adjust the value press the knob to select it and use multi function encoders 1 8 The level meter located at the immedia
412. ries You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall graphic EQ and effect settings GEQ library Use the GEQ library to store and recall GEQ settings All GEQ units used in the M7CL can reference this GEQ library However the 31 Band GEQ and Flex 15GEQ are different types You cannot recall a GEQ library item of a different type 200 items can be recalled from the library Number 000 is read only data for initialization and the remaining library numbers can be freely read or written To recall an item from the GEQ library press the LIBRARY button located in the upper part of the window when a GEQ is shown in the GEQ EFFECT popup win dow LIBRARY button For details on using the library refer to Using libraries gt 31 Store recall operations are performed on individual racks It is not possible to store or recall the two Flex15GEQ units indi vidually To access the GEQ EFFECT popup window press the rack in the GEQ EFFECT field M7CL Owners Manual Effect library Use the Effect library to store and recall effect settings 199 items can be recalled from the effect library Library items 1 48 are read only presets and correspond to effect types 1 48 respectively Library items 49 57 are reserved for use by the system Other library item numbers can be freely read and written To recall an item from the effect library press the LIBRARY button located in the upper part o
413. rnal device or changes in system settings and user settings can be reflected on another M7CL console The port used for transmission and reception of MIDI messages can be selected from the rear panel MIDI IN OUT connectors the rear panel REMOTE connector or an I O card installed in a slot 1 3 All of the above functionality will be common to the selected port M7CL Owner s Manual MIDI N 181 Basic MIDI settings Basic MIDI settings Here s how to select the type of MIDI messages the M7CL will transmit and receive the MIDI port that will be used and the MIDI channel 1 In the function access area press the 1 PORT CH field SETUP button to access the SETUP screen Here you can select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages If MIDI button MIDI messages are being transmitted or received the SIGNAL indicators at the top of this area will light 2 Port select popup button Opens the MIDI SETUP popup window where you can select the MIDI message transmission Tx and reception Rx ports 3 Channel select popup button Opens the MIDI SETUP popup window where you can select the MIDI message transmission Tx and reception Rx channels 4 PROGRAM CHANGE field Here you can make settings for program change trans mission and reception Tx button Switches program change transmis sion on off Rx button Switches program change reception
414. rs Manual Other Functions Other Functions L Libraries 1 Output Function Name Number Total Function Parameter Scene Memory Preset 1 User 300 301 Attenuator 96 to 24 dB Input EQ Library Preset 40 User 159 199 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Output EQ Library Preset 3 User 196 199 Gain 18 dB to 18 dB Dynamics Library Preset 41 User 158 199 Q 0 10 to 10 0 4Band Equalizer Effect Library ton Hs Reserve 9 199 a Low 200 High Shelving LPF High Band GEQ Library Preset 1 User 199 200 Type II Insert Insert Point Pre EQ Post EQ Pre Fader Post On 1 Input Function Type Comp Expander Compander H Com pander S Function Parameter Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB Phase Normal Reverse Ratioz 1 1 to pues Attack 0 msec to 120 msec HPF 1 Release 5 msec 42 3 sec Frequency 20 Hz to 600 Hz Gain 18 dB to 0 dB 0 dB to 18 dB Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Knee 5 Soft Key In Self Pre EQ Self Post EQ Mix Out1 3 16 4 Band Equal Q 0 10 to 10 0 MIX1 16 MTRX1 8 STIN LR MONO C izer Low Shelving Low Band 8ch block High Shelving LPF High Band Fader Level 1024 steps 138 dB to 10 dB Type II On On Off Insert Insert Point Pre EQ Pre Fader Mute Group 8 Groups Direct Out Direct Out Point Pre HPF Pre EQ Pre Fader Mix to Matrix Matrix Send Point Pre Fader Post On Type Gate Ducking Comp Expander Stereo to Matrix Level 1024 steps
415. ry also displays symbols indicating whether the data can be recalled into Dynamic 1 and or Dynamics 2 2 RECALL button This recalls the data selected in the list into the cur rently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect By turning any one of the multifunction encoders move the highlighted line in the list to select the library item you want to recall Depending on the data you ve selected for recall it may not be possible to recall it into the currently selected channel or rack Each library has the follow ing restrictions Dynamics library The dynamics library contains three types of data Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2 for input channels and Dynamics 1 for output channels You can t recall the data if an inappropriate type of dynamics data is selected in the library library The library contains two types of data 31 Band GEQ or Flex 15GEQ You can t recall the data if the type selected in the library is different than the type of the recall destination GEQ Effect library Effect library items that use effect types HQ Pitch and Freeze can be recalled only to rack 5 or 7 These cannot be recalled if any other rack is selected If you select a library number that cannot be recalled it will not be possible to press the RECALL button M7CL Owner s Manual Basic operation of the M7CL 5 33 Using the tool buttons 34 5 Press the RECALL button 2
416. s desired For details on entering text refer to Entering names gt p 30 Press the SCENE MEMORY STORE key or the STORE button located in the lower part of the SCENE STORE popup window The SCENE STORE popup window will close and a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation 6 To execute the Store operation press the OK button The current mix settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 2 When storing is com pleted the scene number in the function access area will stop blinking If you decide to cancel the Store operation press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button You have the option of making settings so that the Store Con firmation dialog box does not appear p 198 In this case pressing the SCENE MEMORY STORE key once will dis play the SCENE STORE popup window as usual and press ing it once again will execute the Store operation Alternatively you can rapidly press the SCENE MEMORY STORE key twice to store without seeing the SCENE STORE popup window e If you store to a scene number in which a scene is already stored the previous data will be overwritten It is possible to cancel a scene store operation immediately after overwriting a scene gt 128 Using the SCENE LIST window 1 Use the pad controls of the top panel or the buttons in the touch screen to set the mix parameters as desired 2 Press the SCENE field in the fu
417. s Manual 213 Setting the network address Setting the network address Here s how to set the network address that will be required when you use the M7CLs Ethernet connector to connect it to a Windows computer 214 The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal Be aware that for this reason if you turn off the Monitor function the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speak ers However the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES OUT jack 1 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Inthe lower line of the SETUP screen press the NETWORK button to access the NET WORK popup window 1 IP ADDRESS This is a number assigned to identify each device on the Internet or LAN Local Area Network 2 GATEWAY ADDRESS This is a number that identifies a device gateway that allows data of differing media or protocol to be exchanged within a network to allow communication 3 SUBNET MASK This is number that defines the number of bits of the IP address used within the network that will be used as the network address that distinguishes the network 4 MAC ADDRESS This is the MAC Machine Access Control address specified for identifying a host within a network This field 1s only for display and cannot be edited 5 LINK MODE Select either IOOBASE TX transmission speed max imum 100 Mbps or IOBASE T transmis
418. s and faders of the Centralogic section to control the level on off status and cue operations of the selected eight chan nels or DCA groups Md SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL Fy Sy CUE oe pM e aoe R Cover 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 Co 2 2 12 12 12 C3 8 718 8 18 C8 8 0 023 30 _ 0 _ 30 7530 C2 30 2 30 60 _ 60 260 C3 60 760 260 _ 60 o EE ES ON 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 zi N JI 1 Multi function encoders 2 SEL keys 3 CUE keys 4 Level meters 5 ON keys 6 Faders You can rapidly switch from the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to the OVERVIEW screen by pressing one of the mul tifunction encoders in the Centralogic section For example the following illustration shows the OVERVIEW screen for INPUT channels 1 8 The knobs of the HA PHASE field indicate the amount of HA gain for each channel HA PHASE field 3 Press a knob in the HA PHASE field of the screen to select it When you press a knob shown in the OVERVIEW screen a bold frame is displayed around the horizontal row of knobs of the same type This frame indicates the you can use the multifunction encoders of the Cen tralogic section to operate the corresponding knobs
419. s area press the MON ITOR button to access the MONITOR screen The CUE field of the MONITOR screen lets you check the current Cue settings and turn Cue on off 1 Popup button Opens the CUE popup window where you can make detailed settings for Cue 2 CUE MODE field Specifies how the Cue function will operate 3 INPUT DCA OUTPUT field For each CUE group this indicates the signal output position and the output level You can press this field to open the CUE popup window 4 CLEAR CUE button Clears all Cue selections M7CL Owner s Manual This section explains how you can use the CUE key of a desired channel or DCA group to mon itor the Cue signal The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal Be aware that for this reason the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the Monitor function How ever PHONES OUT jack under the front pad will always output the cue signal regardless of the Monitor on off setting For details on Monitor function settings refer to Using the Monitor function gt p 142 2 Press the popup button or the INPUT DCA OUTPUT field to open the CUE popup win dow The popup window includes the following items 1 CUE MODE field This specifies the mode of operation when multiple CUE keys within the same group are turned on This operation can also be performed in the CUE MODE field of the MONITOR
420. s for each MIDI channel Bank select messages will not be added You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels Cn STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program change DATA Onnnnnnn nn Program number 0 127 2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE 2 1 TIMING CLOCK F8 Reception This message is used to control effects This message is transmitted twenty four times per quarter note Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing clock 2 2 ACTIVE SENSING FE Reception Once this message has been received MIDI communication will be initialized e g Running Status will be cleared if no message is received for an interval of 400 ms This message is not subject to echoing STATUS 11111110 FE Active sensing 2 3 SYSTEM RESET FF Reception When this message is received MIDI communication will be initialized e g Running Status will be cleared This message is not subject to echoing STATUS 11111111 FF System reset M7CL Owners Manual 3 System Exclusive Message 3 1 Bulk Dump Command rx tx function FO 43 On BB 11 DO D1 D2 rx tx BULK DUMP EE F7 BULK DUMP DATA DATA FO 43 2n 11 DO D1 D2 F7 rx BULK DUMP BULK DUMP REQUEST REQUEST The M7CL uses the following data types for a bulk dump Data name Data Number tx rx function DO D1 2 0 300 512 768 tx rx Scene Memory amp Request 5i 512 tx rx Setup Memory amp Request current setup 5
421. s how the signal sent to the TALKBACK jack or an INPUT jack 1 32 1 48 can be sent to the desired bus Talkback Oscillator 1 In the function access area press the MON D Popup button ITOR button to access the MONITOR Opens the TALKBACK popup window SGIEEN 2 TALKBACK IN field In the MONITOR screen the TALKBACK field lets This indicates the input level of the mic connected to you check the current talkback settings and turn talk the TALKBACK jack and the phantom power on off back on off status If you want to view or edit the talkback settings in 8 INPUT TO TALKBACK field greater detail use the TALKBACK popup window Of the INPUT jacks 1 32 1 48 this indicates th described in step 2 and following Ja this indicates the input sensitivity input level and phantom power on off status of the jack that is being used for talkback You can select an INPUT jack for talkback by pressing the button located at the left side If you press the GAIN knob to be active you can adjust the input sen sitivity using the corresponding multifunction encorder 4 ASSIGN field Indicates the bus to which the talkback signal is sent You can press this field to open the TALKBACK popup window 5 TALKBACK ON button Switches talkback on off M7CL Owners Manual 149 Using talkback 2 Press the popup button or the ASSIGN field to open the TALKBACK popup window In this popup window you can make detailed s
422. s how to set the date and time of the clock built into the M7CL and how to view the date and time The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when saving a scene 1 In the function access area press the In the DISPLAY FORMAT field press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen MODE button several times to select the desired format for date and time display 2 Press the DATE TIME button located in the You can select from the following display formats bottom row of the SETUP screen to open the DATE TIME popup window Date MM DD YY Y Y Month Day Year 1 D 3 DD MMY Y Y Y Y Day Month Year YYYY MM DD Year Month Day Time 24Hours hours shown in a range of 0 23 12Hours hours shown from AM 0 AM 11 and PM 0 PM 11 The popup window includes the following items Use multifunction encoders 1 6 on the top 1 DATE panel to specify the current date and time Specifies the date of the internal clock 5 When you have finished making settings 2 TIME press the OK button Specifies the time of the internal clock Other functions MO The date time and display format you specified will 3 DISPLAY FORMAT be finalized and the popup window will close If you Specifies the format in which the time of the internal press the CANCEL button or the x symbol instead clock is shown of the OK button your changes will be discarded and the popup window will close M7CL Owner
423. s jack always lets you monitor the signal that is selected as the monitoring source p 141 By assigning the MONITOR OUT L R C channels to the desired out put jacks you can monitor this same signal through external speakers gt p 142 e If you connect the power cable to the AC IN jack and also connect the separately sold PW800W power supply power will continue to be supplied from the PW800W even if the internal power supply shuts down due to a problem M7CL Owners Manual Digital input output connections CD recorder MIDI WORD CLOCK 00000000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000 Digital card yA 2 m processor e g Yamaha DME64N Main speakers Use the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack to send the M7CL s internal signals to an external digital audio device When the M7CL is in the default state the output signal of the STEREO channel is patched to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack and can be used to record the main mix onto a CD recorder or other device Connections By installing separately sold mini Y GDAI I O cards in slots 1 3 you can add input output jacks to the M7CL or connect HDR Hard Disk Recorder or speaker processor units For the types of I O cards that can be used refer to the appendix p 267 Refer to the Yamaha professional audio website for the most recent information on I O cards http www yamahaproaudio com NO
424. s only for display and does not allow the parameters to be edited It is useful when you need to quickly check the EQ settings for all channels or when you want to copy paste EQ settings between distant channels EVE Fr 4 4 gt H E aint oe a E ir T eee ee Gian L E i H 1 S L L P 11 A ESI TTNY193 193 19 1 ae ow o 4 am A m E Mi 1 Channel select button This indicates the channel number the 1con selected for that channel and the channel name Press these buttons to select the channel you want to copy or paste or to select multiple channels 2 EQ graph This mini graph shows the approximate response of the EQ parameters You can press the EQ graph to switch to the one channel window with that channel selected If the EQ or high pass filter is on the response curve is highlighted Access the ATT HPF EQ popup window 1 ch and press the EQ ON button to enable the EQ If the ATT HPF EQ popup window is displayed you will be able to edit all of the EQ parameters Using EQ If you want to use the high pass filter on an input channel operate the HPF knob or HPF ON OFF button in the ATT HPF EQ popup window Input channels provide a high pass filter that is inde pendent of the four band EQ The HPF ON OFF but ton switches the high pass filter on
425. s that perform an on off operation are shown in a color such as white yellow or green while turned on and blue or black while they are turned off When you press a button that has a W symbol a separate window will open allowing you to make detailed settings PRE HPF PRE HPF PRE HPF Faders Knobs Faders in the screen are used mainly for visual confirma tion of the levels of the corresponding channels and will move in tandem when you operate the top panel faders The current value is also shown in numerical form imme diately below the fader CO 490 7 05 8 50 14 00 4 00 cE Knobs in the screen provide visual confirmation of the value of the corresponding parameter Most knobs are linked with operations of the SELECTED CHANNEL section encoders or the multifunction encod ers The current value is also shown in numerical form immediately below the knob When a knob that can be operated by the multifunction encoders 1 e knobs other than in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is pressed once a heavy frame appears around the knob This frame indicates that the knob is selected for operation using the multifunction encoders While you are using the multifunction encoders to operate a knob the line indicating the setting of the knob will become longer and the line around the circumference will become thinner this clearly identifies the knob that you are operating Also a frame will appear aro
426. s the BPM parame ter The BPM parameter is included in delay type and modulation type effects and can be used to specify the delay time or modulation speed BPM parameter For details on the parameters of each effect type refer to the supplementary material at the end of this manual p 229 9 At the desired tempo repeatedly press the user defined key to which you assigned the Tap Tempo function The average interval BPM at which you press the key will be calculated and that value will be reflected by the BPM parameter The average interval will be input the average of a b and c lt _ RR First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap f the average value is outside the range of 20 300 BPM it will be ignored e If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter field the BPM parameter value will change according to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port About the internal effects 5 To begin recording sampling press the REC button and then press the PLAY but Using the Freeze effect Here s how to use the FREEZE effect type which pro vides the functionality of a simple sampler When this effect type is selected you can perform operations in the screen to record sample and play back a sound 1 In the function access area press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window and use the GEQ EFFECT tab to display the GEQ EF
427. s the balance between the original sound and effect sound included in the output signal from the effect This parameter is provided for all effect types If you re using the effect via send return set this to 100 effect sound only For details on editing the effect parameters refer to Editing the internal effect parameters P 171 About the internal effects 6 To adjust the effect send level of an input channel use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the The input output levels of the effect are shown by the input output meters at the upper right of the GEQ EFFECT popup input channel you want to control Wido 10 To adjust the effect return level operate the ST IN channel you selected as the output destination for the rack in step 3 0 MIX TO MATRIX field 2 TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob 7 Make sure that a MIX bus is selected as the send destination of the TO MIX TO MATRIX field If a MATRIX bus is selected as the send destination the field indicates MATRIX use the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen s TO MIX TO MATRIX button to switch to a MIX bus gt p 161 8 Press the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob that corresponds to the desired MIX bus and turn the multifunction encoder to adjust the send level of the signal sent from each channel to the MIX bus In this state you can adjust the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to the internal effect Adjust the se
428. sata Es 157 Effects and tempo synchronization 240 Effects Parameters 229 Electrical characteristics 268 Encoder operations 25 Entering names 30 T EET 105 EQ FREQUENCY encoders 17 EQ GAIN encoders 17 EQ Q encoders 17 EQ and 105 111 EQ Library List 221 EQ popup window ALL 107 Error Messages 262 ETHERNET connector 23 EXPANDER 226 External head amp 177 External head amp connections 177 F Fade function 139 FADE TIME 139 27 File Copying pasting 205 205 Firmware version 14 FE 14 212 Fixing the channels or DCA groups of the Centralogic section 94 15 157 161 165 FOODS enum 135 Focus function 135 Freeze effect 175 Function access area 28 Functions that can be assigned to user defined keys 253 G GATES 225 GATEWAY ADDRESS 214 General Specifications 265 GEQ D
429. scene Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group T In the function access area press the CH JOB button The function access area will change as follows m MUTE GROUP button 2 Press the MUTE GROUP button to access the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window In this popup window you can select the channels that will be assigned to each mute group The popup win dow includes the following items 116 M7CL Owners Manual e Mute groups be used for both input channels and output chan 1 Channel display field Channels assigned to the mute group selected by the MUTE GROUP 1 8 buttons are highlighted in red If the MUTE SAFE button is selected channels that are temporarily excluded from all mute groups are high lighted in green 2 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN button Use this button to switch the mode in which you want to assign mute groups 3 MUTE GROUP 1 8 buttons These buttons select mute groups 1 8 4 MUTE SAFE button Use this button when you want to temporarily exclude a specific channel from all mute groups The channel display field shows the channels that are temporarily excluded from the mute groups For more about mute safe refer to Using the Mute Safe function gt p 119 5 CLEAR ALL button You can press this button to clear the channels that are assigned to the mute groups 3 Use the MUTE GROUP 1 8 buttons to select the mute group to which
430. se both in the device e When transporting or moving the device always use two or more people itself and in the TV or radio next to it Attempting to lift the device by yourself may damage your back result in other injury or cause damage to the device itself e When transporting or moving the device do not hold the display e Before moving the device remove all connected cables e When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet always hold the plug itself and not the cord Pulling by the cord can damage it Before connecting the device to other devices turn off the power for all devices Before turning the power on or off for all devices set all volume levels to e When setting up the device make sure that the rear panel power switch can be minimum easily turned ON OFF If some trouble or malfunction occurs immediately turn e When connecting the device to PW800W be sure to turn OFF the device and off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet PWS800W then connect the power cable PSL360 e Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum Depending on the condition of the connected devices doing so may cause feedback and may Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source A ground screw is provided on the rear panel of this device for maximum safety and shock damage the speakers prevention If the mains outlet is not grounded be sure to connect the ground e Do not expose t
431. se 48 different effect types In order to use a GEQ or effect you must mount the GEQ or effect in one of the eight virtual racks and patch the input and output of that rack to the desired signal route In other words the operation is just as though you had installed a signal pro cessor or effect device in an actual rack and used patch cords to connect it Only GEQ can be mounted in racks 1 4 and either GEQ or effects can be mounted in racks 5 8 Figure 1 Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack However if the 31 Band GEQ is mounted in a rack there will be only one channel each for input and output Figure 2 shows the signal flow for the virtual racks RACK IN A RACKOUTA RACK IN B RACK OUT MIX OUT FlexQt5GEQ 4 1 16 MATRIX OUT 1 8 CH INSERT IN 1 32 48 To CHINSERT IN 32 48 same as RACK1 meon 14 16 RACK1 A L B R STEREO INSERT IN L R MONO C To STEREO INSERT IN S MATRIX INSERT IN 1 8 To MATRIX INSERT IN CH METER RACK IN METER RACKOUT INSERT OUT 1 32 48 31BandGEQ Only for GEQ STEREO OUT L R MONO C 8 il RACK IN A RACK OUT A MIX RACK IN B RACK OUTB 1 POE PL FlextscEQ i RACK INL RACK OUT L RACK IN RACK OUT STEREO PT EFFECT 7 INSERT OUT EFFECTCUE A L R MONO C a ey EET RACK5 OUT A L B R 4 RACK6 same
432. se keys select INPUT channels 1 8 9 16 17 24 and 25 32 respectively Top panel 5 ST IN key This key selects ST IN channels 1 4 6 DCA key This key selects the DCA groups 7 MIX 1 8 key MIX 9 16 key These keys select MIX channels 1 8 and 9 16 respec tively 9 MATRIX key This key selects MATRIX channels 1 8 STEREO key This key assigns the STEREO channel L R and the MONO channel to modules 1 3 of the Centralogic sec tion In this case modules 4 8 are not used 1 IN 33 40 key M7CL 48 only 2 IN 41 48 key M7CL 48 only These keys select INPUT channels 33 40 and 41 48 respectively M7CL Owner s Manual Panels and controls 21 Rear panel Rear panel 8 00000 000000000000100000000 LL 000000000000000000000000000000 26 Q L R YAMAHA WORD OUT 44 ST IN REMOTE 6 6 oO 6 INT amp 9 Big 4 QE er eter e2 1 INPUT jacks 1 32 1 48 These are balanced XLR 3 31 female input jacks for inputting analog audio signals from line level devices or microphones Nominal input level is 62 dBu to 10 dBu Male XLR plug 1 ground wee 2 hot 3 cold 2 ST IN jacks 1 4 These are balanced XLR 3 31 fema
433. send level of signals sent to MIX buses e On off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses DCA group settings e Mute group settings e Channel link settings Scene memory NO Using scene memories This section explains how to store and recall the M7CLs mix parameters as scenes 2 Use the SCENE MEMORY A V keys to Storing a 56606 select the store destination scene number To store the current mix settings as a scene memory you The number of the currently selected scene is shown in can either use the keys of the top panel SCENE MEM the SCENE field of the function access area When ORY MONITOR section or use the SCENE LIST win you select a new scene number the number will blink dow This blinking indicates that the displayed scene num ber is different than the currently loaded scene num r 6 Using the keys of the SCENE MEMORY i MONITOR section SCENE MENON 1 Use the pad controls of the top panel or the buttons in the touch screen to set the mix SCENE MEMORY parameters as desired A V keys STORE RECALL M7CL Owners Manual 125 Using scene memories 126 1 Initi 1 SCENE field This field always displays general information about the scene You can press this field to access the SCENE LIST window where you can view and edit more detailed settings for the scene 2 Scene number This indic
434. sent from each channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus and the pan ning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus or the left right volume balance if the send source is stereo To adjust the value press the knob to select it and operate multifunction encoders 1 8 About the OVERVIEW screen 1 DCA MUTE GROUP field This shows the DCA group input channels only and mute group to which each channel belongs 42 Channel number Channel name field This shows the number channel name and icon for the up to eight channels that are currently selected for operation in the Centralogic section except for the multifunction encoders Area 1 shows the channels that can be controlled by the OVERVIEW screen multifunction encoders SEL keys and CUE keys Area 12 shows the channels or DCA groups that can be controlled by the Centralogic section s faders and ON keys For example if you assign DCA groups to the Centralogic section the OVERVIEW screen will continue showing the eight channels that had been displayed until then and in this case the channels or DCA groups shown in areas 1 and 2 will be different On the M7CL you can leave the channels groups assigned to the Centralogic section fixed and switch only the eight channel groups displayed in the OVERVIEW screen gt 94 and the content shown in 1 and 2 will differ in this case as well M7CL Owner s Manual Operations in the Centralogic section k 89
435. ses This method allows you to simultaneously control the signals sent from up to eight MIX STEREO L R or MONO C channels to a specific MATRIX bus Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section Use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level of the signals sent from the desired MIX STEREO L R or MONO C channel to all MATRIX buses 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals and that an external device is connected For details on assigning an output port to a MATRIX bus refer to p 95 For details on connecting an exter nal device refer to p 39 2 Using the navigation keys assign the desired MIX channels 1 8 or 9 16 or the STEREO MONO channels to the Central ogic section 3 Use the SEL keys of the Centralogic sec tion to select the input channel that will send signals to the MATRIX buses The STEREO MONO channels can also be selected directly by using the SEL keys of the STEREO MONO MASTER section 4 Press any one of the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will show all the mix parameters of the corresponding channel Adjustments of send levels to the MATRIX buses is done in the TO MATRIX field of this screen 1 TO MATRIX field In this field you can switch the on off status and adjust the level of the signal sent from that channel to the MATRI
436. settings including ATT _ On off status and send level of signals sent from input channels MIX channels STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses WITH MATRIX SEND M7CL Owner s Manual Scene memory 137 Using the Recall Safe function NOTE 0 e If the ALL button is all buttons will be turned off except for the WITH MIX SEND button located in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field e You can switch the WITH MATRIX SEND button on off while the ALL button is left on if a DCA group is selected If you press any of the SEL keys of the DCA groups the parameters for DCA groups 1 8 will be shown simulta neously As the parameters subject to Recall Safe you can select either ALL or LEVEL ON fader position and on off status of ON key Recall Safe will be enabled when you make this selection If you want all parameters of the DCA group to be subject to Recall Safe turn on the ALL button Unlike when a channel is selected Recall Safe will be enabled for that DCA group the moment you turn on either the LEVEL ON button or the ALL button 5 To enable Recall Safe for the selected chan nel turn on the SAFE button in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field If you selected a DCA group turn on either the LEVEL ON button or the ALL button Channels or DCA groups for which Recall Safe is enabled will be highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field SAFE button a gt e In
437. signal Output Signal THRESHOLD ATTACK RELEASE 1 Output Level Input Level Output Level iF THRESHOLD Jee ef Re 2 SS 1 1 1 p 1 1 1 1 1 Input Level Time Time EXPANDER An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO THRESHOLD dB 54 to 0 55 points This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 7 1 2 081 2 5 1 3 0 1 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 This determines the amount of expansion 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 0 1 16 points This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger ms Seng Hel pOint signal level exceeds the threshold mecs This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 160 points po The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change OUT GAIN dB 0 0 to 418 0 181 points This sets the expander s output signal level This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold For higher knee settings Hard 1 5 6 points expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold creat ing a more natural sound RELEASE ms O Characteristics Time Series Analysis RATIO 1 KNEE hard OUT GAIN 0 0dB Input Signal Output Signal THRESHOLD ATTACK RELEASE Output Le
438. signal level when mon itoring through headphones M7CL Owner s Manual 147 Operating the Cue function 7 To defeat Cue press the currently on CUE key once again You can press the CLEAR CUE button in the Meter field to clear all Cue selections a gt e f you press the CUE meter in the function access area all Cue selections will be cleared All Cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in the CUE MODE section You can also assign the same function as the CLEAR CUE button to a user defined key gt p 200 148 1 M7CL Owners Manual Chapter 14 Talkback Oscillator This chapter explains how to use talkback and oscillator About the talkback and oscillator functions Talkback is a function that sends the signal of a mic connected to the TALKBACK jack to the desired bus This is used mainly to convey instructions from the mixing engineer to the perform ers or staff If necessary a mic connected to INPUT jacks 1 32 1 48 can also be used for talk back The M7CL also contains an oscillator that can output a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus and this can be used to check external equipment or to test the acoustical response of the room The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback oscillator signals 48V MASTER ui 48V gt co o ON MIX 5 MATRIX CUE 12 1516 LR O 12 78 LR INPUT 1 32 48 Using talkback Here
439. sing this area for scenes 001 300 you can switch between protected and un protected settings 5 Scene select knob This knob selects a scene number shown in the scene list You can use any of the multifunction encoders to operate this knob In addition you can select multiple scenes by pressing the multifunction encoder while you turn it 6 MULTI SELECT button You can select multiple scenes by switching this but ton on and turning the multifunction encoder This is the same result as pressing the scene select knob while turning it 7 Store Recall buttons These buttons are used to store recall scenes You can also undo cancel or redo re execute store recall operations For details refer to Using scene memo ries p 125 Tool buttons Use these buttons to perform operations such as Copy and Paste on the scenes stored in scene memory For details refer to Scene memory editing p 132 9 COMMENT field Here you can assign a comment to each scene and view the status of the Focus function or Fade function settings Comment This is the comment assigned to each scene maxi mum 32 characters You can press this area to access the SCENE STORE popup window where you can assign a title or comment to the scene 1 STATUS field This field indicates the status of each scene For scenes for which something other than the ALL button is selected in the Focus function gt p 135 and for scenes in
440. sion speed max 10 Mbps as the specification used for communi cation via the Ethernet jack M7CL Owners Manual 3 As appropriate for the type of Ethernet jack on your computer use the LINK MODE but tons to select the specification of the net work to which you will be connecting NOTE e Be aware that if the specification does not match communi cation will not occur correctly Press the knob in the screen to select it and use the top panel multifunction encod ers to specify the address If you are connecting the M7CL to your computer in a one to one connection we recommend that you make the following initial settings IP address 192 168 0 128 or similar however it must not conflict with the IP address of any other device on the network Gateway address 192 168 0 1 or similar however it must not conflict with the IP address of any other device on the network Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 or similar For details on settings when connecting to a LAN refer to the M7CL Editor installation guide When you have finished making settings press the OK button The changes will be finalized and the popup window will close If you press the CANCEL button or the symbol instead of the OK button your changes will be discarded and the popup window will close Specifying the brightness of the touch screen LEDs and lamps Specifying the brightness of the touch screen LEDs and lamps Here s how to spec
441. sort scene memories in alphabetical order of their titles or in order of the date on which they were created You can also edit their titles 1 Press the SCENE field in the function access area The SCENE LIST window will appear where you can perform various operations for scene memory You can use tabs to switch the right half of the SCENE LIST window between three different fields 1 SCENE field 2 COMMENT field 2 Press the COMMENT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window The COMMENT field will appear in the right half of the SCENE LIST window 1 Scene list This lists the scenes that are stored in scene memory The line highlighted in blue indicates the scene cur rently selected for operations 130 1 M7CL Owners Manual To change the default setting for the way in which the list is sorted ascending or descending order of scene number access the USER SETUP popup window PREFERENCE tab and change the LIST ORDER p 198 2 Scene number This is the scene number 000 300 You can also press this scene number to select a scene 3 TITLE This is the name assigned to each scene maximum 16 characters You can press this area to access the SCENE STORE popup window where you can assign a title or comment to the scene 4 R symbol READ ONLY symbol Protect symbol A read only scene is indicated by the R symbol and a write protected scene is indicated by the protect sym bol By pres
442. specified slot 5 Use the slot select tabs and port select but tons to select the desired slot and output ports and press the CLOSE button The port will be assigned to the bus you selected 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign ports to other buses wr gt You can t assign two or more buses to the same output port If you select a bus to which a signal route has already been assigned the previous assignment will be cancelled 7 To close the CASCADE popup window press the x symbol located in the upper right You will return to the SETUP screen Using cascade connections Operations on the cascade master M CL T In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen press the CAS CADE button to open the CASCADE popup window 3 Press the CASCADE IN PATCH tab to access the CASCADE IN PATCH page 4 Press the port select popup button for the bus whose port you want to assign The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear 5 Use the slot select tabs and port select but tons to select the desired slot and input ports and press the CLOSE button The port will be assigned to the bus you selected 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign ports to other buses If desired you can assign two or more buses to the same input port 7 close the CASCADE popup window press the x symbol located
443. sponse of the current Flex15GEQ settings 2 Faders These faders indicate the amount of boost cut for each band of the Flex I5GEQ The actual values are shown in the numerical boxes below 3 FADER ASSIGN field In this field you can select the group of bands that will be controlled by the faders AVAILABLE BANDS is a realtime indication of the remaining number of bands maximum 15 that can be controlled for the current GEQ Graphic EQ operations 4 Rack select tabs These tabs switch between racks 1 8 For a rack in which a FlexI5GEQ is mounted the tabs will be split as xA and xB x is the rack number 5 FLAT button This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB 6 GEQ ON OFF button Switches the currently selected Flex 15GEQ on off You can make settings independently for the two GEQ units A and B in the rack Use the rack select tabs to choose either GEQ A or B and specify the input source and output destination correctly Then press the GEQ ON OFF button to turn on the Flex15GEQ Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control using the Centralogic sec tion s faders For details on the bands corresponding to each button in the FADER ASSIGN field refer to step 4 of Using the 31 Band GEQ gt p 163 When you press one of these buttons the faders for the selected group of bands will turn white in the touch screen and you will b
444. tatus 15 shown in the channel display field of the window The Channel Link function source SEL key and successively press the SEL key of each channel you want to add to the link group When you press the SEL key of a channel belonging to a link group to make it light the SEL keys of all channels belonging to the same link group will blink e f you link an INPUT channel to a ST IN channel parameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel will be ignored If you want to add a new channel to existing link group hold down any SEL key within the group and press the SEL key that you want to add to the group If the link destination channel is already assigned to another link group its assignment to the previous group will be can celled and it will be added to the newly assigned group 7 To remove a channel from a link group hold down any SEL key in the same link group and press the SEL key of the channel that you want to remove M7CL Owner s Manual e If you want to link three or more channels hold down the link 11 Grouping and linking 121 Copying moving or initializing a channel Copying moving or initializing a channel You can copy or move mix parameters between channels or restore the parameters of a specific channel to their default settings Copying the parameters of a channel You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to
445. tch input chan nels and specify the icon or channel name for other channels in the same way When the PATCH NAME popup window is shown you can use the SEL keys to switch the channel being edited When you re finished with your input press the x symbol in the upper right of the win dow gt You can press the TAB button to switch to the next channel You can press the ENTER button to close the popup window in the same way as using the x symbol Making HA Head Amp settings This section explains how to make HA Head Amp related settings phantom power on off gain phase for each input channel 1 If you only want to adjust the HA gain you do so by using the encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section p 1 7 e If you ve turned off the phantom power master setting in the SETUP screen SYSTEM SETUP field phantom power will not be supplied even if the 48V button is turned on for each 2 If you want to edit detailed parameters such pues as phantom power on off or phase use the navigation keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel N CAUTION whose HA you want to edit If you don t need phantom power be sure to turn this button off Before you turn phantom power on make sure that no device other than a condenser mic is connected to that jack Other wise you risk damaging your external equipment To protect your speaker system leave
446. te right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port 4 HPF knobs ON buttons These controls switch the external HA s built in high pass filter on off and adjust its cutoff frequency If you 3 press the HPF knob to select it you ll be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction encoder Input port popup button 8n E 1 n Rack select tabs 9 Press the input port popup button and These tabs switch the rack that is displayed in the select the input port assigned to the exter EXTERNAL HA popup window nal HA With these settings the external HA can be used in the wr gt same way as the M7CL s own HA For details on the e If you newly connect an AD8HR these settings will be the HA PATCH popup window refer to Making HA state of the AD8HR Head Amp settings gt p 53 e These knobs and buttons are shown in the EXTERNAL HA popup window even if an AD8HR is not connected allowing you to create and store a scene even while the AD8HR is not connabtad External HA settings are saved as part of the scene How ever the phantom master setting is an exception to this Graphic EQ and effects e When you adjust the brightness of the 7 panel LEDs this will also affect the LEDs of the external HA M7CL Owners Manual 179 180 1 M7CL Owners Manual Chapter 17 MIDI This chapter explains how MIDI messages can be transmi
447. tely before the fader e POST Immediately after the ON key The metering point for output channels will also affect the optional meter bridge MBM7CL 3 If you want the peak levels of the level meter to be held press the PEAK HOLD button to turn it on PEAK HOLD button on off operations will affect both input channels and output channels as well as the MBM 7CL meter bridge When you turn this button off the peak level indication that had been held will be cleared You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on off function to a user defined key gt 200 Using the MBM7CL meter bridge option Using the MBM7CL meter bridge option If the optional meter bridge MBM7CL is installed in the M7CL you will always be able to view the output levels of MIX channels 1 16 and MATRIX channels 1 8 The 5 meters show the MIX channel and MATRIX channel output levels in 12 segment steps OVER 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 15dB 18dB 24dB 30dB 40dB 50dB 60dB o lt 22 m E 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 0000000000008 0000000000008 000000000000 00000 00000000000 00000000000 00000000000 00000000000 00000000000 00000000000 0000000000005 000000000000 00000000000 15 C 18C
448. ters other than THRESHOLD M7CL Owner s Manual To edit the dynamics settings switch the DYNAMICS ON OFF button on and use the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the THRESHOLD parameter If you want to edit parameters other than THRESHOLD or to recall existing data from the library press any loca tion within the field to access the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 popup window For details on the popup window gt p 108 e Making HPF EQ settings To edit the HPF of the currently selected channel use the HPF field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the HPF encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section input channels only The HPF field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen contains the following items 1 FREQUENCY knob Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF 2 HPF ON OFF button Switches the HPF on off To edit the HPF turn the HPF ON OFF on and use the HPF encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the cutoff frequency To edit the EQ of the currently selected channel use the EQ field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW function or the EQ Q EQ FREQUENCY and EQ GAIN encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section The EQ field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen con tains the following items 1 Q FREQUENCY GAIN knobs These knobs indicate the Q FREQUENCY center frequency and GAIN amount of boost cut for each band LOW LOW MID HIGH MID and HIGH 2
449. the CH RECALL SAFE field the color of the highlight will be green if the ALL button was selected in step 4 or blue if buttons other than ALL were selected e f you press the CLEAR ALL button Recall Safe will be defeated for all channels and DCA groups for which it is enabled i e the highlighted channels and DCA groups You can also switch Recall Safe on off the SEL CH VIEW screen s RECALL SAFE field gt p 85 138 1 M7CL Owners Manual 6 To turn on Recall Safe for global parame ters turn on the buttons of the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE field These buttons correspond to the following parameters Corresponding parameters Input channel patching Input channel name Button name INPUT PATCH INPUT NAME OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT NAME RACK 1 8 Output channel patching Output channel name Rack 1 8 settings 7 When you ve finished making settings press the CLOSE button to close the popup window Then perform a Recall operation Only the selected channel s DCA group s and parameter s will be excluded from Recall operations Channel Link gt p 120 and bus settings gt 212 are not subject to Recall Safe they will always be reproduced in the recalled scene This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or one of two channels set to stereo the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of the other channel s In such cases the applicable param
450. the LED will light 3 Meter LEDs These LEDs indicate the input level of the channel 161 M7CL Owners Manual B ST IN Stereo Input section In this section you can control the principal parameters for the stereo ST IN channels 1 4 With the exception that the object of control will alternate between the L and R chan nels each time you press the SEL key these controls operate in the same way as for the INPUT channels ST IN ST IN ST IN ST IN 1 2 4 SEL SEL SEL SEL w w STIN STIN STIN STIN 1 2 3 4 4 ON key This switches the channel on off If a channel is on the key LED will light In SENDS ON FADER mode this is an on off switch for the signal sent from each channel to the currently selected MIX bus 5 Fader Adjusts the input level of the channel In SENDS ON FADER mode this adjusts the send level of the signal from each channel to the currently selected MIX bus Meter bridge option If an optional MBM7CL meter bridge is installed the MIX MATRIX channel levels can be monitored at all times The monitoring position can be selected from PRE EQ immediately before attenuator PRE FADER imme diately before the fader or POST ON immediately after the ON key
451. the case of a MIX bus you can use this field to switch the type of bus VARI or FIXED The follow ing items can be selected for each bus MIX bus VARI PRE EQ T The send level of the MIX bus is adjustable Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as an external effect send or as a foldback output The signal is sent from immediately before the input channel EQ attenu ator VARI PRE FADER The send level of the MIX bus is This popup window contains the following items adjustable Choose this if you want 1 SIGNAL TYPE Signal processing to use the MIX bus as an external method effect send or as a foldback output The signal is sent from immediately This U K the input chahnel fader even numbered buses will be used as stereo channels FIXED Th level of the MIX whose main parameters are linked STEREO or as e send level of the bus is fixed at nominal level 0 0 dB two monaural channels MONO x2 Choose this if you want to use the 2 BUS TYPE SEND POINT MIX bus as a group output or as a For two adjacent odd numbered even numbered bus output for recording on a multi buses this selects the position from which the signal 2 eile will be sent from the input channel For a MIX bus or de input T y you can also switch the bus type VARI or FIXED here MATRIX bus PRE The signal is sent from immediately 3 PAN LINK This specifies w
452. the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on off individually The panning of the signal sent from an INPUT channel to the STEREO bus L R is controlled by the TO ST PAN knob The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob The left right volume balance of the signal sent from a ST IN channel to the STEREO bus is controlled by this knob The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob LCR mode This mode sends the signal of the input channel to a total of three buses STEREO L R and MONO C together Input channel operations The signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus will be switched on off as a whole The CSR Center Side Ratio knob specifies the level ratio between the signal sent from the input channel to the STE REO L R bus and to the MONO C bus The TO ST PAN knob BALANCE knob specifies the level of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus e If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones etc you should press the MONITOR button in the function access area to select LCR as the monitor source before you continue with the following procedure gt 142 1 Make sure that an input source is nected to the input channel you re adjust ing and set the phantom power supply gain and phase of the head amp to obtain the optimum input si
453. the left half will select the preceding channel and pressing the right half will select the next channel M7CL Owners Manual D D D 8 Function access area 2 Time This indicates the current time For details on how to set the time p 213 3 User name This indicates the name of the user who 15 currently logged in 1 is authenticated and able to operate the sys tem If the oscillator or talkback is enabled this area will indi cate OSC respectively If cue monitor is on the type of signal being cue monitored IN OUT DCA KEY IN EFFECT is shown An indication of ACCESS is shown while a USB storage device attached to the USB connector is being accessed Do not disconnect the USB connector while the ACCESS indica tion is shown here Doing so may damage the data on the USB storage device 4 Help This button is used to show on line help in the main area However the current software as of September 2005 does not support this 5 SENDS ON FADER Press this button to switch to SENDS ON FADER mode where you can use the faders of the top panel to adjust the MIX send level p 64 During this time the function access area of the touch screen will change to a screen allowing you to select the send destination MIX bus 6 CH JOB Channel Job Press this button to switch to CH JOB mode where you can make settings for channel grouping a
454. the power amps pow ered speakers turned off when switching the phantom power on off We also recommend that you set all output level faders to the minimum position Otherwise high volume output may damage your hearing or equipment Input channel operations 3 GAIN knob This indicates the gain of the head amp assigned to this channel To adjust this value operate multifunc tion encoder 3 The level meter located at the immedi ate right of the knob indicates the input level for the 1 HA PHASE field corresponding port 4 Phase button This switches the head amp assigned to the channel 3 Press the HA PHASE field of the channel whose HA you want to adjust the HA between normal phase black and reverse phase PATCH popup window will appear orange This popup window can be viewed in three types of 8 INPUT PORT popup button view 1 ch 8 ch ALL and you can use the tabs at the bottom of the screen to switch between these types These windows include the following items This shows the input port assigned to this channel You can press this button to access the INPUT PORT SELECT popup window where you can select the HA PATCH popup window 1 ch input port for each channel 6 Icon Channel Name button This shows the number icon and channel name for that channel You can press this button to access the PATCH NAME popup window where you can edit the input port patching and specify the channel name
455. ting screen will appear You can make the following three gain adjustments for analog input output INPUT PORT TRIM Fine adjustment of the analog input gain Access the INPUT PORT TRIM win dow and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog input port in O 1 dB steps SLOT OUTPUT TRIM Fine adjustment of the output ports Access the SLOT OUTPUT TRIM window and make fine adjustments to the gain of the output ports of the specified slot in 0 01 dB steps Ll E m Es z J l mie br I i 1 E i 3 M xu 1 2 rura E i EN j A EP e 7 u atij 3 Press a knob to select it and use the multi function encoders to adjust the value If you press the RESET ALL button provided in each screen all settings in the screen will be reset to 0 dB The factory settings are also O dB Press the EXIT button The M7CL will start up in normal operating mode Alternatively you can continue by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button M7CL Owner s Manual Other functions MO 219 Adjusting the input output gain Calibration function 220 1 M7CL Owners Manual Appendices EQ Library List Parameter Parameter imo TT PEAKING
456. tings 95 Changing the input patch settings 98 Inserting an external device into a channel 100 Directly outputting an INPUT channel 102 10 EQ and Dynamics 105 About EQ and dynamics 105 Brig m 105 Using GY NAMICS et 108 Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries 111 2 p RR RR 111 Dynamics library 111 11 Grouping and linking 118 About DCA Groups and Mute Groups 113 Using 4 113 Assigning channels to a DCA group 113 Controlling DCA 9 115 Usmo multe groups 116 Assigning channels to mute groups 116 Controlling mute groups 117 Using the Mute Safe function 119 The Channel Link function 120 Linking the desired input channels 120 Copying moving or initializing a channel 122 Copying the parameters of a channel 122 Moving the parameters of a channel 123 Initializing the parameters of a channel 124 12 Scene memory 125 About scene memories
457. to cancel the selected channel 2 CLEAR Executes the initialization 3 To select the channel s to be initialized press the corresponding SEL key to make it light multiple selections are allowed The corresponding channel s is are highlighted in the TARGET CHs field of the window If you want to de select all of the selected channels press the TARGET CHs field M7CL Owner s Manual To execute the initialization press the CLEAR button The parameters of the selected channel s will be ini tialized After initialization the TARGET CHs field will return to a state in which nothing is selected 5 To close the CH CLEAR MODE popup win dow press the CLOSE button Chapter 12 Scene memory This chapter explains how to perform scene memory operations On the M7CL the mix parameter settings and input output port patching can be assigned a name and stored into memory and later recalled from memory as a scene Each scene is assigned a number in the range of 000 300 Scene 000 is a read only scene used for initializing the mix parameters and scenes 001 300 are writable scenes Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and ON keys as well as the following parameters e Input output port patching Bus settings Head amp settings EQ settings e Dynamics 1 and 2 settings e Rack GEQ effect settings e Pan balance settings Insert direct out settings e On off status and
458. ton in an EFFECT popup window or the KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS 1 popup win dow This group will automatically be disabled when you exit the corresponding popup window CUE button in the display It is not possible to simultaneously turn on Cue between different groups Normally the group to which the most recently pressed CUE key or a CUE KEY IN CUE but ton in the screen belongs will take priority and the CUE keys of the previously selected group will be defeated However if you switch the Cue signal group in a specific order the state of the CUE keys of the previously selected group will be restored when the current Cue sig nal is defeated The following illustration shows the priority order of the CUE keys After you have switched groups from lower to upper levels if you then defeat Cue for the upper group the previous CUE key status of the group immediately below will be restored Other CUE group INPUT CUE group 4 DCA CUE group al OUTPUT CUE group For example if you switch groups in the order of OUT PUT CUE group DCA CUE group gt INPUT CUE group Other CUE group you can then successively defeat the CUE keys CUE KEY IN CUE buttons to successively restore the CUE key status of the previ ously selected group M7CL Owner s Manual Monitor Cue CO 145 Operating the Cue function 146 Operating the Cue function NOTE 11 In the function acces
459. ton to access the SETUP screen 2 Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window 3 If necessary press the directory icon and change the directory To move to the next higher level press the arrow but ton in the PATH field Press the MAKE DIR button A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter a directory name For details on entering text refer to Entering names gt p 30 5 Enter the name of the directory you want to create and press the MAKE button If you specified a file name that already exists a mes sage will ask you for confirmation Press the OK but ton to execute Formatting media on a USB storage device Here s how to format media on a USB storage device using the FAT16 file system USB storage devices up to 2 G bytes in capacity are supported T In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen SAVE LOAD button M7CL Owners Manual 2 Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window FORMAT button 3 Press the FORMAT button A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the volume name that will be applied after formatting For details on entering text refer to Entering names p 30 4 Enter a volume name and press the FOR MAT button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Format oper ation 5 To execute the Format operation press the OK button Chanter 19 Other functio
460. tted from an exter nal device to control the M7CLs parameters and conversely how operations on the M7CL can be transmitted as MIDI messages MIDI functionality on the The M7CL can use MIDI to perform the following operations Program Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event scene effect library recall on the M7CL a program change message of the correspond ing number can be transmitted to an external device Conversely the corresponding event can be executed when a program change message is received from an external device Control Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event fader encoder or key operation on the M7CL the corresponding control change mes sage can be transmitted to an external device Conversely events can be executed when control change messages are received from an external device This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device and play them back later Parameter change SysEx transmission and reception When specific events fader encoder or key operations changes in system settings or user settings are executed parameter change system exclusive messages can be transmitted to an external device Conversely events can be executed when parameter changes are received from an external device Using this capability M7CL operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other exte
461. ttons to select the icon you want to use for that channel The selected icon is shown in the icon button in the upper part of the window 5 If necessary use the sample name select buttons to select a sample name The sample name you selected will be input to the channel name field in the upper part of the window gt You can add or edit characters in the channel name field even after you ve entered the sample name If you want to assign The popup window includes the following items consecutively numbered channel names such as Chorus 1 and Chorus 2 this can be easily done by entering the sam D Icon button ple name and then adding a number This indicates the icon selected for that channel When you press this button a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name 2 Channel name input box This indicates the name assigned to that channel When you press this field a keyboard window allow ing you to assign a name will appear 3 Output port button This indicates the currently selected output port If you press this button when selecting an icon or changing the channel name you will return to the output port select screen 4 Tabs These tabs select the items shown in the lower part of the screen M7CL Owners Manual 71 Specifying the channel name and icon Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO bus 72 6 If you want to enter a channel name direct
462. u ve finished making settings turn off the buttons of the FADER ASSIGN field The faders and ON keys of the Centralogic section will return to their previous function If you want to copy the currently displayed Flex15GEQ settings to the Flex15GEQ of another rack or to initialize the settings you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the popup window For details on how to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons p 31 GEQ settings can be saved loaded at any time using the ded icated library gt p 31 M7CL Owner s Manual About the internal effects About the internal effects The M7CLs internal effects can be mounted in racks 5 8 and patched to an output channel s output or input channel s input or inserted into a channel For each effect mounted in a rack you can choose one of 48 types of effect With the default settings the signals from MIX channels 13 16 are input to racks 5 8 and from the racks are then output to ST IN 1 4 L R NOTE The internal effects cannot be mounted in racks 1 4 Some effect types be mounted only in rack 5 or 7 To use an internal effect via send return assign the output of a MIX channel etc to the input of the effect and assign the output of the effect to an input channel In this case the corresponding MIX bus is used as a mas ter channel for the effect send and the input channel is used as an effect return c
463. ual User settings Security CO 203 Using a USB storage device to save load data im 6 1 COPY button This button copies a file into buffer memory a tempo rary holding area gt p 205 2 PASTE button This button pastes the file from buffer memory p 205 3 DELETE button This button deletes the selected file gt p 205 4 MAKE DIR button This button creates a new directory gt p 206 5 PATH This shows the name of the current directory Press the arrow button to move to the next higher level If the current directory 15 the top level the arrow button is dimmed NOTE You cannot save if the directory name would exceed 237 characters 6 VOLUME NAME FREE SIZE This shows the volume name and the amount of free space on the USB storage device If the USB storage device is write protected a protect symbol is shown in the VOLUME NAME field 7 File list This area lists the files that are saved on the USB stor age device The highlighted line indicates the file selected for operations The file list contains the following items When you press the item name at the top of each column it will turn orange and the list will be sorted by that item Each time you press the item name the sorting order will alternate between ascending and descending order FILE NAME Indicates the file name or directory name and shows an icon indicating its type
464. ultifunction encoders 1 8 If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo the TO MATRIX PAN knob for a ST IN channel the TO MATRIX BALANCE knob and TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob are shown in this location 7 ALL PRE button This button selects PRE as the position from which signals are sent from all input channels to VARI type MIX buses ALL POST button This button selects POST as the position from which signals are sent from all input channels to VARI type MIX buses 6 Use the TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF buttons to switch the signals sent from the input channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus on off 7 If necessary use the PRE buttons to select the location of the signal that is sent from each input channel to a VARI type MATRIX bus 8 Repeat steps 3 6 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way Chapter 6 Output channel operations This chapter explains operations for output channels MIX channels MATRIX channels STEREO channel MONO channel Signal flow for output channels The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses processes them with EQ and dynamics and sends them to output ports or other buses The fol lowing types of output channel are provided MIX channels 1 16 These channels process the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses and output them to the corresponding output port MATRIX bus STEREO bus or MONO C bus
465. und the numer ical value Knobs for which a double frame is displayed indicate PAN BALANCE wr gt For some knobs pressing them again when they are enclosed by a heavy frame will open a window where you can make additional detailed settings The on screen user interface List windows The following type of window will appear when you need to select items from a list such as a list of user defined keys Select Poramcteres fer USER DEFINED KEY 1 I MM4 PARAMETER E Within the list the highlighted item always shown in the center is the item selected for operations Press the 7 2 located below the list to scroll the list upward or down ward wm gt e You can also scroll up down using the multifunction encoder If there is more than one list in the screen your operations will column Keyboard window The following keyboard window will appear when you need to assign a name or comment to a scene or library or when you need to assign a channel name Press characters in the window to enter the desired characters for the pro cedure see p 30 M7CL Owners Manual apply to the list enclosed in a yellow frame You can press the mul tifunction encoder to move the focus of your operations to the next Basic operation of the M7CL 5 27 The on screen user interface Viewing the touch screen Popup windows When you press
466. up window The following output destinations can be selected in this popup window multiple selections are allowed CH 1 32 INPUT channel 1 32 Inputs CH 33 48 INPUT channel 33 48 M7CL 48 only 1 33 48 inputs x STIN 1L 1R ST IN channel 1 4 4L 4R inputs CH 1 32 INPUT channel 1 32 Insert In CH 33 48 INPUT channel 33 48 Insert In MIX 1 16 i channel 1 16 Insert MATRIX 1 8 MATRIX channel 1 8 Insert In STEREOL STEREO L R channel STEREO and MONO C channel MONO C Insert In Tab name CH 1 32 1 CH 1 32 INSERT IN CH 33 48 INSERT IN M7CL 48 only OUT CH INSERT IN 1 Cannot be selected for 31Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ a gt e In the case of 31 Band GEQ and Flex15GEQ selecting Insert In as the output destination will automatically set the Insert Out of the same channel as the input source for the rack When you defeat an insert in the insert out will be defeated automatically M7CL Owner s Manual 7 To switch Recall Safe on off for each rack press the SAFE button for that rack If Recall Safe is turned on for a rack the contents and parameters of that rack will not change when a scene is recalled For more about Recall Safe refer to Using the Recall Safe function p 136 The type of GEQ or effect mounted in each rack its parame ter settings and the input source output destination settings are saved as part of the scene About the gra
467. ur location and needs i Mono pitch shifter producing _ REV X HALL REV X ROOM and HQ Pitch HQ PITCH tahere REV X Plate REV X PLATE REV X PLATE Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation Ring Mod RING MOD Ring modulator Mod Filter MOD FILTER Modulated filter Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation Dyna Filter DYNA FILTER Dynamically controlled filter Dyna Flange DYNA FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger Dyna Phaser DYNA PHASER controlled phase 228 1 M7CL Owners Manual REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE REVERB PLATE One input two output hall room stage and plate reverb simulations all with gates REV TIME 0290 INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion left right 0 10 reverb spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density Reverb density E R DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Delay between early reflec tions and reverb Balance of early reflections 1000 and reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections LN THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff fre quency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff fre quency GATE LVL OFF 60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0 120 ms Gate opening speed DECAY Gate closing speed 1 0 02 ms 2 13 s fs 44 1 kHz 0 02
468. ute groups 117 Copying the parameters of 122 Copying pasting a file 205 Copying pasting a scene 132 Copying pasting settings 36 o1 145 Cue function 146 Current 43 Cutting a scene 134 D Daisy 177 DC POWER INPUT connector 23 DCA D zm 145 DCA GROUP ASSIQN 114 Nub em 147 DEG 129 227 Deleting file 205 Dialog boxes 28 Digital input output connections 41 Dimensions 271 PIA EP 141 DIRECT RECALL 129 Directly outputting 102 1 206 Display section 18 225 DYNAMICS 108 Dynamics library 111 DYNAMICS Library List 222 Dynamics parameter 225 E E symbol EDIT symbol 126 Effect library 176 Effect Type List 228 1 caruisse seu ione Bitrate
469. utton cannot be used if you ve simultaneously edited multiple scenes 2 Perform the desired editing operation For details on the procedure refer to the following explanations M7CL Owners Manual Copying pasting a scene Here s how to copy a scene into buffer memory and then paste it to a different scene number Press the SCENE field in the function access area The SCENE LIST window will appear 2 Turn any one of the multifunction encoders to select the copy source scene number and then press the COPY button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Copy opera tion 3 To execute the copy press the OK button The scene you selected in step 2 will be saved in the buffer memory Be aware that if you copy cut another scene before you paste the other scene will be overwritten to the buffer memory You cannot select multiple scenes as the copy source Turn any one of the multifunction encoders to select the paste destination scene num ber and then press the PASTE button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Paste opera tion You can select multiple paste destination scenes To do so turn the MULTI SELECT button on and turn a multifunction encoder or press the multifunction encoder while you turn it In this case the same content will be pasted to all selected scenes A copied scene can also be inserted gt 134 If nothing has been stored in the buffe
470. ve destination 4 To select the move destination channel press the corresponding SEL key to make it light The corresponding channel is highlighted in the DES TINATION CH field of the window The channels that can be selected will depend on the channel you selected in step 3 If you want to defeat the selected move destination channel press the DESTINATION CH field D To execute the move press the MOVE but ton The settings of all channels between the move source and move destination will shift toward the move source by one channel and the channel settings will move from the move source to the move destination When the Move has been executed the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CH field will return to an un set state 6 To close the CH MOVE MODE popup win dow press the CLOSE button M7CL Owner s Manual Grouping and linking 123 Copying moving or initializing a channel 124 Initializing the parameters of a channel If desired you can restore the parameters of a channel to an initialized state This operation can be performed on any channel s T In the function access area press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB menu _ CLEAR button 2 Press the CLEAR button to access the CH CLEAR MODE popup window This popup window lets you initialize parameters 1 TARGET CHs field In this field select the channel s that you want to ini tialize You can press this field
471. vel Input Level Output Level TIRE SHON p ENT E RATIO Input Level Time Time 226 M7CL Owners Manual Dynamics Parameters COMPANDER HARD COMPANDER H COMPANDER SOFT COMPANDER S The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor expander and limiter Output Level THRESHOLD Input Level WIDTH The companders function differently at the following levels D 0 dB and higher Functions as a limiter 2 Exceeding the threshold Functions as a compressor 3 Below the threshold and width Functions as an expander The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5 1 while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1 5 1 The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2 The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values and can be increased by up to 18 dB The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes THRESHOLD dB 54 to 0 55 points This determines the level at which compression is applied 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 125215 1 7 1 2 081 2 5 1 3 0 1 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 This determines the amount of compression 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 15 points This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the com ATTACK ms pander has been triggered
472. where a Flex15GEQ is selected will cause the settings to be copied pasted individually Effect settings with an effect type of HQ Pitch or Freeze cannot be pasted to rack 6 or 8 M7CL Owners Manual Comparing two settings You can use the COMPARE button to exchange the set tings held in the buffer memory with the settings of the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect This is convenient when you want to temporarily keep the settings at a certain point and compare them later with the subsequently edited settings 1 Open a popup window that provides the tool buttons 2 Select a channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect 3 Press the COPY button to place the current settings in the buffer memory This will be the first set of settings NOTE Be aware that if you copy other settings before you compare the buffer memory will be overwritten 4 Edit the settings of the currently selected channel EQ dynamics or rack GEQ effect This will be the second set of settings After you ve stored the first set of settings in the buffer mem ory you can initialize the channel or rack and edit the second set of settings from an initialized state if desired 5 To compare the first set of settings with the current settings the second set press the COMPARE button You will return to the first set of settings At this time the second set of settings will be held in the buffer memor
473. which control changes will be transmitted and received as described in Basic MIDI settings gt p 182 5 Press the CONTROL CHANGE tab to access the CONTROL CHANGE page In the CONTROL CHANGE page you can specify how control changes will be transmitted and received and assign the event fader encoder operation ON key on off operation etc assigned to each control number This page includes the following items CONTROL CHANGE field Here you can switch control change transmission reception on off and specify whether control changes will be echoed out This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE field of the MIDI SETUP page 2 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field Here you can select the control change transmission reception mode This setting is linked with the CON TROL CHANGE MODE field of the MIDI SETUP page 3 List This list shows the event fader encoder pattern key on off operation etc assigned to each control number NO This indicates the control number You can use control numbers 1 31 33 95 and 102 119 e CONTROL CHANGE EVENT m Indicates selects the type of event assigned to each control number When you press an event the MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup win dow will appear allowing you to change the control number assign ment 4 CLEAR ALL button Pressing this button will delete all event assignments in the list 5 INITIALIZE ALL button
474. window will appear where you can perform various operations for scene memory Scene memories are edited using the buttons shown in the upper part of the SCENE LIST window Each button has the following function 0 9 m HN 1 COPY button Copies a scene into a memory buffer a temporary storage area For details on how to use this refer to Copying pasting a scene that follows 2 PASTE button This button pastes a scene previously copied into the memory buffer into another scene number For details on how to use this refer to Copying pasting a scene that follows 3 CLEAR button This button clears erases the selected scene For details on how to use this refer to Clearing a scene gt 133 4 CUT button Cuts a scene and places it in the memory buffer Scenes following the scene number you cut will be moved forward For details on how to use this refer to Cutting a scene p 134 5 INSERT button Inserts a scene from the memory buffer at the location of a different scene number Scene numbers following the inserted position will be moved backward For details on how to use this refer to Inserting a scene p 134 6 UNDO button This button cancels the most recently executed scene editing operation If you ve accidentally cleared an important scene you can press this key to return to the state prior to editing the scene NOTE The UNDO b
475. wners Manual 47 Setting up to use the M7CL D In the STEREO MONO MASTER section make sure that the ON key of the STEREO channel is on and raise the STEREO chan nel fader to 0 dB STEREO MONO SEL SEL CUE CUE STEREO MONO 1 STEREO channel ON key 2 STEREO channel fader Raise the fader of the currently selected input channel to an appropriate volume In this state you should now hear sound from the speaker system that is patched to the STEREO chan nel If you don t hear sound check whether the LR meters are moving in the METER field of the function access area METER field of the function access area If the LR meters are moving It may be that the STEREO channel is not correctly patched to the output jacks that are connected to your speaker system Check the output port patching p 95 If the LR meters are not moving It may be that the INPUT channel ON key 1s off Check the status of the ON key gt p 16 48 f M7CL Owners Manual The signal being output from the STEREO channel also be monitored using headphones connected to the PHONES OUT jack located below the front pad gt 142 F To adjust the pan balance of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus turn the PAN encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section When you turn the PAN encoder the knob in the HA field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will move in tandem with the enc
476. xample of the SCENE STORE window used to enter a scene title or comment cursor The box that shows the characters you ve entered will display a vertical line called the cursor which indi cates the current position 2 Use the keyboard window in the touch screen to enter the desired characters When you press a character in the keyboard window the corresponding character will be entered in the box and the cursor will move to the right Input the subsequent characters in the same way When inputting characters you can use the following buttons in the keyboard window COPY button Copies the string of characters that are selected highlighted in the text box CUT button Deletes and copies the string of characters that are selected highlighted in the text box PASTE button Inserts the string of characters copied by COPY or CUT at the cursor location or overwrites the cur rently selected range of characters CLEAR button Deletes all characters that have been input in the text input box INS button Inserts a space blank at the cursor position DEL button Deletes the character at the right of the cursor or the string of characters selected in the text box M7CL Owners Manual BS button Deletes the character at the left of the cursor or the string of characters selected in the text box TAB button This button accesses the next selectable item For example in the SC
477. y Edit the settings The second set The first set Buffer memory 6 You can press the COMPARE button repeat edly to compare the first and second sets of settings Each time you press the COMPARE button the cur rent settings will be exchanged with the settings held in the buffer memory Unlike the Paste operation the Compare operation always lets you return to the previous settings as long as the buffer memory has not been overwritten e The settings in the buffer memory can also be used for the Paste operation Of the two types of GEQ using the tool buttons in a rack where a Flex15GEQ is selected will cause the settings to be exchanged individually with the buffer memory Using the tool buttons M7CL Owner s Manual Basic operation of the M7CL 5 37 38 1 M7CL Owners Manual Chapter 4 Connections and setup This chapter explains how to make audio input output connections and how to perform the setup required when starting the M7CL for the first time Analog input connections Connections and setup 10000000000 K REMOTE R AES EBU aaa 3 2 1 e D D INPUT jacks 1 32 1 48 are used mainly to connect microphones or monaural line level devices ST IN jacks 1 4 L R are used mainly to connect stereo line level devices NOTE In the default state the ST IN jacks are not patched Racks 5 8 are assig
478. y the input signal Input trigger level i e the signal 60 to 0 dB level required to trigger recording or playback Once playback has been triggered subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time START Playback start point in milliseconds Playback end point in milliseconds LOOP Loop start point in milliseconds LOOP 0 100 Number of times the sample plays PITCH Nod Playback pitch shift tones FINE 50 to 50 cents Playback pitch shift fine PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on off messages START SAMPLE 0 131000 Playback start point in samples ee 0 131000 Playback end point in samples SAMPLE LOOP x SAMPLE 0 131000 Loop start point in samples 1 0 0 5941 0 ms fs 44 1 kHz 0 0 ms 5458 3 ms fs 48 kHz 1000 to 1000 ms REC DLY MOMENT PAPE CONTI INPUT TRG LVL M7CL Owners Manual STEREO REVERB Two input two output stereo reverb REV TIME 0290 REV TYPE ad stage Reverb type INI DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion left right reverb 0 10 spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density Balance of early reflections and E R BAL 0 10096 reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections THRU 21 2 Hz LN 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LP 50 0 Hz
479. you want to assign channels 4 Press the SEL key of the input channels output channels you may select more than one that you want to assign The SEL keys of the assigned channels will light and the corresponding channels will be highlighted in red in the channel display field of the window To can cel an assignment press a lit SEL key once again to make it go dark 5 Assign channels to other mute groups in the same way You are free to assign a single channel to more than one mute group 6 When you finish making assignments press the CLOSE button to close the popup window and press the x symbol in the function access area CH JOB display You will return to the previous screen The DCA MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indi cates the mute group s to which each channel is assigned Numbers that are lit red in the lower line of this field indicate the mute groups to which that chan nel belongs Using mute groups Controlling mute groups To use mute groups you must first assign the Mute On Off function for a mute group 1 8 to a user defined key then operate that user defined key DCA MUTE GROUP field T In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen Selecting the mute groups to which specific channel will belong 1 Press the SEL key of the input channel output channel that you want to assign 2 Press any one of the encoders of th

Yamaha M7CL V1 Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents